Home

Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Operation - Pro

1. 4 Select Classic local users authenticate as themselves and click the OK button Network access Sharing and security model for locallaccountsmlied Ed Local Security Setting Network access Sharing and security model for local accounts Cla al users authenti S Guest only local users authenticate as Guest Cancel Apply A 21 A 6 Changing Windows XP Security Level selves and close the Local Security Settings dialog box Security Settings 83 Account Policies Password Policy Account Lockout Policy CA Secure Onto Public Key Policies Software Restriction Policie a IP Security Policies on Local Interactive logon Message title for users attempting ta log on Interactive logon Number of previous logons to cache in case domain cont Interactive logon Prompt user to change password before expiration Interactive logon Require Domain Controller authentication to unlock works Interactive lo
2. click OK Line Setting Character Setting Display Setting Graph Setting Line style Image e Line rColor le om D C Other OK Cancel Apply Line Select the ruled line that you wish to use among 6 styles Also designate the thickness of the ruled line The unit is point and it is defaulted to 1 point Color Select the ruled line color among 16 colors If you do not find one that you wish to use among those click Other The Color Setup dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use Setting a Character 1 Click the Character Setting tab in the Option dialog 2 Items on the Character Setting tab appear Designate each item and then click OK Line Setting Character Setting Display Setting Graph Setting poet sf Ore Gro Und colo TI pile Hm i O MOLA 9 Data r Background color Preview ae ng Other _ Font Row hight MS Sans Serif regular 8pt Font 3 OK Cancel Apply 7 22 7 2 Device View Select Select which texts you wish to change Title texts on the top or D
3. the GP J Transfer JEE Transfer Setup View Options Help Prepare E Ek Receive boo tanster Method Automatic Create system boot data of CF Card System Setup Automatic Send system boot data to CF Card Send To Ethernet Create backup data Create PRW file Prepare Status Send backup data Receive backup data Create Dictionary Send Dictionary Receive Dictionary Send JPG Files Receive JPG Files Start GP w eb Compiler Shot Tienefer Exit NUM Send Transter Setup View Options Help Screen JA Ps BE BE E button Ans mon Project File Project D pr Description Birine 8 2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs The GP displays the following information when the screen data is being transferred Receive the application data Downloading the screen data from the upper screen for maintenance Don t turn the GP power off To turn the GP power off while downloading might destroy the data inside the GP For how to setup a GP for Ethernet refer to A 4 GP Ethernet Settings Reference gt A 4 GP Ethernet Settings From GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 4 0 only screen data transfer is required The Network Project file s data is not sent As a result the sending of the same screen data to multiple GPs at the same time is possible When the Network Project file is modified use
4. File Edt View Inset Project Build Layout Tools Window Help z jelz ugs v mjo e EA amp a El r d jp EDT IFE Trance El e 24 E EE Ps D Sample resources R Dialog E IDD ABOUTBOX DD SAMPLE DI l icon Sting Table Eg Version ELODO Place dialog contra Kili F Tea 82 oe e ge Ready 2807 Jr s0x14 JGeanl 9 63 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 11 Click Customize on Tools of the Microsoft Visual C menu E fie Edt View Insert Project Bui SAMPLE_DIALOG Dialog rds jals najs ea id Layout Toots Ghee CSampleDig Petes members PEJ B Sample resources 8 89 Dialog D ABOUTBOX k D_SAMPLE _ DI R leon E String T able B E Version Ay OLE C Source Browser AY Visual Component Manager 7 Register Control A Eror Lookup Z ActiveX Control Test Container SSS Macro Record Quick Macro CrleShifte R Play Quick Maco Chi Shifts AF12 mez raserte OM Object Viewer Res i lea Fs lage zje n Customizes the Tools menu and t
5. 4 mtom Pro Studio Fil EdME Tools Programming Support DataViewDI Configure ew HelplH aT Device View r El Mee T oven Ea mom Spmbellltem Tue Address Dae Type Polmg Tr G Network Entry Node EE naa Sarpin Status F Provider Information SG BP Action List sd Option z F HEI AFIL HIHI AAE p id A 7 2 Device View 2 The Open dialog appears Select the device data DV that you wish to playback and then click Open Open Look in I E My Documents al 21 Hdb al 21 Har Lal 21 0 H07 File name Files of type l Cancel A You can also playback data in the saving process 7 26 7 2 Device View 3 The contents of device data that you wish to playback are displayed on Device View You can playback device data using various buttons on Device View i Device View Sl File E Option DataEdit Sampling for es fon im ltem name Node name Device name Valu 2030 GP2300L 2030 a 2031 GP2300L 2031 a 2032 GP2300L 2032 16 2033 GP2300L 2033 o 2034 GP2300L 2034 o 2035 GP2300L 2035 10 2036 GP2300L 2036 10 Saved Time 2037 GP2300L 2037 o 2038 GP2300L 2038 72 2039 GP2300L 2039 111 2101 1933 d lasis YL E
6. 14 Alarm Blocks Data 15 Alarm Block6 Data 16 Alarm Block Data fr T n ear bob Help 4 74 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Data ID and Setup Items The following data shows the contents of data IDs and setup items per data ID 0 Device Value Writes device values such as GP GLC Factory Gateway PLC or PC in cells Node Name Normally designate the Provider node If you do not designate the node name data is read from the Provider source node when an Action is started by Provider information When the Action is started by the Command Panel data is read from the PC where the Command Panel exists Device Name Designate the data source device name Device Type Designate the data type Number Designate the number of data items used Reads data designated by Device Type as many times as designated by Number from the device designated by Device Name and writes those in designated cells If there are too many devices data which cannot be written within the cell range of the Action area will be truncated 1 PC Time Use this ID to write PC internal clock time to a cell You can use this ID for example if you wish to record time when a job is performed Time display format is designated via the cell s Write Setting Display Format settings 2 GP Time Use this ID to write GP GLC Factory
7. Help is F1 key e With Excel you cannot use DDE to write data because Excel does not support data writing as a DDE client To write data to Excel use the VBA function Reference gt 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function If you use Windows XP you cannot execute write using the DDE feature 2 Select Programming Support P DDE String Copy Or right click the symbol name and then select DDE String Copy OE SA PS Pro Studio File Edie Took T Programming Supponi DateView2 Configuels View Heleltl Se es VES Declare Function Eiz S VBA Wite function Address _ Da ta Type Polling Ti APS VBARead function 5 Network Entry Modhe Local D40 T6 BitfSigned 1000 Eg WINDOWS N VC Declare Function tsonal Computer Local D41 16 BitfSigned 1000 Fom Om MELSEC ONA WC write function IELSEC Qn CPU B WINDOWS 88 VC Read function onal Computer bead Provider Informatio Lg Action List Copy the string for DDE PROSERVRINode Symbol to clip board 3 32 3 4 Using the DDE Function 3 When the following dialog appears you can paste the copied string into any DDE compatible software Message SPROSERVRIMELSEC QNAI D40 WORD This string was copied to the clip board Flease paste and
8. Symboler Type Address Data Type Paling Tr 040 WORD Local D40 16 Bilsigned 1000 Windows Personal Computer D41 WORD Local DA 16 BilSigned 1000 AITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn CFU indows Personal Computer Edi Sybil Delete Symbal am Fester Provider Information Eeh Prenton Delete Provides Infamaation Riegjehendtjam Ed dation Dekan s Register new symbol in this node E MUM 3 2 Registering Symbols 2 The Register Symbol window then appears Enter all items and click OK Create from Device Address El Global Symbol Data Type Bit 32 Bit Float Double String i Signed O Unsigned Hex OJ BED Polling Time 10001 ms append JR ETR TJ Canal Help A symbol must Consist of 31 characters or fewer Begin with an alphabetic letter Use alphanumeric characters no differentiation between upper and lowercase letters _ underscore tilde and 80h or higher ASCH characters Create from Address After selecting a Device Address click on this button to automatically register the Device Address as a symbol Global Symbol Clicking on the Global Symbol check box automatically designates t
9. OK Cancel 7 6 7 2 Device View Be sure to connect to the GP system since the communication process will start with the designated GP system when you click OK Append Use this button to append the device to sample data If you click this button the Append dialog box same as the Data sampling source dialog will appear so that you can designate devices to append Delete Use this button to delete lines Select lines to delete and then click Delete Upper Lower Use these buttons to change the order of lines Select the line that you wish to change the order and then click either Upper or Lower If you designate Special Protcol symbols to Device name when you edit items directly in the Data Input dialog the maximum number of read that you can input in the Number of Data field will be restricted to the contents of the table below Device Type to Maximum Number of Access Format Read Bit Device Bit 255 16 Bits Device Bit 255 16 bits 255 32 bits 127 Single precision floating point 127 Double precision floating point 63 Character string 510 single byte 32 Bits Device 16 bits 255 32 bits 255 Single precision floating point 255 Double precision floating points 127 Character string 510 single byte If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers the
10. OK Cancel Apply Help Even if a newly created Action area s settings are cancelled while being cre ated an area with no settings will be placed on the worksheet In this case simply select and delete the area Group Name Group means a group of an Action area where data is written by one Action Perform the process of the Action area belonging to the group at one time by designating the group name Enter a common group name for Action areas that you wish to perform at one time A group name is not case sensitive You cannot use space or comma in a group name and not sharp in front A name with in front is regarded as a command either The number on the right of the Group Name entry field is the number that the system automatically assigns to this Action area so that you do not have to designate it The default value of GROUP1 is set in the Group Name entry field Area Cell Range It indicates a cell range occupied by an Action area 4 72 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Write Method You can select any of the following 4 types Overwrite Type In Overwrite type data write is always started from the same location cell on the upper left corner of the Action area when writing data repeatedly Historical Type In Historical type data write is started from the next line of the line that writing was completed at the previous ti
11. ELT TT TT TT TT TT TT 4 Sec lt wE Please choose the new entry node 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes 3 The following dialog box will appear to show that the node has been registered Search Nodes Node Status IP Address PLO Type Non Entry 10 100 0 24 Windows Entry 10 100 0 99 GP HITACHI Bend 4 Ser Please choose the new entry node Entry 3 2 Registering Symbols 3 2 Registering Symbols The following describes how to enter symbol name device address data type and polling time data The device address you enter will be converted internally into a device code that can be used inside the GPs Polling time refers to how often Pro Server polls the GP when data is read out through a DDE You may also import symbols that have been exported from GP PRO PBIII Symbols can be registered for each network entry node The following description assumes that the program s main window is open 1 Click on the right section of the window Or click on the right side window and then click Register Symbol in the Edit E menu RHA PS Pro Studio HOT Fil EanE Tootsi Programming Support DataviemtD Configure S Viem Help H Da Pese Nede Edit Node So AF Delete Node Sy
12. Print Setup Printer Name Properties Status Ready Type OKI MICROLINE S03PSIII F Where LP Comment Paper Orientation Sizer Ad h l 2 Portrait Source Automatically Select Fl CH Landscape DK Cancel The contents of the Page Setup dialog differ depending on your printer Refer to the user manual of your printer for details Preview 1 Click Preview in the File F menu 2 The print preview appears Copy to Clipboard 1 Click Copy to Clipboard in the File F menu 2 The data value displayed on GP Viewer is copied into the clipboard 3 Paste the data value onto the application used You can only copy data in the data display area of GP Viewer into the clipboard You cannot copy data such as a title Show Hide Time Bar 1 Clicking File Show Hide Time Bar enables setting the System Time Bar to Show or Hide mode Exit 1 Click Exit X in the File F menu Exits GP Viewer 7 52 Options This is selected on Data View D of the menu bar 1 Select Option on Data View D of the menu bar 7 3 GP Viewer AM mtom Pro Studio File E EdE Tools I Programming Support P Dataview D Configure 5 View Help H Node 10 10 mation ipe P2300 ligg Provider Infor ir Action List Data Sampling Status System lime bar Option
13. Help is F1 key System Variables can be set to Show or Hide mode System Vari ables can be set to Show or Hide by clicking the icon or via the View V menu s System Variables V setting screen After a Symbol is imported the System Variable is set to Hide mode 3 18 3 3 Registering Provider Data 3 3 Registering Provider Data Designate data that GP of each node provides periodically or when the trigger condition is satisfied as well as data storage location for GP or PC which receives data Designated provider information becomes effective by transferring the network project file to GP The following description starts from the state after the main screen is opened If constant is selected in the Provider Information when you open the network project file in a different environment Japanese OS English OS the contents of Symbol Name are displayed incorrectly Please make the settings of Pro vider Information once again 1 Select the registered entry node and then select Edit E Register Provider Information from the menu bar SLA PS Pro Studio OT Fil EdnE Tootsi Programming Support DetsviemiD Configure S Viem Help H Register Node Edland Deletes Mas Project D UDP Fort Number 1998 10 2015 8000 H Windows Personal Computer Ean ITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn CPU Bla Simbi
14. r Destination Configuration Version 4 50 ME Node Name NODE F Ok evice Mame Reference Cancel ata Type Bit Fl Help H p Readout File Readout File Name Reference Readout Method All the Row i Readout Detail Configuration Start Row Number of Rows Start Position Number of Readouts Node Name Designates the write destination Node When the action is started default setting is NODE original data provider GP Device Name Designates the write destination device address or symbol name Designating DEV Device Address indirectly allows you to use the provider s device name Clicking the Reference button calls up the following screen and allows you to directly enter the device name and symbol name Input of device name Input either device adress or symbol name Device name Fr e ra eon co m wlo l elo i Symbol name a Device type Bit Cancel Data Type Designates the data type of write data 4 60 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Readout File Name Designates the CSV file to be read Filenames can be designated indirectly For details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions Readout Method Designates how the CSV d
15. Time Setup Saved Time This field shows the saved time of the saved device data The field shows from the left the saving start time the time for currently displayed data and the last saved time When the current status is displayed the time for currently displayed data is identical to the last saved time Time Bar Saved data can be displayed by sliding the time bar control to either side The data saving process continues even while you operate the control Time Setup You can designate the time unit for one graduation of the time bar Now Play Display Switch Now and Play buttons are available You can playback the saved data from the designated time either by sliding the time bar control to the time that you wish to start the playback or by clicking the Play button after clicking the time for currently displayed data the center field of Saved Time and then entering the time to start the playback 7 27 7 2 6 Other Features This section describes the File menu and options of Device View 7 2 Device View 1 If you click File E of Device View 9 options are available The following describes the overview of each option Exporting Data OP KST File E Option Data Edit Sampling Data Export Pa Savelg Device name valula Save asl 2030 0 AS f 2031 a age setup Preview 20
16. Spmbollltem Type Address 152030 WO Local L52030 I Computer HavalogicTime Local GLCH1 EConacru H voScanTime Local GLCH2 HCommand Local GLCH3 Day Local GLOH4 HEdtCount Local GLCHS HFaulCode Local GLCH E HFaulRung Local GLCH7 ForceCount Local GLCHE HOStausf Local BLOCKS HOStaus Local GLCO HOStaus d Local BLOK HOStaus 4 Local GLC H2 HOStaust Local GLCHM3 HOStausf Local GLCHA HIOStausle Local GLCHT5 OStatus 7 Local GLCHS HlOStatust Local GLCH7 HOStaus 9 Local GLCHB LadderMonitor Local GLCH19 HLogicTime Local GLCH20 Month Local GLCH21 HPercenitic Local GLCHZ2 HPercentMemC Local GLCH23 Platform Local GLCH24 HiRungNo Local GLCH25 ScanCount Local GLCH26 H5canTime Local 4 GLCH2 Check Validity of C Package Symbols NUM 3 16 3 2 Registering Symbols 3 The checking process is executed and the following dialog box will be displayed when no errors exist Pro Studio Error 0 symbols Registered 20 symbols If the checking result includes errors following dialog boxes will appear Dialog Contents Solution The C Package symbol may have been changed Do you want to import the C Package symbol If you wish to update the C Package symbol and continue checking click Yes If you continue checking without upd
17. Value Data Type Value Data Type 1 Bit 7 Unsigned 32 bits decimal 2 Signed 16 bits decimal 8 32 bits hexadecimal 3 Unsigned 16 bits decimal 9 BCD 32 bits 4 16 bits hexadecimal 10 Single precision floating point 5 BCD 16 bits 11 Double precision floating point 6 Signed 32 bits decimal 12 Character string The following describes the operation contents of this action using Microsoft Excel Sheet Example Microsoft Access Table Example and Table Example in Database the contents of tablel in database called DBA in the previous page as reference examples If provider data indicating a line within the sheet table is 1 it means that the 2nd line of the sheet table has been designated The tablel table in DBA database refer to Microsoft Excel Sheet Example and Microsoft Access Table Example in the previous page is acquired according to the setting in the 2nd line Next the line where the same value as that of provider data designating seqNo is stored is searched from the acquired seqNo field of the table1 table in DBA database For example if the value of provider data designating seqNo is 2 the line with seqNo refer to Table Example in Database in the previous page of 2 will be searched When the provider data s data type is not string if the provider data s value is 0 the bottom most row is searched Do not use 0 with segNo
18. ER Fl F 7 EA Program Files E Pro Serwer with Studio E NPIDataase Help SRM ED Zhzms 5 Create new file Append data to file Attaches a Time Stamp in front of data Attaches a Time Stamp behind data 0 Time stamp is not used Save File Designate the folder to save files File Name If you select Writes Data to CSV File in the Edit Action dialog and click Parameter the Designate the name of the CSV file File names can be designated indirectly For details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions Save Method If you wish to create a new file always check Create new file and if you wish to add data such as history check Append data to file Time Stamp If you select Attaches a Time Stamp in front of data the time the data was provided will be written in front of data If you select Attaches a Time Stamp behind data the time the data was provided will be written at the end of data 4 59 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 4 3 14 Writes Data from CSV file This Action writes designated CSV file data to the designated device address 1 Click on the Edit Action dialog box s Writes Data from CSV file selection to bring up the following dialog box Detail Configuration
19. 3 2 Registering Symbols e When importing C Package symbols be sure to send the Network Project file to the GP GLC Factory Gateway e When using Pro Control Editor to Add or Delete GLC variables GLC symbols be sure to import the C Package symbols again When GLC variables are added or deleted the related variable s information is remapped to GLC memory If old mapping information is used when Pro Server accesses the GLC it can result in a unit operation error Do not import C Package symbols while a Data View is performing Data Sampling Prior to importing symbol data be sure to close all Data Views and use the Data View D screen s Data Sampling Status dialog box to confirm that all data sampling is stopped 3 15 3 2 4 Checking C Package Symbol 3 2 Registering Symbols Check if the system is running using the same file by comparing Special Protocol symbols imported to the Pro Server s network project file npj with those in the project file prw transferred to GP 1 2 Select the entry node to check the C Package symbol from Network Entry Nodes PS Pro Stu Fill Edi E Took T Programming Suppor Dataview D Configure View HelplH Ble l eE ee E APS Syrbolltem ve Address EE Network Enty Node 152030 WO Local L52030 3 WIND
20. 2 Click Wizard in the Auto Start field The Provider Information Setting Wizard will appear Provider Information Setting Wizard welcome Welcome to the Provider Information Setting Wizard Provider Information must be entered prior to performing an Action This Wizard allows you to easily set up Provider Information Alter you finish setting up this information please send your Network Project to the Mode To continue click Nest Cancel Help 3 Click on the Next button Provider Node Designation Which Node will perform the Action tie iia Fossett lt Back ne area Help 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 4 After designating the entry node to perform the Action click on the Next button To add an entry node click Register Node and register the new entry node in the Register Node dialog box Provider Information Setting Wizard Designating Providing Conditions Designating Providing Conditions What is the Action s tigger OF When the designated device is turned ON OJ Designated Interval Designated Time lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 5 After designating the Action to use for the Action trigger click on the Next button If When the screen s button is touc
21. 31 Click Yes Microsoft Visual C c PROGRAM FILESSPRO FACESPRO SERVER WITH STUDIOYPRO 5 DKYWVCAS sample iDebugiSample exe This file does not exist Deo you want to build it 9 70 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 32 Click Button1 to display three data from the symbol D40 WORD in the ListBox fe Sample Button 9 71 Creating Write Application 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 33 This section describes the application to write three read data when clicking Button1 Execute the same operations step 10 through 12 as in Creating Read Application fe Sample Buttoni Write three read data 34 Select EditBox and then paste it in Dialog You should paste three EditBox s e Microsoft Visual C Sample re IDD_SAMPLE_DIALOG Dialoy File Edt Yiew Insert Project Build Layout Tools Window Help CAR mea us JEJEn Hans Hja i oe wg ae C5ampledig lioen c I Workspace Sample 1 project D E Sample files A E Souce Files 1E Sample cpp j 8 Samplere EE ampled cop 2 Std ts cpp EA Header Files E E Resource Files e E ReadMetxt fan z ica HTAA
22. An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine OK if Cancel f palp ii Help 2 Select Microsoft Access Driver mdb and click Finish Create New Data Source Select a driver for which pou want to set up data source Name Version Company Mee 3 50 342800 Microsof 4 Back Gy Cancel 3 Enter the Data Source Name and click Select ODE osoft e 9 etup x Data Source Name DSN OK Description gt Cancel p Database Hep Create Repair Compact lil Advanced p System Database i None 12 Database System Database i Options gt i 4 49 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 4 Select the previously created Access mdb file and click OK Select Database Database Name Directories T Bk ProAicpA mdb cM Sactions readdata SSE T Cancel er E 15Actions ReadData He O Bead Only jiis m Exclusive i h 5 phd List Files of Type Drives i Network al El c C DRIVE_38E Iku Access Databases m 5 Click OK ODBC Microsoft Access 97 Se
23. Upload of GP JPEG Data appl ication Exce Access data BZ K Data output to CSV file LY Va Alarm Data Up loads de Downl oad Up load ap Logging Data Down loads of Filing Data Ss Backup feature device data to GP internal via Access Trigger CF card or Trigger SG PLC SRAM FROM PLC Filing feature Z GPUPEG Data 1 6 Overview of Data View 1 6 Overview of Data View When a designated trigger s condition s set by Pro Studio is are satisfied PLC data is collected by the GP s resident 2 Way Driver and saved on the server PC Data View allows you to display the collected data on Pro face s exclusive browser GP Viewer Device View in real time You can also change the data collection condition or set the synchronization style with GPs GP Viewer only using Data View Device data of multiple PLCs can be collected at the same time Device View only In addition to the above you can playback device data already collected on Data View Playback Feature or on user created applications System Time Bar Sampling device data Output Reference to file i Device View Application GP V i ewer User Application B db gt 4 a a Trigger Trigger FE PLC for Manufacturer A PLC for Manufacturer B PLC for Manufacturer C Collected device data can be
24. a Ready 1 1855 JET 80x65 J BEAD Z AA Woe 4 8 Button 40 Select the symbol name to write to among symbols registered on Pro Server Select the heading symbol to write to S Proiect Pro Studio TOP FilelE EditE Too I Programming SupportlE Dataiew D Configue 5 view HelplH Dis el ae Project Symbeltem Type address Data Type Polling D E Network Enty Node E Local DO0040 16BilSigned 1000 a GP 10 100 010 OMRON SYSMAC C SERIES DOOM WORD Local D00041 16BitfSigned 1000 Oe GP2 10 100 011 MITSUBISHI MELSECAna LINK 00042 WORD Local DO0042 16BifSioned 1000 Lf WINDOWS 10 100 0 20 Windows Personal Computer EE Provider Information fai Action List ol F Help is Fi key i NUM F 41 Click VC Write Function on Programming Support of the menu TojectA Pro Studio jm es iE EdiE Tool Programming SuppoiP Dataview D Configue S Via HelplH alen VBADeclare Function VBAAWTite function PrajeclA VBArRead function Symbolltem D Network Entry Nod Pa GP 10 1000 Om GP 10 100 0 WC Declare Function D0004 WORD INK P00082 WORD amp WINDOWS 1 VC Read function mpuler poli Provider Informatiog m tS Action List D
25. Je Rewrite Lower Edge Triager I Trigger Provider Node Consumer Node s e fr MELSEC_QNA WINDOWS NT Symbol Name Symbol Length Constant Value d F AJACTIONZ r Constant String gt f B GROUP1 L CAMP _ MELSEC_QNA Symbol Name 4 90 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action a SSN If you enter Provider information all character strings in a command line will be registered as lt String gt In this case if you wish to add or edit command line character strings you should edit only the contents of the fixed value because the data count is calculated automatically If you set the data count to more than the number of character strings in the fixed value unfixed data may be written so you may not change the count For Provider Information dialog box information refer to 4 2 3 Registering Provider Information 4 91 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 4 4 8 When Registering Using Create report using Excel Action The following information should understand prior to registering using the Create Report using Excel Action Important When Starting Excel on PCs Running Create Report using Excel Action Dru Be aware of the following points in environments where files with xls
26. est D 8710 2015 8000 E Network Entiy Node f WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Cd GP View Wa MELSEC ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC GACEO J dl WINDOWS 95 10 230 230 119 windows Personal Computer GP2300L1 10 100 0 100 MEMORY LINK SIO Type KE Provider Information k Action List Setup network configuration ia NUM F 3 57 3 9 Security Function 2 The Network Configuration dialog box will appear Enter a password in Network Remote Password and click the OK button Network Configuration Project ID 1988 10 20 15 464 Port No 8000 Cancel Advanced Network Remote Password Password Confirm rUsing 32 bit access with a 16 bit device LowHigh order is fixed Automatic device detection HelpiH Ethernet Card When selecting a node via a personal computer that has not been registered as a network node and selecting Tool s Remote Logon from the Menu Bar a dialog box will appear asking for the password Remote Connection MELSEC QNA 10 230 244 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC QnA CPL Remote Connection al CANCEL 3 58 3 10 Configuring the System 3 10 Configuring the System The following describes how to enter Pro Server and Pro
27. Designating LIB files via Visual C NET 1 When designating LIB files using Microsoft Visual C NET right click the project s name within the Solution Explorer window shown below and select Properties MT Solution Easvsampis I project a Build i Rebuild Clean Link i Deploy add 7 Add Web Reference i Set as StartUp Project Debug gt Save EasySample Paste B xX Remove Fraperti Rename Fasysal Properties 9 60 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function In the resulting Property Pages select Linker Input Designate the LIB file ProEasy lib in the Additional Dependencies column ProEasy lib is located in the Install folder s Pro SDK Vc Public sub folder C Program Files Pro face Pro Server with Pro Studio Pro SDK Vc ProEasy lib in the following figure EasySmpl Property Pages Configuration ActivetDebug TF estrorm Activecwinga Fl testen manager E Configuration Propertiegla Additional Dependencies c Program Files pro face Pro Server with General E Ignore All Default Libraries No Debugging Ignore Specific Library Cc Module Definition File E Linker Add Module to Assembly General Embed Managed Resource File 9 Force Symbol References Debug Delay Loaded DLLs System Optimization Embedded IDL Advanced Command Line Resources MIDL Browse
28. Using 32 bit access with a 16 bit device Low High order is fred Automatic device detection Port No For port numbers ten numbers in series are used starting from the designated number Network Remote Password For a remote password through network refer to 3 9 2 Remote Password Setup Using 32 bit Access with a 16 bit device Selects the access order of sequential two 16 bit devices which are regarded as a single 32 bit device 3 61 3 11 Configuring the Network 3 The Advanced Configuration window will appear Enter all necessary data and click OK Advanced Configuration Character Time Out Em ms Connection Time Out 22000 ms Device RAWTime Out 3000 ie Action Time Out 22000 ms Frame Time Out mo me TeraPTime Out 2000 ms Cancel Use Defaults HelpiH Character Time Out Pro Server is normally used via Ethernet however this is the reserved parameter to be used when you improve and use Pro Server for serial connection This setup is not used currently One byte of data will be sent at one time in serial communication and if the interval exceeds the value designated here it will be regarded as receive error and also regarded as timeout Connection Time Out While currently establishing connection if there is no communication via the connection for the period of time designated h
29. e Transferring screen data in on line mode or downloading a network project file will temporarily cause the Transfer screen to appear and all other data transfer operations to stop After screen transfer is completed the screen will re activate and regular operation will resume 1 6 1 3 System Configuration Using an Ethernet protocol with the 2 Way Driver Pro face s GP2000 GP 2501 does not support this function and GLC2000 Series units can simultaneously use an Ethernet communication protocol and the 2 Way Driver feature to communicate with a PLC How ever the IP address and the Port No used for differ depending on whether the internal Ethernet I F or the Expansion Ethernet I F is used Network with only one GP Ethernet I F PC Ethernet Using the GP GLC s internal Ethernet I F to communicate with a PLC allows you to also use the 2 Way Driver feature However while you will need only one IP Address you will need to designate two Port No s One will be for when you transfer data to a PLC and the other will be when using the 2 Way feature In order to transfer data to a PLC you will need to enter your GP GLC unit s Ethernet settings via the OFFLINE mode s INITIALIZE gt PLC SETUP gt PLC SETUP gt SETUP ETHERNET INFORMA TION screen However the Subnet Mask and IP Address must be entered in the PLC SETUP gt SETUP ETHERNET EXT INFORMATION screen This data must also be entered i
30. amp Cancel Apply Select parameters that you wish to display in the data display area Check each item that you wish to display The following describes the overview of each item Item name Node name Device name Value Data Type Item Status Error Code Data number Upper Limit Alarm Upper Limit Alarm Lower Limit Lower Limit Graph Designated symbol name Designated node name Designated device name The latest data Designated device data type reserved Error code when an error occurred in sampling normaly 0 reserved The upper limit value to display the graph Even if you designate a greater value than this the graph remains in the 100 status The alarm upper limit value to display the graph including this value The alarm lower limit value to display the graph including this value The lower limit value to display the graph If you designate a less value than this the graph will not be displayed The horizontal bar graph is displayed according to values of Upper Limit Alarm Upper Limit Alarm Lower Limit and Lower Limit 7 24 7 2 Device View Line count per page Designate the number of data lines per page that you wish to display in the data display area If the actual number of data exceeds the number of data per page the
31. zle Ready 25 40 JET 80x15 JJREAD a Sample Microsoft Visual C Sample rc IDD SAMPLE DIALOG Dialog Fie Edt View Inset Project Build Layout Tools Window Help EE ja je SI ja Fl Eseries Resource Symbols FEN trance HR e g E Resource Includes Full Screen Workspace A0 Dutput Alez Debug Windows t Raih T Properties Hesouce Fies ReadMe txt Alls Enter 9 72 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 36 Select IDC_EDIT1 in Control IDs of the Member Variables tab and then click Add Variable MFC ClassWizard ea es x Message Maps Project ple Member Variables Automation I Actives Events Class Info Class name CSemeedig Ch Awe amples Control IDs IDC_EDIT2 WWickS amples S ampleDlg cpp Type ampleDlg h E S Member Add Class Y Add Variable Glebe Vanable Upda Collyran Bin Description Pu C 37 Enter m_Edit1 in Member variable name select short in Variable type and then click OK Repeat step 36 and 37 f
32. 4 52 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters The sheet table is searched again on the action side to acquire the field name and the value of the designated part is acquired In this example according to the setting of the 2nd line in the sheet table field1 is acquired and then the value of 101 existing in field1 in the 2 nd line refer to Table Example in Database in the previous page is acquired Finally the acquired value is written to device designated in the sheet table in the designated data type In this example according to the setting of the 2nd line of the sheet table the value is written to D100 device Device D100 of the provider node as signed 16 bits decimal data Type 2 The following table shows data types that can be designated to the symbol name of the Provider node per Action fees 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charac ee Bit signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Download from Database x O O O x x x x x x x O 1 If you select Download from Database in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Database information Download from the database Version 4 10 Login name Password OK Cancel Server name Driver name SOL Server Oo Normally connected to server
33. 4 40 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 1 If you select Download Recipe Data for Excel in the Edit Action dialog box and click Param eter the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Version 4 10 Book Location 3 Program Files Cancel g Proface ro Server with Studio elp E Fra 5 h Stud Help H PJDataBase Book Name Select Cel Sheet Sheet Ce a _ Use template file One Sheet Mode Any Sheet Mode wo elect Mode Book Location Designate the Excel file name If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents you designated are displayed If the folder does not exist the following window appears Book Location Folder does not exist C AMy DocumentsD ata Do you create new folder f No Cancel Click Yes to create the folder The folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled Select Cell Sheet Select the desired Excel sheet name to read When Any Sheet Mode is selected in Column change sheet name will change to Sheet n Select Cell Cell Designate the first cell to be read Click Reference to allow you to designate the cell us
34. Project File Project D pr Description Fil ine i 6 The transfer is completed if no error message is displayed 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Tools This chapter describes monitoring tools Device Monitoring GP Status Monitoring Read Performance Measuring Tool Log Viewer 6 1 Device Monitoring 6 1 Device Monitoring Any selected device can be monitored via this feature which allows you to check the status of data commu nication Also in the Device Monitor window you can specify the IP and device addresses 1 Click on the symbol name you want to monitor SA PS Pro Studio FlefF EditE Took Tl Programming Suppor DataviewD Configure View Helplt see l g APS 5 pmbolfltem Type J Address Data Type Polling Ti GF Network Entry Node Local D40 16 Bilsigned 1000 bE WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer D41 WORD Local D41 Oa MELSEC_QNA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn CPU inf WINDOWS_95 10 230 230 11 9 windows Personal Computer 465 Provider Information r Action List 16 BitSigned 1000 Help is F1 key Symbol Item The registered symbol names are listed here 2 Click Device Monitor in the Tools T menu SA PS Pro Studio AE Edie ToostT Programmi
35. Selection Single F E Border I Horizontal scroll Want key input Diner draw im Sort E Yettical scroll Disable no scroll E Noatity o No redraw No integral height im Hep stings oO Mult column o Use tabstops 15 Click ClassWizard on View of the Microsoft Visual C menu we lal LB SELCHANGE Resource Includes TIE Full Sereer Workspace Alt 0 Output Alt 2 Debug Windows Properties Alt E nter ID Resource Symbols 16 Select the Member Variables tab and then select IDC_LIST1 in Control ID MFC ClassWizard ei es Message Maps Member Vanables Automation Actives Events Class Info Project Class name Add Class Y R e CS ampleD ig Add Variable c WESS amples S ampleDlg h ck WESS amples S ampleD Ig cpp Control D Type Member Dekial IDCANCEL Upah Eallumne a ua Description 9 65 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 17 Click Add Variable and then enter m_List in Member Variable name Select Control in Category and then click OK Add Member Variable H Menber variable name m List I Category Control hd Variable type CListBran F Description map to CListBos member 18 Make sure if the member variable has been ad
36. asrasvensrnnnnnnvnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennene 4 51 4 3 12 Upload of JPEG Datta sneannanonnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnennvnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnee 4 3 13 Writes Data to CSV file rasrannnnnrnnennarnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennene 4 3 14 Writes Data from CSV file 4 4 Using Create report using Excel Action rraasnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 4 65 4 4 1 Registration Procedure of Create report using Excel Action asserasvennnnnnnnvnnnnsnn 4 67 4 4 2 Information Writable to the Report arasveanenannnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennene 4 68 4 4 3 Creating the Report Prototype asrasraasnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennene 4 69 4 4 4 Setting the Report Action rssreasrnsnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnansenennnnnnnnnnnnnennenennennnennennnnnn 4 70 4 4 5 Registering Commands rasveasnannennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnennanennnnannnnnnnnennonnnnnnnnnenennnnnnenenne 4 79 4 4 6 Creating Command Panel Manual Start seanesnovnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnene 4 84 4 4 7 Registering Provider Information Auto Start rrasvennnvrnnvnnnnennnvennnnnnnvennevnnnennnevnnnenne 4 87 4 4 8 When Registering Using Create report using Excel Action rasreasrasvanananvnnannnnenennn 4 92 Chapter 5 GP Setup 5 1 Transfe
37. lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 6 Designate the Consumer Node Name and click on the Next button To add an entry node click Register Node and then register the new entry node in the Register Node dialog box Provider Information Setting Wizard Designating a Consumer Node Consumer Node Designation Designate the Consumer PC used to perform the Action Cre aa Register Mode lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 4 89 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 7 Enter Provider Information Name and click on the Finish buton Provider Information Setting Wizard Adding Provider Infomation Adding Provider Infomation Designate a name for the Provider Information This name will be added to the Network Project File s Provider Information List Provider Information Name PROEXPT10 IF Trigger Conditions ete are changed modify the Provider Information directly in Pro Studio lt Back Finish Cancel Help The Provider Information Setting Wizard will quit exit The Provider Information name now appears in the designated Process Name I Settings Auto Start Manual Start Command Start Timing Settings Use Command Panel PC Screen Auto Register to Panel when adding Command Distri
38. Rewrite Trigger Status ON Status OFF Upper Edge Trigger Lower Edge Trigger olololoj ojo 1 2 olololo olx x 1 1010101 xx Q Q amp xIxIxIx x x O X Setting disabled O Setting enabled Option need to be set when check boxes are checked 1 If you designate Upper Edge Trigger and check OFF Time After Providing the device designated by the symbol name is set to OFF 0 when the providing process is completed 2 If you designate Lower Edge Trigger and check ON Time After Providing the device designated by the symbol name is set to ON 1 when the providing process is completed 3 20 3 3 Registering Provider Data Each item on the Providing Condition tab are as following Power ON Provides only once when the power of provider node is turned ON ON Time Provides only once at the designated time Enter the time Interval Provides according to the designated interval If you wish to limit the period check Limit Period and enter the period Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period Enter the providing interval ms Rewrite Trigger Provides when a device value designated a symbol is rewritten Select the symbol to designate from the pull down list If you wish to limit the period check Limit Period and enter the period Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period Enter also the interval ms
39. Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloat LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDouble LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStr LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use data INT WINAPI ReadDevice LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI ReadDeviceVariant LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 5 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Single Handle Direct Read Function Bit data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBitD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice 16D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice32D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD 16D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloatD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating
40. Standard Microsoft Sans Sel ForeColor Image BE lt ontroltext none ImageAlign MiddleCenter ImageIndex L tnene ImageList RightToLeft Textalign none MiddleCenter Text The text contained in the control 9 83 12 13 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function Double click Form1 s Write button Button1 Enter the code for 16 bit device write WriteDevice16 between the Sub and End Sub statements Here the TextBox value is converted to a numeric value The data will be written into a device designated by PC node s _LS0100_WORD symbol Ee Public Class Formi Inherits System Windows Forms Form A Windows Form Designer generated code Private Sub Buttonl Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As Syst Dim TextDatalll is Short TextDatalO Val Text Boxi Text Uritebevicel6 PC LS0100 WORD TextData 1 H End Sub End Class Double click Form1 s Read button Button2 Enter the code for 16 bit device read ReadDevice16 between the Sub and End Sub statements The data stored in the device designated by PC node s LS0100 WORD is read and displayed in TextBox2 Private Sub Buttonz Click ByVal sender s System Object ByVal e s Syst Dim TextDatall As Short ReadDevicel amp PC LS0100 WORD TextData 1 TextBox2 Text Stri TextData Oj End Sub This
41. Status Ready Type OKI MICROLINE S03PSIII F Where LP Comment Paper Orientation Size Ad h 2 Portrait Source Automatically Select Fl OH Landscape OK Cancel The contents of the Page setup dialog differ depending on your printer Refer to the user manual of your printer for details Preview 1 Click Preview on the File F menu 2 The print preview appears Copy to Clipboard 1 Click Copy to Clipboard on the File F menu 2 The data value displayed on Device View is copied into the clipboard 3 Paste the data value onto the application used You can only copy data in the data display area of Device View into the clipboard You cannot copy data such as a title Show Hide Time Bar 1 Clicking File Show Hide Time Bar enables setting the System Time Bar to Show or Hide mode Exit 1 Click Exit X on the File F menu Exits Device View 7 30 7 2 Device View Option This is selected on Data View D of the menu bar 1 Select Option on Data View D of the menu bar 8 mtom Pro Studio OE FileE Edit E Tools T Programming SupportlP DatsView D Configurets View Help H Se Well Ge Device View Ble kl ke ve Aa Miom Symbolfltern Type f Address Data Type Polling Ti B E Network Entry Node Open Datsyien 0 i Dix ee 10 100 0 99 MEMORY LINK 5 dl Provider
42. k aalen Device View i EE t GPViewer n Spmboll tem Type Address Data Type Be E Network Entry Open Dataview O 2 The DataView Option dialog appears You can select Show Hide of the setup menu and the save button If you uncheck Display menu the Option the Data Edit and the Sampling menus are hidden on GP Viewer If you uncheck Display button UUL gp ULL nm buttons are hidden on GP Viewer DataView Option il Display menu r Device View AmE te Fie Option Dato Edt Samping ge Fog r 0 00 Mij Display button tem name Node name Device name LS000D GF LEADED LE0001 Jer Landoz ep L80003 LA Cancel 7 53 Supported Drawing Commands Among GP PRO PBIII drawing commands the following commands are supported by GP Viewer Only the following drawing features are function properly Among these drawing commands there are some functions not available with GP Viewer Functions available and not available with GP Viewer are listed below for each drawing command line poly line command rectangle command circle ellipse command arc sector command polygon fill command ruler command text string command mark call up command 7 3 GP Viewer The display may differ between GP and GP Viewer even if drawing commands are supported Line Poly
43. 1JETHERNET SETUP ENNET SEP peuasj ea e MY IP ADDRESS MY P ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Designate the IP address on your GP node MY PORT NO GATENAY The IP addresses 32 bits used are divided into 4 groups of 8 Use Base 10 numbers only e SUBNET MASK Designate the subnet mask If unused enter all zeroes here e MY PORT NO Designate the port no on your node Port number range is from 1024 to 65535 Sequential ten ports from MY PORT NO are used GATEWAY Designate the IP address of gateway If unused enter all zeroes here There is only one GATEWAY setting If unused enter all zeroes here A 16 A 4 GP Ethernet Settings 2 SYSLOG SETUP e HOST IP ADDRESS nee prs Designate the IP address for the SYSLOG destination HOST IP ADDRESS 1 Let ee i output Where GPSYSLOG EXE is running OUTPUT LEVEL e FACILITY Default value 1 reserved You may not change the default value e OUTPUT LEVEL Designate the output level Setting range 0 to 4 Default value 0 3 OTHERS SETUP BUZZER ON ERROR OTHERS SEP PREVIOUS Select if buzzer sounds when a 2 Way Driver error occurs BUZZER ON ERROR ON Default value ON DISPLAY WARNING e DISPLAY WARNING Select if warning messages are displayed on the GP s screen A 17 A 5 Optimizing Communication Speed A 5 Optimizing Communication Speed If there are any problems wi
44. Cancel Help H Capture Data Type Select data to read If you selected GP Capture Data the displayed GP screen is captured and uploaded If you selected Video Capture Data the video screen data saved in the CF Card is uploaded If you select Video Capture Data you cannot designate File Name Zero Suppress or Show Browser The default is GP Capture Data Also the maximum number of JPEG files that can be uploaded at one time is 32767 4 56 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Upload from CF Card You should select either to upload all the video screen data in the CF Card or to upload only files that do not exist in the directory designated by Save To or that have been updated This defaults to Upload All Files This item can be designated only when Video Screen Saving Data has been selected in Select Data to Read For information about how to capture video screens Reference gt GP PRO PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual Extended Functions of VM Unit Save To Folder If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents exactly as you designated is displayed If the folder does not exist the following window appears ProRipt Book Location Folder does not exist C AMy DocumentsiyD ata Do you create new folder No Cancel Click Yes to create the folder The folder crea
45. DataView D Configure viewty Helplk Biel la Eg g Dechre Function APS VBA Read function Syrbolllem Type addess Data Type Paling Tr EE Network Entry Nod Local Dadi J6BiSigned 1000 S WINDOWS NY VC Declare Function brsonal Computer DH WORD Local D4 16 BifSigned 1000 Du MELSEC ONA WC Write function ELSEC OnA CPU amp WINDOWS 99 VC Read function sonal Computer IEF Provider Intomatio BR Acton List DDE String Copy Copy the VBA wite command statement by data type to clipboard i NUM Fj 9 Write Command is now copied to the Clipboard Err WriteDevicet 60 MELSEC ANA D40 WORD Enter value integer type here 1 This string was copied to the clip board Please paste and use in your application 3 39 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function 10 In Microsoft Excel select the Control Toolbox from the Views menu s Tool bars feature X Microsoft Excel Book1 FS File gdt view Insert Format Iools Data Window Help Q Burma s Mana Page Break Preview T H30 Standard Joa 2 Formatting 2
46. Designate the method to perform the Action area or commands for Excel Action Area Display If you uncheck Action Area Display the template s Action area will be hidden You can hide it when you wish to modify a template format 4 71 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 3 Select cells to create the area and click Add Area to add the Action area The Action area with grids around selected cells is inserted and the Action Area Properties dialog box appears X Microsoft Excel workreport 02 xls M Ele Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help EEE De BSR s Bes lo meer L pa fem Times aL Ble z v G0 gt 43 Ar A MF Qberator Group Checked Line Name Chocolate Pre Process Leader By Operator LOT No Inserted Action area Action Area Property Detais Group Name C Area Cell Range E EN write Method 0 Overwrite Tr Foto pe eae 0 Device Value F i Node Name Device Name Device Type 1 Bit FF No of Devices Time Stamp In Front Time Stamp Behind No Time Stamp
47. If you click OK the contents of the imported C Package symbol will appear on the screen Nodes with x at the end of those names in the network entry node list means that it imported the Special Protocol If imported Special Protocol symbol names start from numbers _ will be added in the beginning of those symbol names If Special Protocol symbol names also include single byte characters other than characters numbers _ 7 C Y those characters will be converted to _ when imported The special protocol symbol cannot display the device address Therefore all special protocol symbols are displayed as Screen Creation Definition Symbols For other symbols corre sponding device addresses are displayed A PS Pro Studio File E Edit E Tools T Programming Support P Dataview D Configure S View Help H et es Bla el ek APS JE Network Entry Node fy WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer Wa MELSEC ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn amp CPU ie Provider Information ii Action List Symboltem Address Tf counter GLCHI53 counter UP GLCH 54 disc G LCHI55 timer GLOHTSE limer TI GLOHS7 real TGLOHT58 w140 Screen Creation Definition Symbols w257 Screen Creation Definition Symbols Help is FT key
48. chart 3 FF Header and Footer rak rs GR Comments 2 Exit Design Mode En Custom Views External Data E Full Screen Forms EE Zoom Picture 10 PivotTable TI Reviewing 12 Visual Basic 13 wes 14 Wordart 15 16 Customize 11 Paste the command button onto the sheet px EAR R E Command Button T AE T EE 7 i gt CommandButton1 25 Bd amo 12 Double click the button The following VBA creation screen is displayed Window Help gt EHAE ode H a Private Sub ConmandButtonl Click H End Sub 5 cki a DMIOD WORD Enter value Integer type here 1 0 ial fil ACN os 3 40 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function 14 Input the value to be written into the PLC device whose symbol is indicated Replace the words Input value here with the numeric value Example When set to 100 EI Jere Private Sub Conmandbuttoni_Clicx ler UriteDeviceis GPL DH1OO WORD ar i eB End Sub A Szr EET 15 Click on the Design icon to quit the Design Mode Control 1 Design Icon
49. 6 Sampling Data 7 Alarm Block 1 Data 8 Alarm History Block 2 e 9 Alarm Log Block 3 10 CSV Data CSV Display Data 13 Alarm Block 4 Data 14 Alarm Block 5 Data 15 Alarm Block 6 Data 16 Alarm Block 7 Data 17 Alarm Block 8 Data Write Pattern Designate the write direction when writing data in cells Time Stamp If you select Time Stamp in Front time of a PC s internal clock when executing a command will be written in front of data If you select Time Stamp Behind time of a PC s internal clock when executing a command will be written at the end of data Time display format is designated via the cell s Write Setting Display Format settings Data ID Select data to write in an Action area from among 13 available kinds of data Since setup items displayed under data IDs differ depending on data IDs select a data ID first Action Area Properties Action Area Property Details Group Name GROUPT ji Area Cell Range 7 write Method 0 Overwrite Tir ata D Write Patten 0 Device Value 0 Device Value TA 2 GP Time 3 Provider Node 4 Logging Data 5 Trend Data 6 Sampling Data te Time Stamp In Front T Alarm Block1 Data 8 Alarm History Block2 Data 9 Time Stamp Behind 4 Alarm Log Block3 Data No Time Stamp 10 CSV Data CSV Display Data 11 GP Screen Data JPEG Data 12 Character String 13 Alarm Block4 Data
50. A201 1 10 27 PM 1142 01 1 10 28 PM 14201 1 10 29 PM 112 01 1 10 30 PM 1142 01 1 10 31 PM 11201 1 10 32 PM 112 01 1 10 33 PM 112 01 1 10 34 PM o o elele s ele sjelal e a o alala a ala sjalale 4 3 Search Edit Although you can start multiple Device View windows you cannot edit data simultaneously 7 2 Device View Appending Sampled Data 1 Click Append of the Data Edit dialog 2 The next dialog appears Designate each item about the device that you wish to append and then click OK Items are equal to those in the Data sampling source dialog Reference gt 7 2 1 Setting Sampling Target Device Data sampling source Enter the data sampling source and sampling frequency then click Next Node Name We seedet p Data Type 16 Bit Signed ld Count OK Cancel Apply 3 The device data that you wish to append are displayed in the Data Edit dialog Deleting Sampled Data 1 Select the data that you wish to delete in the Data Edit dialog 2 Click Delete The selected data will be deleted Searching Sampled Data 1 Click Search in the Data Edit dialog 2 The Search dialog appears Enter the date that you wish to search and then click OK Search The First Record 112 01 1 10 23 PM The Last Record 112 01 1 18 2
51. GP PRO PBIII Operation Manual Reference 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software Reference 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software Chapter 3 Operation Reference 5 1 Transferring Data to GPs GP PRO PBIII Operation Manual Reference 6 3 Read Performance Measuring Tool Reference 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software Chapter 6 Tools Chapter 7 Data View 2 Pro Server Fundamentals This chapter describes how to install this software It also explains the procedures for starting and exiting the software 2 1 Installing the Software 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software 2 3 Screen Item Names and Functions 2 1 Installing the Software 2 1 Installing the Software Install this software from the CD ROM to your hard disk The following explanation assumes that Windows is already installed on your hard disk If you install Pro Server V4 5 while GP Viewer V1 0 remains on PC a problem will occur when you install GP Viewer again Be sure to uninstall GP Viewer V1 0 and Pro Server with Pro Studio of the older version from PC before installing Pro Server V4 5 e Prior to installing the software exit all programs except the Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Setup program Be sure to quit all memory resident programs such as Virus detection software Copying the master CD ROM files to your hard disk does not install this software To be able to sta
52. If you designated a Bit symbol in the Device Ad dress field you cannot restore data in formats other than BIT Reset the symbol other than in BIT in the Device Address field and then restore Cannot designate a symbol other than in BIT to data restore in the BIT format If you designated a symbol in formats other than BIT in the Device Address field you cannot restore BIT data Reset the BIT symbol in the Device Address field and then restore The designated file is incorrect If you designate a Bit backup data file by Pro Server of the older version V4 0 in the File Name field you cannot restore it Reset other file in the File Name field and then restore 4 When the restoration process has been completed successfully the following window ap pears Click OK to exit the process Ga Save Complete 3 52 3 8 GP Capture Data Saving Function 3 8 GP Capture Data Saving Function Pro Server allows you to read the on line GP capturing data on your network This screen capturing is realized by two different ways the way to execute it using the action item function or the interactive way This section describes the interactive capturing procedure For the procedure using the action item function refer to 4 3 12 Upload of JPEG Data Reference gt 4 3 12 Upload of JPEG Data When you use the save feature of the GP screen there are following restrictions e
53. called action item contents so that a Consumer only a Windows OS personal computer which has received provider information will perform them You can start action items by setting the symbol name of the Provider node to the action name Action items must be set up however it is possible that they are not used during normal operation For a detailed explanation of action item functions refer to Chapter 4 Action Items Reference gt Chapter 4 Action Items 3 31 3 4 Using the DDE Function 3 4 Using the DDE Function Pro Server incorporates the DDE server function and therefore can exchange data with applications that support the DDE client function The following description assumes that the program s main window is open DDE String Copy 1 Click the desired symbol name ie ies QA PS Pro Studio FilelF EdilE ToolstT Programming Suppori P DetaView D Configurel5 view Helplti Symbolltem Type Address Data Type Paling Ti Local D40 16 Bil igned 1000 Dy WORD Local D41 16Bil5igned 1000 f Network Entry Node E WINDOWS NT 210 180 181 172 Windows Personal Computer Om MELSEC_QNA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC GnA CPU 2 WINDOWS _95 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer PES Provider Information inge Action List
54. lt Return value gt 0x00000000 0 A usable CF Card is inserted 0x10000001 268435457 No CF Card available 0x10000002 268435458 Unsupported Device was detected by the CF Card s driver 0x10000004 268435460 CF Card s driver has detected a card error 0x10000008 268435464 CF Card not initialized Other error codes Refer to separate Error Code chart 9 20 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function CF Card File List Read Function Arbitrary Folder Name INT WINAPI EasyGetListInCfCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR sDirectory INT pioCount LPCTSTR szSaveFileName lt Function gt Outputs the file list in CF Card inserted to GP GLC to the file given via a parameter You can designate the file type using a parameter An error occurs because GP77R Series does not support this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP to be read from sDirectory Folder name to be acquired upper case only pioCount The number of files read szSaveFileName RR PEN Name of the file that directory information read is stored to Data stored to array in the stEasyDirInfo format as many as designated by pioCount are stored as binary data Moreover the filename and the file extension are stored as upper case characters only struct stEasyDirInfo BYTE bFileName 8 1 Filename ends with 0 BYTE bExt 3 1 File extension ends with 0 BYTE bDummy 3 Dummy DWORD dwFileSize
55. of Ethernet unit used i e built in type or expansion unit type Reference Using an Ethernet protocol with the 2 Way Driver 14 m Software GP PRO PB III for Windows Screen creation software Screen Creation Sofware System Version Language Software pesg Version GP70 GP77R GP377R GP2000 apanese Ver 3 0 Ver 1 51 Ver 2 40 om verse vest e Joe verse vee veden veo _ er i er i er er J apanese ML Ver 2 69k Ver 2 69k Ver 3 56 The following restrictions apply to Pro Server and any related software Pro Server and GP PRO PB III for Windows Compal Reguremen GP screen capture capturing PEG files GP PRO PB Ill for Windows V6 0 or later GPPROPB br Wadows V60 or r ak GP PRO PB II for Windows V6 0 or later GP Viewer CF Card Online Write GP PRO PB Ill for Windows V6 1 or later CF Card access all File Names GP PRO PB Ill for Windows V7 0 or later Increased number of Alarm Blocks GP PRO PB Ill for Windows V7 0 or later 15 m Pro Server compatible PLC Vendors and Models Vendor Name DIGITAL Electronics Mitsubishi Electric Sharp Corp Device PLC Type in GP PRO PBIII for Windows MEMORY LINK SIO Type GP77R GP 2501 GP 2601 O 2 Way Driver GP 2500 GP 2300 GP 2600 GP 2400 GLC2500 GLC2300 GLC2400 O O MEMORY LINK Ethernet Type MITSUBISHI MELSEC AnN LINK x lt MITSUBISHI MELSEC AnN CPU MIT
56. xlt or csv extensions are registered to be started by Excel When Excel is started by an Action if you try to open files by double clicking them in Explorer files may not be opened or may not act as expected Normally if Excel has already been started if you double click files on Explorer Excel will try to open files However the Create Report using Excel Action only supports and controls files opened by the Action Therefore while this Action starts Excel if files which have not been opened by this Action are opened by for example double clicking the control will be out of this Action and Action operation will become unstable Also do not open files using any other methods since the same problem s can occur If you use Excel as follows the Action will be uneffected In addition to Excel started by the Action if you start Excel from the Start menu of Windows and open files from Excel s Open menu or if you open files by the dragging and dropping on Excel the Action will not be effected adn will operate normally Sheet Name of Template Book You can use macros to the sheet name of the template book as well as the output book name When creating a sheet in the output book this Action adds the sheet name by replacing the registered macro sign with a specific value The following shows the content of Excel macro symbols Macro Sign Replacement Contents SY The current year
57. 16BilSigned 1000 ig GP 10 100 010 OMRON SYSMACC SERIES DOOM WORD Local DOQU4i 16 BiiSigned 1000 Om GP2 10 10 0171 MITSUBISHI MELSEC AnA LINK DO0042_WORD Local D00042 TE BitfSigned 1000 EG WINDOWS 10 100 0 20 Windows Parsonal Computer 485 Provider Information BB Action List Heb is Fl key in NOM A 26 Click VBA Write function on Programming Support of the menu A ma fm Eg FlelE EdiE Tools L Pragrammina Support Data View ConfiguelS Viewty Help H E mien clare Function Poiecla VEAR sad function Symbolltem Tape Ades tata pe Paing BEF Network Entry od Local D00040 TEBillSigned 1000 Tam GPI 0100 0 YC Declare Function 00041 WORD Local DODO 16 BilSigned 1000 Om GP2 01000 WC wite Function INK D00042 WORD Local Dogs 16 BitSigned 1000 2B WINDOWS 10 WC Read function rmputer il Provider Informatio m L r Acton List DDE String Copy a 7 Copy the VBA wite commend statement by date type to clipboard in NUN A 9 55 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 27 The write function will be copied into the Clipboard Message Err WriteDevice16CGP2 D00040 WORD Enter valuednteger type here 1 This string was copied to the clip board Please paste and use in your application 28 Double
58. 32 bits 127 20 255 Single precision 127 20 255 floating point Double precision 63 10 255 floating point Character string 255 single byte 80 single byte 255 single byte 32 Bits Bit a Device 32 bits 255 40 Single precision 255 40 255 floating point Double precision 127 20 255 floating points Character string 255 single byte 160 single byte 255 single byte If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers the warning dialog will appear You can register 3 Symbol Names at maximum per provider information 3 27 3 3 Registering Provider Data If you select String Fixed Number in the Symbol field of the provider node the count calculation will be performed automatically only by entering a fixed number Although you can change this count to the larger number than the string number entered by a fixed number do not change the number calculated automatically to avoid unfixed data to be entered e The check interval is defaulted to 500 ms The process after providing should be set to Complete Process The process is completed even when a providing error occurred If you designate the existing sheet name in the Title field of the Provider Information dialog the following dialog will appear Pro Studio iN The designated Provider Sheet Name is already registered Please select a different Sheet Na
59. 7 34 7 3 GP Viewer 4 The Sampling method dialog appears Check the desired Sampling Method The contents of the Condition field differ depending on the Sampling method selected You should perform the setting according to the contents displayed When You Selected Regular Sampling on Sampling method The setup contents are as the following You should designate Data Sampling in specified seconds and Sampling using cache in the Condition field I Sampling method i es Sampling method amp Periodic Sampling oO Sampling data after change in device G Sampling data when PC was distributed Condition E Data Sampling in specified seconds Sampling using cache Polling data record file Change omy Documertstat DB Saving Method fe maximum size Data Sampling in specified seconds Designate the device data capturing interval in second This is defaulted to 1 second Sampling using cache Check this box to use the cache to sample device data 7 35 7 3 GP Viewer When You Selected Periodic Sampling in Sampling method The setup contents are as the following You should create the periodical sampling schedule using the Append the Delete and the Edit buttons in the Condition field I Sampling meth
60. 9577 2569h Reached the file end 9578 256Ah The incorrect structure 9579 256Bh Cannot continue the process due to a memory lack 9580 256Ch Cannot analyze the device name 9581 256Dh DB name is not designated 9582 256Eh Cannot access to DB 9583 256Fh vg edit DB because it is locked edited by another program e g Data 9584 2570h Either the node name or the device name is not designated 9585 2571h Cannot use DB because it has been closed DB in use is automatically closed once when NPJ is saved loaded 9586 2572h_ The database may be broken 9587 2573h Data not saved 9588 2574h Cannot find data at the designated time 9589 2575h No polling setups exist 9590 2576h The database has not been opened Or it has already been closed 9591 2577h Already polling start 9592 2578h Old data will be overwritten isteadd of newest data 9593 2579h Delete recode 9594 257Ah Exceeds designated file size 9595 257Bh Designated file number does not exist 9596 257Ch Reserved 9599 257Fh 9600 2580h_ Cannot continue the process due to a resource lack in GP 9601 2581h Reserved 9619 2593h The network project item has been registered redundantly The network 3620 2394h project file has been broken 9621 2595h i Reserved 9639 25A7h The Provider information data that is not registered in the network project 9640 25A8h file were sent from other node Network projects differ between the Provider and the Re
61. Book Location Folder does not exist C AMy DocumentsD ata Do you create new folder No Cancel 4 34 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Click Yes to create the folder The folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled Save Filename Designate the save filename Default value is Y7 M D h m s The Reset button will delete your entry and revert back to the default value File names can be designated indirectly For details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions Zero Suppress If you check this option no zeros are supplied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros M D h m s month day hour minute second Ex 04 or 07 If you do not check this option 0 zero is added to the file name if the file name includes M D h m s month day hour minute second data and that number is a single digit Default is checked 4 35 4 3 7 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Automatic Download of Access Data This feature writes to device data from a designated Access file Be sure to create an Access table in advance to use this feature This Action compares Provider Data with table data and then reads device data according to the contents designated in the table The f
62. Hide commands are excluded When right clicking the Pro Server icon in the task tray selecting Action Perform Action Name and then executing other menu options than Hide or Close refer to Displaying Command Panel This Action closes the output book using following timing CA When clicking Close in the Command Panel When executing the Close command from Provider or user defined applications however it also exits Excel When executing the NEW Book or Copy Book command from Provider or user defined applications In this case the new book will be opened automatically after the old book is closed 4 When the network project is reloaded When Pro Server exits When you close the output book close it using steps from Q through described above Do not close it directly using the Exit or the Save As menu option of Excel If you close Excel using these menu options it can cause unexpected conditions such as that the Action does not run correctly Common Usage Violation of Output Book While the output book is opened by this Action if you try to open the output book by another version of Excel it will cause a common usage violation of the output book so that you may not be able to open it When the output book is not opened by this Action you can open the output book by another version of Excel though you should close it before starting this Action
63. Month HEN deg te end ofmantiy na Date Designate the date to sample device data Device data are sampled on the day designated here 7 2 Device View Week Designate a day of a week to sample device data Check the day that you wish to sample device data You can also click Everyday Fri Weekday Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri or Holiday Sat Sun under the day check boxes Month Designate a day of a month to sample device data You can designate either a particular day one day or the last day every month Device data are sampled on the day designated here every month If you click Next the Designate the sampling time dialog appears Designate each item in the Designate the sampling time dialog and then click OK Append allows you to create the new sampling schedule and it will be displayed in the schedule field i Designate the sampling time r Start time VET E Start time moss am Sampling count One time only 1 Hour Fl repeat TE times coeny penton Back OK Cancel Start Time Designate the time to start capturing device data The sampling will start at the time designated here Sampling count If you wish to sample device data once check One time only If you wish to repeat device data sampling designate the sampling
64. Not defined 10 logons 14 days Disabled No Action Disabled Enabled Disabled 15 minutes Disabled Disabled Enabled fi Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled COMNAP COMNODE SQLIQUERY SPOOLSS LLSRPC E SystemlCurrentControl5et ControllProductOptions Sy COMCFG DFS Disabled Send LM amp NTLM responses Negotiate signing No minimum No minimum is Check that the Security Settings is changed to Classic local users authenticate as them A 22
65. RKC CB SR Mini SERIES MODBUS O O O O Inc RKC CB REXF LE100 RKC O O O O ai SHINKO TECHNOS INDICATING o o 0 o Fenwal Co Ltd FENWALI AL SERIES O 0 O O a JTE Analyzer o el le e MEIDENSHA CORPORATION _MEIDENSHA Ethemet xJo foefol S IMADEN SHIMADEN CONTROLLER o Co Ltd CHINO Corp CHINO CONTROLLER MODBUS O 0 O O Saas Schneider TSX va UNI TELWAY O O O O Se Schneider Modbus TCP ETHER O O O O j Schneider Modbus RTU 1 n comm O O O O 6 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS DP X O X X 7 INTERBUS INTERBUS SLAVE X O X X 7 JPONH JPCN 1 Standard X O X X 7 DeviceNet DeviceNet Slave I O X O X X TOSHIBA Rase TOSHIBA SCHNEIDER INVERTER o Fo o fof Ubon Ubon UPZ Series O O O O O Supported Supported with restriction See 3 X Not Supported 18 Protocols before V1 2 can be used however it cannot detect write errors Although you can use protocol older than V1 2 it cannot detect a write error You can check the protocol version on Status Monitor Reference gt 6 2 GP Status Monitoring 1 An expansion Ethernet unit is required to use the 2 Way Driver with GP77R GP 2501 GP 2601 series units The attachment of this unit prevents the attachment of any other expansion units which in turn prevents the use of any other protocols Since Expansion Units cannot be used with GP 2300 GP 2400 Series GLC2300 GLC2400 Series and Factory Gateway units Expansion Unit protocols also cannot be used 2 You cannot
66. Skru fill Filar 9 80 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 5 Select ProEasy vb and click Open Add Existing Item EasySample Look in E EasySample P Tools obj E AssemblyInfo vb Forml resx File name Open My Network Places Files of type vB Code Files vb resx xsd wsdl Cancel SS 6 Solution EasySample 1 project EasySample H E References i B AssemblyInfo vb Form vb 9 81 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function Creating the Device Access Section Example 7 The application to be created has the following features clicking the Write button writes signed 16 bit data and clicking the Read button reads signed 16 bit data ml write value read value Select the View Toolbox menu item 40 EasySample Microsoft Yisual Basic NET design Form1 vb H File Edit Project Build Debug Data Format Tools ig g Code F7 E G l ft le Designer Shift F7 th LEESE open Open With Solution Explorer CtrlH lt L Class View CtrlHShift C Jeo joey 434135 1H Server Explorer CtrH lt 5 Resource view CtrlH Shift E Properties Window F4 Toolbox cereale 9 FEE qe da Pending Checkins Pt When the Toolbox appears click Windows Forms 0 EasySample Microsoft Yisual Ba
67. after receiving in second and the sampling interval in second 7 39 5 7 3 GP Viewer Designate each item in the Polling data file field of the Sampling method dialog and then click OK Change Use this button to change the folder to save sampled data i Sampling method Sampling method Condition G Regular Sampling Periodic Sampling JET Sampling data after change in device Sampling data when PC was distributed 5 Data Sampling in specified seconds Sampling using cache Polling data record file Change CiMy Documentsttat DB Saving Method fo maximum size Saving Method If you click this button the Saving Method dialog appears Designate each item in the Saving Method dialog and then click OK i Saving Method JE r Saving Method Designate maximum size Periodic saving Hawise sien day O New ile even manttu No maximum size is designated as much as storage media allows Heyeti When sampling data eesede nainun E Cantinas numbering for new ies 2 Sage wer akestdata Riu ertpe Bo nat save Tes afer sike limitieaehed OK Cancel 7 40 7 3 GP Viewer Designate the maximum size of data file to be stored Designate th
68. mT AE _ _ GP Viewer Symbolfltem Type Address Data Type Polling Ti Data Sampling Status Action List System time bar Option You can also right click the entry node to select Device View 7 2 Device View 2 The Data sampling source window appears After designating each item for the device that you wish to sample data click Next i Data sampling source Enter the data sampling source and sampling frequency then click Next Node Name GP2300L H Device Mame EET Data Type 16 BittSigned r fe Count 4 Cancel Node Name Enter the node name to sample data Node names registered in the network project file are displayed Device Name Enter the device name to sample data If you click the symbol entry window appears Device Type Designate the device model to sample data 7 5 Count 7 2 Device View Designate the number of sequential device from the device to sample The maximum numbers to be designated are shown in the following table below Maximum Number of f Maximum Number of Device Type to Device When Format i Device Whe
69. wDatafl str 2 Format d wData 2 nList InsertStrins 0 str 0 nList InsertString 0 str 1 mList InsertString O str 2 NG 30 Click Execute Smaple exe on Build of the Microsoft Visual C menu ample Microsoft Visual C SampleDig cpp R Fie Edt View Insert Project Buid Tools Window Help ia al EA we B Compile SampleDigepp Ctrl F Build Sample exe Fr Co ampleDig reelle Rebuild all Fe Ne dt ag I fly a Batch Build GS Workspace Sample 1 project Clean D E Sample files to obtain the cursor to display while t Start Deb r f 1 49 Source Files re meryDragioon T PJE sample opp Debugger Remote Connection hIcon Samplete 7 er Zi FangleDla cpp Std opp Set Active Configuration j E G Header Fies Configurations SE LB Resaureah Profile Sample h SampleDig h ReadDeviceis 6P2 DO0040 WORD wData 3 bof Stich CString str 3 REA Resource Fies str 0 Fornati vData 0 Sampleico strll Foxmati xd vDatall gt Sample re2 str 2 Fornati zd vData 2 E ReadMestat more mList InssrtString 0 str 0 mListInsertString 0 str l mList InsertString O str 2 a Ej Filey ri F Executes the program Ln 189 Col JJRedjcoujovalees
70. 119 Windows Personal Computer Wa GP 10 100 0 12 MEMORY LINK SIO Type Device address provided by the Provider node itle Sheetz2 WINDOWS NT GFI ACTIONI Provide 0100 WORD For the procedure to save and to transfer the network project file refer to 8 1 Transferring Network Project Files 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 4 3 1 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters For the procedure of designating an Action to register or registering Provider information using an Action refer to 4 2 Registering Action Items This section describes how to enter Action Item settings Start Application Action Item This feature allows you to start desired applications in Windows computers connected to your network The following table shows data types that can be designated as the Symbol Name of the Provider Node PENE 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charact i W ie racter ction Name Bt signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Preson Start Application Olo O O O O O O O O O O 1 Select Start Application in the Edit Action dialog box click Parameter and the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Application Name Applicatian Name Startup Options OJ Node name Current Folder Version 4 10 OK Cance
71. Alarm Block 8 poave File Name 8 Rewrite C Program FilestPro facetPro Server with sy gare Cancel Helpt For detailed information about each data refer to GP PRO PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual Reference gt GP PRO PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual 3 44 3 After data save starts the elapsed time is displayed 3 6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM Save SRAM Backup Data pF Baker Logging Daly 5 Trend Bala 5 Sampling Bata ED Mam Lag Bata to Alam Histan Data Mam Blocks Alanon Blask 2 Alanon Black 3 15 Alam Blakes O Mam Book amp D Manin Blake 15 Ma Blake 5 Mam Boake Pane File Wasa Time Count Rewis Program Files Pro tacelPro Server with St ieee 2 Append EE m Sare Camel Helpi Elapsed time display 4 When the saving process has been completed successfully the following window appears Save Complete To open an SRAM backup data file you saved using Excel start Excel click Open on the File menu and then select Text file x prn x txt K CSV as Save as type File name Book Save as type Text Tab delimited Microsoft Excel 97 amp 5 0795 Workbook 3 45 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration 3 7 1 The device
72. Alert Feature This compares provided alarm log data with pre defined data on the Access table and displays designated contents in a table e g alarm messages using Table View You can also add a sound to an alarm notification by designating a Wav file in a table Upload of GP Log Data This reads backup data online from SRAMs and CF Cards of Provider nodes by designating a reading source You must set the logging and the alarm features on GP PRO PB III for Windows in advance and transfer it to GP of the Provider node Automatic Download of GP Filing Data This writes filing data automatically You can write filing data to SRAMs CF Cards and internal memories FROM of Provider nodes by designating a writing target You must set the filing feature on GP PRO PB III for Windows in advance and transfer it to GP of the Provider node Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data This reads filing data automatically You can read filing data from SRAMs CF Cards and internal memories FROM of Provider nodes GPs by designating a reading source You must set up the GP unit s filing feature in advance using GP PRO PB III for Windows Once it is created it must be transfered to the Provider node GP Automatic Upload of Access Data This reads device data into the Access file First create a Access table in the desired format This Action will compare Provider data with table data and read device data according to the table s designated conte
73. DLL Function CF Card File Read Function Arbitrary File Name Designation INT WINAPI EasyFileReadInCfCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR sFolderName LPCTSTR sFileName LPCTSTR pWriteFileName DWORD podwFileSize lt Function gt Reads the designated file from CF Card Read out file can be arbitrarily freely designated An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP to be read from sFolderName Name of folder to be read from CF Card Max 32 char single byte sFileName 6 Name of a file to be read from CF Card Max 8 3 format string kk pWriteFileName Name of the file to save a CF file read full path podwFileSize Size of a CF file read lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table 9 24 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function CF Card File Read Function Type Designation INT WINAPI EasyFileReadCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR pReadFileType WORD wReadFileNo LPCTSTR pWriteFileName DWORD podwFileSize lt Function gt Reads the designated file from CF Card Read file can only be files designated in pReadFileType An error occurs because GP77R Series does not support this function data lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP to be read from pReadFileType Type of a f
74. ELE IL ET SD EEL SEN EE C boutDlq dialog used for App About lass CAboutDlg public CDialeog ublic CAboutDlat e Dialog Data sA FE DATA CAbantDlg enum IDD IDD ABOUTBOE f JAFE DATA 77 Classllizard generated virtual function overrides AFE_ IRTUAL CAboutDlg protected virtual void DoDataExchange CDetaEschange plz f AFE_VIRTUAL er D Ln 7 Col 31 Operations from step 1 through 8 mentioned above are common to both read and write For the subsequent part each procedure is described separately because procedures are different between read and write Refer to step 9 through 3 Refer to step 33 through 2 to create the Read application 51 to create the Write application 9 62 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function Creating Read Application 9 This section describes the application to read and display three data 16 bits signed when clicking Button1 fe Sample Button Displays three read data 10 Click the ResourceView tab in the Microsoft Visual C Workspace window and then double click IDD SAMPLE DIALOGJ Select and delete Static Text in the center of the dialog
75. EditBox to the area CH els ag s e SampleD T5amplDig j merker g OnDuttont El 2 E Sample files E E Source Fies Sample cpp Eg Hester Fes B A Resource Files eng FleadMe it I gcc The systen calls this to obtain the cursor to display whit gt the nininized vindow EcURSOR CSampleDlo OnQuersDzacLoon 2 BCIRSOR n_Teon gt CSanpleD1g OnButton1 NORD wDatel 1 UedsteDates Fledeta U n Edit1 vdatalr mete SM ebaraf2 n Edit3 E rd Voapens tulad atic Res T L185 Co 20 RECI OCUD RIREAD Z 46 Declare the area to store write data You should designate three or more area elements if the 9 76 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 48 Designate the header area where write data have been set wData 0 and 3 as the number of read data You should also add a semicolon at the end of the write function alang s e gjor o eee aL Els T5amrlDig j merbart g OnDuttont El fe t E z 7 aw E Sample files 24 Tac systen calls this to cbtoin the cursor to display hik Source Fies ge the nininized window E ECURSOR CSampleDlg OnQueryDraglooni BCURSOR n keen gt Ea Header Files FE E Resource Fies NORD wDate 31 mg ReadMe it z UpdateData ebata 0 nm Edit1 feged
76. FF DEI 4 T a E i T anj 7 g o gt ail Bd mm OO i 16 Thus when you click Excel s Command Button 100 is written to the PLC symbol s device CommandButtord The Device Monitor feature allows you to easily check that the data has been written successfully Reference gt Chapter 6 Tools Device Monitor gt MELSEC_OWA D WORD Bi Siged Unsigned OHEX OBD GPI MALER o 02 A DIG 1 gt 10 11 E BRIT OS 2 113 DMorG f 115 il 117 DM IO 118 NY 20 D0112 121 122 123 DMO 124 4135 12 100 has been written to the device 3 41 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function Reference Cells that have been designated as using Excel s Range Function can write data to a GP or PLC device If you then change the value entered in this cell and push the Command Button the device s data will be immediately refreshed Reference Step 11 1 Input the value to be written to the symbol s PLC device Here enter Range A1 in the space shown by Enter value here TErr WriteDevice16 GP1 _DM100_WORD Range A1 1 0 Mi Book Sheet Code 9 x CommandButtont m Click 2 Private Sub CommandButtonl Click lErr WeiteDevicei GP1 DM1OD WORD Range Ai 1 0 ical End Sub 2 Click the Design icon to q
77. GP Viewer You can playback saved data using various buttons on GP Viewer I GP Viewer Ma File E Setting DataEdit Sampling me fonem mm Saved Time Time Bar Now Play Display Switch 200114102 11 13 57 Time Setup Saved Time This field shows the saved time of the saved device data The field shows from the left the saving start time the time for currently displayed data and the last saved time When the current status is displayed the time for currently displayed data is identical to the last saved time Time Bar Saved data can be displayed by sliding the time bar control to either side The data saving process continues even while you operate the control Time Setup You can designate the time unit for one graduation of the time bar Now Play Display Switch Now and Play buttons are available You can playback the saved data from the designated time either by sliding the time bar control to the time that you wish to start the playback or by clicking the Play button after clicking the time for currently displayed data the center field of Saved Time and then entering the time to start the playback 7 49 7 3 GP Viewer 7 3 6 Other Features This section describes the File menu and options of GP Viewer 1 If you click File E of GP Viewer 9 options are available The following describ
78. Gateway internal clock time to a cell You can use this ID for example if you wish to record time when a job is performed Time display format is designated via the cell s Write Setting Display Format settings Node Name Normally designate the node name of your GP GLC Factory Gateway If you omit designating the node name data is read from the Provider source node when an Action is started by Provider information You cannot omit the node name when the Action is started by the Command Panel 4 75 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 3 Provider Node Writes the node name of the Provider source if the Action is started by Provider information Writes the node name of the PC where the Command Panel exists if the Action is started by the Command Panel 4 Logging Data 5 Trend Data 6 Sampling Data 7 Alarm Block 1 Data 8 Alarm History Block 2 Data 9 Alarm Log Block 3 Data 10 CSV Data CSV Display Data 13 Alarm Block 4 Data 14 Alarm Block 5 Data 15 Alarm Block 6 Data 16 Alarm Block 7 Data 17 Alarm Block8 Data 11 Writes designated data from the GP GLC s SRAM and CF Card Node Name Normally designate the GP GLC node name If you omit designating the node name data is read from the Provider source node when an Action is started by Provider information You cannot omit the node name when the Action is started by the Command Panel File Number Set Designa
79. If you leave the corresponding output book open a common usage violation will occur on the Action side PC and the process may not be performd To avoid this problem while the Action is running or when the Action may be started open the correspond ing output book by clicking the Display button in the Command Panel 4 94 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Environment to Use This Action This Action starts one Excel book per one Action and the Action will occupy Excel when the output book is opened Timing of Opening Closing Output Book in the previous page Therefore even if you have registered more than one Action within the network project this Action may not be started simultaneously due to resource problems such as PC or OS memory the number of Actions which can be started simultaneously differs depending on your PC environment If there are any problems when starting this Action simultaneously adjust the timing of starting or closing Excel for example using the Close command Opening Template Book The template book will be opened automatically in hide mode when the Action needs to refer to it e g when creating a new output book or sheet When the Action completes referring to the template book it will be closed automatically Switching Timing of Output Book If you do not change the output destination intentionally using the New or the Copy command the output book
80. Information Auto Start This feature registers Provider information per group and command line set in a template The following describes the procedures after the Settings dialog box is displayed The steps described here correspond to the procedures 8 described in 4 4 1 Registration Procedure of Report Creation Action 1 To enter Provider information select the groups and commands from the process name list I Settings Auto Start Manual Start Command Start Timin Settings i Huse Command Panel PC Screen g Register to Panel when adding Command Panel Layout Process Name Command Provider Infor Comment Add Command New Book Copy Book Change current sheet being used by Ac Quit Excel Hose Quit Excel being used by Action Print Book Print Book Print out all Excel books being used by Edit Command Display Book Show Display Excel Book being used by Actio Hide Book Hide Hide Excel Book being used by Action Delete Command Print Sheet Print Sheet S Print out select Excel sheet being used LM Empty Book Mew Book Create new empty Excel Book being u Open Sheet Copy Sheet Change current sheet being used by Ac Open All Sheets Copy Sheets Change all sheets being used by Action GRU GROUP OK CANCEL Help
81. Information bogs Action List Data Sampling Status System time bar 2 The Data View Options dialog appears You can select Show Hide of the setup menu and the save button If you uncheck Display menu the Option the Data Edit and the Sampling menus are hidden on Device View If you uncheck Display button L U nm buttons are hidden on Device View Data iew Option Til Display menu eee v Device View ED Flef Option D taEdt Samping feb fet ort mi J Display button 7 31 7 3 GP Viewer 7 3 1 with Pro Studio of any older versions Starting GP Viewer menu bar data or to playback saved GP data on GP Viewer 7 3 GP Viewer GP Viewer allows you to sample screen data from the GP system connected to Ethernet to display screen If you install Pro Server V4 5 while GP Viewer V1 0 remains on PC a problem will occur when you reinstall GP Viewer Be sure to install Pro Server V4 5 after uninstalling GP Viewer V1 0 and Pro Server When you start GP Viewer screens on the GP system are displayed on the GP Viewer browser in real time After selecting the entry node to use GP Viewer select GP Viewer on Data View D of the Sintom Pro Studio File E EditlE Tools II Programming Support E Dataview D Confi
82. LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI ReadDevice Variant DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 10 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Multi Handle Direct Write Function Bit data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBitDM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice16DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice32DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDevice8CD32DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloatDM HANDLE hProServer _LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDoubleDM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceSttDM HANDLE hProServer _LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use d
83. LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI WriteDevice Variant LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 8 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Multi Handle Cache Read Function Bit data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBitM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice 16M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice32M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD16M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloat M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDoubleM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStrM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsD
84. ProEasy DLL Function Direct Read Independent of the cache status this reads the latest data from PLC PC i Pro Server i Li Li Application GP PLC Application The direct read function name has upper case D or DM at the end Direct Write The direct write function is to write data The direct write function name has upper case D or DM at the end Write with Cache Refresh In the case of the write with cache refresh function when certain device data have been cached after writing data it reads from the corresponding device again and refreshes cache data The execution speed is slower than that of the direct write function While a device is read using the cache read function use the write with cache refresh function 9 4 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function 9 1 2 Device Read Write Function Single Handle Cache Read Function Bit data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBit LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice 1 6 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice32 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD 16 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount
85. SYMBOL TYPE DATA NUMBER Patalltabie J GP 100 2 123 3 Writes here when data are read NODE Designates the read data source node SYMBOL Designates the head first address of the symbol device address to be read TYPE Designates the type of data to be read DATA Designates where the read data is written to NUMBER Designates the amount of sequential data to be read starting from the symbol device address designated by SYMBOL As shown above starting at GP unit internal address 100 data from 3 devices is read as signed 16 bit decimal data Then the TBL contents are copied to the file designated as the saving file and data is written to the DATA field of the file If more than one sequential data item is read each data item is written separated with a comma However in addition to the DATA field read data is also written to the file designated in the Action as the save file The following table shows the different data types and their corresponding codes Value DataType Value DataType 1 Bit 7 Unsigned 32 bits decimal 2 Signed 16 bits decimal 8 32 bits hexadecimal 3 Unsigned 16 bits decimal 9 BCD 32 bits 4 16 bits hexadecimal 10 Single precision floating point 5 BCD 16 bits 11 Double precision floating point 6 Signed 32 bits decimal 12 Character string 4 33 4
86. The OPC server supports read write in group units The group name can be any text string however please be sure the name used is unique and not already in use Even if the name is abbreviated the OPC server will arbitrarily allocate a group name Readout of data can be performed synchronously or asynchronously If synchronous is used the OPC client must wait until the return is received from the OPC server If asynchronous is used since the OPC server will use a callback to inform of completion the OPC client does not need to wait for a response If asynchronous is used the connection method must be selected With asynchronous communication OPC DA Data Access Ver 1 0 standard IDataObject I F and OPC DA Ver 2 0 standard IConnectionPoints I F are available Depending on the OPC client there are cases where only one of the I F methodds is supported so be sure to check the type of I F supported when making this selection Item ID This performs the OPC Server s Item ID allocation Designate the Item ID When using OPC Server for Pro Server enter the data as Node PLC device or symbol name option The option section can be abbreviated For detailed option information refer to the OPCPRO Help feature s Item ID Settings section An example is test tag1 Entering this setting means that a participating node will use test to access the symbol tag1 The option can be abbreviated When using OPC Serve
87. U S The following terms used in this manual differ from the above mentioned formal trade names and trademarks Term used in this manual Formal Trade Name or Trademark Windows 98 Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows 98 SE Operating System Winoows Me Microsoft Windows Me Operating System Windows NT Microsoft Windows NT Operating System Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP Operating System HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Structure of This Manual This manual titled Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Operation Manual describes how to use the Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows software hereinafter referred to as this software The following table describes the GP PRO PBIII for Windows software s manuals which are often referred to in this manual Describes the procedures for the installation and Volt Operation Manvel operation of GP PRO PBIII for Windows Includes detailed descriptions on the tags used to Vong BRP Manual specify the functions used on the GP s screen Describes the library of pre made Parts included with vole eae List this product as well as a variety of diagram symbols Device PLC Connection Describes the procedures to create connections be any Manual tween GP series units and other manufacture PLCs In addition
88. Viewer Menu The following describes the pull down menu of each menu in the menu bar File F Menu FilefF Edit Configure S Help Current Log NJ Ctrl Open 0 Ctl 0 Save S Ctrl 5 Save as Al ResenkFles Quit Event Viewers Current Log N Displays the online log currently running system log Open O Selects and displays the previously saved log file 21g Save S Overwrites and saves to the currently opened log file 21g Save as A Saves as the new log file 21g Edit V Menu Eai Configure 5 ToolBaT v Status Bar S5 Tool Bar T Designates ON OFF of the tool bar When it is displayed the check mark is attached in front of Tool Bar T Status Bar S Designates ON OFF of the status bar When it is displayed the check mark is attached in front of Status Bar T 6 12 6 4 Log Viewer Configure S Menu Hel Log Log Clear Log If you click this the 2Way Event Log Property dialog will appear way Event Log Property r Type of message to log MA System Message System Error Application Error Application Start Application End Application Warning Application Message1 Application Message o When a message is remaining in the log it is saved automatically to a file Cancel Select message kinds to be displayed on Log Viewer Check messages names that
89. acquired by the above method include NULL characters to complete character stirrings you must shorten those The following shows the sample function to trim NULL characters Public Function TrimNull strData As String As String Dim i As Integer i InStr 1 strData Chr 0 vbBinaryCompare If 0 lt i Then TrimNull Left strData i 1 Else TrimNull strData End If End Function 9 40 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Details of Cache Read Polling Time and Life Time Pro Server has the feature internally to cache read data when it is requested to read a device by cache read If the read request is raised to the same device Pro Server returns cached data Pro Server can respond quickly because it does not read data every time If a device does not change at all Pro Server can always return cache data If not it is necessary to reflect device changes to cache data Therefore Pro Server automatically reads devices to cache according to a particular interval and updates cache data The action is called polling and the interval is called a polling time Polling is automatically executed when cache read is executed and polling for the device that the usage is completed stops automatically After a certain device was read if any read requests are not given to the device for a certain period Pro Server recognizes that the usage of the device is completed This period is called life time If any read requests are
90. and so on 6 9 6 4 Log Viewer 6 4 Log Viewer 6 4 1 Pro Server saves various information occurred during the operation in the internal log Log Viewer allows you to view internal log information saved by Pro Server Log Viewer can display Pro Server s internal log information classifying it into 8 categories You can also designate if you would like to save or delete messages per internal log information category Log Viewer can display 500 messages at maximum When the number of messages exceeds 500 the oldest message will be deleted in turn Moreover Log Viewer has online and offline modes The online mode displays the online log which is equal to the system log currently running real time The offline mode displays the log in the past saved by Log Viewer previously 2Way Log Viewer The following describes how to start Log Viewer and the display contents in the screen 1 Right click the icon in the right of the task tray and then select 2Way Log Viewer ActonExeeute Stat PraShudje AM ap Log Viewer About Fro Server Login Exit 6 10 6 4 Log Viewer 2 Log Viewer starts The following shows the name and the role of each part of the Log Viewer screen Title Bar E Online ZwWay amp vent Log Viewer elr Edit Contiqure 5S HelpiH Menu Bar Message 2002 10 01 19 07 49 Pro Server Pro Server has started Tool Bar 20024 0701 19 48 28 Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action Sta
91. are displayed on GP Viewer File F Option DataEdit Sampling e en Penn Data have been monitored but not been saved at this stage If the selected GP s screen size is smaller than the GP Viewer s default window size a portion of the GP Viewer window may be blank GP2300 etc 7 33 7 3 2 7 3 GP Viewer Setting the Data Sampling Condition This feature allows you to set the data sampling condition from the target device The following part describes the procedure after GP Viewer is started 1 Click Sampling of GP Viewer File E Option DataEdit Sampling Ce femmpen m a If the selected GP s screen size is smaller than the GP Viewer s default window size a portion of the GP Viewer window may be blank GP2300 etc 2 The next dialog appears Click Yes DATAVIEW Now performing Data Collection setup First designate the name of the file used to shore collected data 3 The Save As dialog appears so that you can create the file to save sampled data The file extension is DB Designate the file name and then click Save Save s FE Save in amp My Documents z File name I Save Save as type Pes erver DataBase File HDB
92. blank cells created on this report prototype The Create Report using Excel Action creates the report output book based on this template book Example of Report Prototype Creation The following report is only an example Create the report template according to your needs by setting the title of data to be written to the report and or the format of the cell s where data is written Line Mame Work Report Chocolate Pre Process Oper ator LOT ho Loiooo Recipe Knesdne Time Ho 1002 52 Oper ator Group Leader Checked By Result Time Produced Quantity Unfinished Quantity Scheduled Quantity Produced Quantity Starting Time Endne Time Difference Failure Quantity Falure Rate Operation Time be Sheet 4 69 4 4 4 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Setting the Report Action The contents described here correspond to registration procedure 5 described in 4 4 1 Registration Procedure of Report Creation Action If you select Create Report using Excel in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Create report usine version 4 10 re Template Designation Template Book Edit Template re Output
93. click Command1 on Form1 to paste the contents write function in the Clipboard between the Sub and the EndSub statements Fa Project Form Code mm es El Private Sub Commandl Clicki 29 Declare the area to store data to write You should designate three or more area elements if the number of write data is three The number of area elements is from 0 to 2 in this example However the area type Integer in this example needs to be matched to the symbol data type to use PA Project Formi Code Command1 Private Sub Commandl Clicki Dim ubata s Integer Pa Project1 Formi Code Command1 Private Sub Commandl Clicki Dim ubata s Integer wDatai0 CInt Textl Text ubatafl CInt Texct2 Text mData 2 CInt Text3 Text 9 56 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 31 Designate the header area wData 0 where written data have been set Also designate three as the number of write data PA Project Formi Code Command1 Private Sub Commandl Clicki Dim ubata s Integer wDatai0 CInt Textl Text ubatafi CInt Texct2 Text mData 2 Clint Texr3 Text 1Ere WriteDevieels GP2 DODO40 WORD wDaraloy 3 End Sub Window I Start F Stark With Full Compile GCtrl F5 II Break Tilk Eneak Private Sub Commi g E
94. command or decrease the volume of insufficient Receiver memory sending data y Netw ork project files are different betw een the node After tansmit command was sent Unused 25A8 to be provided and the provider source Transfer 25A8 Receiver unable to find data the same network project file After ranismit command with reply Ether communicatio damage nas occurred or FO provider information may differ Either check Unused 25A9 was sent no reply was received PE i 25A9 s communication state or transfer the netw ork project from R eceiv er file again Code is different Code is different OG cere VR afer to A 2 1 Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Error Messages ED from above from above Refer to the After issuing a provider command Write failed due to a communication error occurred device write failed atthe node to be with PLC Refer to the operation manual of the manual of each FFFO SE mile provided Refer to the manual of PLC maker and check workaround corresponding each PC maker to the error code Protocol Stack Error Codes A 2 Error Messages The following protocol stack error codes are displayed on the GP screen Error Code Meaning Workaround 1000 Current node IP Address entry The IP address setup of the self node is failed during initialization incorrect Reset it such as on the offline screen 1005 Initialization failed Check if
95. condition You should designate the sampling interval and the number of sampling Edit Click this button to change the contents of the selected schedule 7 12 7 2 Device View When You Selected Sampling data after change in device in Sampling method The contents of the Condition field are as the following You should designate Sampling Condi tion Interval Condition and Data sampling from start to finish of data reception in the Condi tion field I Sampling method ml es Sampling method F Regular Sampling 0 Qo Sampling data when PC was distributed Condition Sampling Condition Node Mame Device Data Type Condition Ej El tener Edae interval Condition rava nese Data sampling from start to finish of data reception Before al E Sampling using cache sec Afte 0 sec terval sec Polling data record file Change f r Documents tst DB Saving Method fo maximum size Sampling Condition Designate the timing to sample device data You should designate the node name that you wish to perform a sampling the target device name the device model and the device change condition Interval Condition Designate i
96. data backup function allows you to collect a series of device data via the Internet and to save it as data files The device data restoration function allows you to restore collected data from a series of devices The data saving format can be either BIN binary or CSV Device Data Backup 1 Click the Tools T menu in the Device Backup window SA PS Pro Studio OE FileE EditlE Tools T Programming Suppori P Dataview D ConfigurelS Viewl Help H Le Check Provider Information Search Active Node me APS Save SRAM Backup Data Symbolflter Type Address Data Type Polling Tit E Network Transfer Network Project 040 WORD Local D40 16 Bit Signed 1000 ET cee DA WORD Local D4 16 Bitlsigned 1000 Import Symbol Dr Export Symbol i WIN i Import C Package Symbol PEA Provide eek CParkage Symbol ie Action Li eck C Package Symbol Status Monitor Derbe flanker Remote Logon Remote Logoff Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway 4 F Save device data to file NUM FA 2 The Device Backup window appears After selecting all items click Backup Node Name Mee Fj SaveFolder amp Program Files Pro faceiPro S1 FileName NODE_ DEVICE Deviceaddress L0000 ka BackupNumber Made Format BIN Oj Bit Une
97. designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Block 3 When designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Block 4 When designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Block 5 When designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Block 6 When designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Block 7 When designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Block 8 When designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Save To Folder If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action Parameter display and if the folder exists the contents will appear exactly as you designated If the folder does not exist the following window appears Click Yes to create the folder The folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled Book Location Folder does not exist CAMy Documents Data Do pou create new folder I Ves No Cancel File Name Designate the name of the file that data are saved to Y M D h m s Year Month Date Hour Minute Second has been set as default File names can be designated indirectly For details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions 4 24 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Zero Suppress If you check this option no zeros are suppl
98. follow the instructions displayed on the screen In addition to the Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows V4 5 Setup Wizard the 2WSetup exe command can be used to start the following items e GP PRO PBIII 2 Way Driver Update If you use the 2 Way Driver Ver 4 14 or older older than GP PRO PB III for Windows Ver 7 0 be sure to update the 2 Way Driver and set up GP If you use Ethernet protocol with Factory Gateway you should also execute the update You can check the 2 Way Driver version on the status monitor Reference gt 6 2 GP Status Monitoring e OPC Setup The server and the client versions are available and support only Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP Install the server version on the PC where you use Pro Server and the client version on the PC where you use client software Tutorial The tutorial uses HTML files to explain the installation setup and usage of the Pro Studio software e GP Viewer Trial Version Setup This is the trial version of GP Viewer Install the GP Viewer after Pro Server installation is completed When you set up the trial version of GP Viewer you must have installed Microsoft JAVA VM on your PC in advance If not you should obtain it from the Microsoft site Setting the Factory Gateway Configration Tool If you use this tool you can perform the communication setup of Factory Gateway even without the GP PRO PB III environment 2 5 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Sof
99. for the status of the device registered in step 1 Symbol Name a Check Interval 500 ms lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 4 88 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action If Designated Interval is designated as the trigger Designate Symbol Name and Time Interval and click on the Next button When registering symbols the procedure is the same as that of When the screen s button is touched Provider Information Setting Wizard Interval Designating Providing Conditions Interval Use the following steps to perform an Action for the desired period 1 Designate the desired period 2 If you wish to periodically perform the Action only while a designated device is ON you must designate the device name IF no device is designated the Action is performed regularly with no relation to device s condition Time Interval Provider Interval 500 ms Symbol Mame eT lt Back Next gt Cancel Help If Designated Time is designated as the trigger Designate Action start time and click on the Next button Provider Information Setting Wizard Time Designating Providing Conditions Time Action will be performed at the designated time Enter time in 24 hour units Action start time
100. g Bopapetian regret bane vaelved wih stoner ine ET Min HelpiH 8 It accesses a database directly EMCEL Indirect accesses a database ACCESS File designation ex NPIDataBase ff ga Pro face Ey Pro Server with Studio Database information Designate the required information to access the database server You can select the driver name from either SQL Server Oracle ODBC Driver or DSN 4 53 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters When Oracle ODBC Driver is selected the server name cannot be set Only Oracle8 is supported For Oracle ODBC Driver use Version 8 0 5 5 0 or later If you use an older version the A reverse set does not support a reverse scroll message will appear and the Action will quit exit e DSN supports only Microsoft Access For setting information refer to 4 3 10 Upload to Database Setting up DSN section e When DSN is selected do not enter any data for the server name Do not use the search feature while the Microsoft Access Design view is open Normally connected to server If you wish to connect to the server all the time check Normally connected to server If connection request is not received within standard time period connection is terminated If you wish to disconnect from database when there is no communica
101. gt lage Power ON Wl EG ON Time Interval IE Rewrite Trigger ENE Tf Status OFF Lale Description tatus ON Data is provided when the walue of device specified as the symbol is not zero Symbol 005001 BIT rigger is pperEdge Interval 500 ms Trigger Ol Term weese T C DC Trigger Cancel HelpiH Provider Node Consumer Node s Symbol 0900 WORD F Length Constant value PL FJACTION1 M PL CI J WINDOWS NT 5 Symbol Name MELSEC ONA Symbol Name 4 2 Registering Action Items The following table shows data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name poe 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charac ction Name Bit signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Wnsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision 0 Writes Data to Excel Book O O O O O O O O O O O O Be sure to use the following codes values when you designate an Action Item s data type Value Data Type Value Data Type 1 Bit 7 Unsigned 32 bits decimal 2 Signed 16 bits decimal 8 32 bits hexadecimal 3 Unsigned 16 bits decimal 9 BCD 32 bits 4 16 bits hexadecimal 10 Single precision floating point 5 BCD 16 bi
102. in 7Y M D h m s format 4 12 3 4 2 Registering Action Items Designate each Action s parameters and click OK All the registered settings for the Action will then be registered A PS Pro Studio File F Edit E Tools T Programming Suppor P DataView D Contigure S View Help H lel es APS Network Entry Node i im Provider Information Pegg Action List User designated Action name Action wiites Data to Excel Action Item used by the User designated Action Help is FT key 4 2 Registering Action Items Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions If the macro codes shown below are designated for the Save File name in an Action s parameter settings the file name can be changed to Node Name or Save data in Device Name Symbol Name of Provider Node e Provider s Node Name Macro Code NODE Ex If the participating Node GP1 is designated using Data NODE the filename will become Data GP1 e Save data in Device Name Symbol Name of Provider Node Macro Code DEV Device or Symbol name Ex When saving 2043 to D100 if Data DEV D100 is used the filename will change to Data 2043 When the data saved to the Provider s device name symbol name is converted to a filename the following usa
103. in ms after When a device is registered as a symbol The Polling Time value in the Register Symbol dialog is used Create from swanne Men Device Address El Global Symbol Data Type Bit 32 Bit Float Double String Signed OF Unsigned Hex OG BED Folling Time 10001 ms Append Coe _ JIL Cancel Helpi When a device is not registered as a symbol and designating polling time without polling time designation The DDE Polling Time value in the System Configuration dialog is used Pro Studio Folder DDE Polling Time CaPragrarn Files Studio 1000 ing GP PROPB3 for Wind Fald dd E Status Monitor Polling Time E Program Files Pro face Pro Server with Studiot 5000 ms r Network Project File Auto Load Auto Log on Dj Auto Load x Auto Log on Hetnet Panipat Pils Hame Baesa EI i Aohalnlstjatar Wade i Q Reanna Mada DDE Pop Up Message Display Message O Read Any llada Display Period 10000 me O Diseonmect iade OK Cancel HelpiH 9 43 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Designating Life Time Although Pro Server calculates life time automatically from polling
104. in the CF Card is processed 2 Indirect designation by device address data in the CF Card Among data in the CF Card captured data with the same number as the device value designated by Device Name is processed 3 File number designation data in the CF Card Captured data with the number designated by File Number in CF Card is processed 12 Character String Writes character strings given as a parameter into a cell when executing this Action area For designat ing parameters refer to Command Description 4 After setting Action Area Property set Details if necessary When using Write Method to set Scroll Type Loop Type this feature cannot be used Action Area Properties Action Area Property Details Spacing between data when performing multiple data writes a Column el Row fo DO When creating sheet clear designated cell range before starting Spacing between data If you write more than one data in one Action area you can designate spacing between data using the number of cells in Row and Column directions In the case of GP screen data JPEG data designate those not by the number of cell but by the number of points When creating sheet clear designated cell range before starting If any unnecessary data exists in cells designated as an Action area by checking this item that unnecessary data will be deleted when the
105. in the table below Writing is possible only to the head device and the maximum write number is restricted to Maximum Number of Write in the table below If you execute writes exceeding those maximum numbers the warning dialog will appear Device Type to Maximum Number of Maximum Number of floating point Access Format Read Write Bit Device Bit 255 1 16 Bits Device Bit 255 1 16 bits 255 40 32 bits 127 20 Single precision floating point 127 20 Double precision 63 10 Character string 510 single byte 80 single byte 32 Bits Device 16 bits 255 1 32 bits 255 40 Single precision floating point 255 40 Double precision 127 20 floating points Character string 1020 single byte 160 single byte 6 3 6 1 Device Monitoring The polling time set for collecting or writing data for each symbol distrib uting data and monitoring devices may not be able to be performed under certain conditions These conditions include the currently registered num ber of GPs number of Tags used on each screen sent type of PLC con nection and number of other currently open Windows applications Enter ing O will allow the system to operate at its maximum speed Please use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to fine tune your system If you try to monitor non existing devices a communication error will be displayed on t
106. in vasious methods Operation Window in damgnata ths dala tup dialog Show Hide Switching Bar yer tn a a peat cone ot fa The then ener date are collefled and saved every time you click this anf caved every time you click this button Time Bar Display Area Operation Description Window The display area size is fixed and you cannot change it 7 1 Data View Overview You can only install the trial version of GP Viewer V1 1 from the Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Ver 4 5 CD ROM When a trial version of the GP Viewer software is used the words Trial Edition will appear on the splash screen All the program s features however are the same as the official version Following four files are created by Device View kK ADV oe Sampled device information text format eK DB we Sampling method information text format EK SR we Sampled device optimal information text format sk HDR woe Saved data binary format When using Data View the database accessed even if it is only temporarily will be registered as a network project If during data polling the system should go down once the system is restored simply restarting Pro Server will automatically restarts the data polling Polling data is saved in a file using the same file extension as a Network Project file NPJ DBs When Pro Server is started the Network Project s
107. indows Personal Computer E Eelt Pioti hamle Delete Proven brfamnellar Register Action Edlk karlan Deletedtolem Register new provider data ia MUM a The maximum number of provider information that can be registered is 350 You can also select Register Provider Information by right clicking the provider information list 2 The Provider Node dialog appears Select the data provider source node and then click OK Provider Node Select Provider Node WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer MELSEC_QMA 100 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC QNA CP WINDOWS 95 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer Please register all node names and symbols Symbols are start addresses for provider and consumer data areas Note After editing this data please save it before sending to the GP you set PC node s for consumer you must restart Pro Server Cancel Help H 3 19 3 3 Registering Provider Data 3 The Provider Information dialog box appears Perform necessary settings in Providing Condition Provider Completion Settings Receive Alert Settings Detailed Settings Provider Node and Consumer Node s and then click OK I Provider Information Title 8heetz Providing Condition Prowaer Completion Settings Receive A
108. is copied to a clip board o NUMI F 22 The read function will be copied into the Clipboard Message ReadDevicel6C GP2 _DOO04O WORD Entervalue Receive butter here 1 This string was copied to the clip board Please paste and use in your application 9 67 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 23 Double click Button1 pasted to Dialog of the Microsoft Visual C menu 24 Click OK 25 Paste the contents of the Clipboard read function into the OnButton1 member function u Sample Microsoft Visual C Sample re IDD_SAMPLE_DIALOG Dialog File Edt View Insert Project Build Layout Tools Window Help TER ei lsud el2 2 Bre Ells Eres Ej 10c eurton eq en_cuickeD ER B PEN dy Samplers 2 SancleDia cee iE Std f opp 2 3 Header Files i E Resource Sample h SampleDig h I Z Stitch H E Resource Files i 2 Sample ico E sample re2 E ReadMe tat cal P CBU Sample k Workspace Sample 1 project m ARAR ar ES Sample files 2 9 Source Files iE Sampleopp 3 ert s i mx so ee Ready 718565 Ir e060 Bean Add Member Function E Ea Ca Member function name BE tton Message BM_CLICKE D Object I
109. message table file 9812 2654h Unable to find designated sheet in message table file 9813 2655h Message table is incorrect 9814 2656h No equivalent enabled code 9815 2657h Error occurred during POP confirmation For details see the Log Viewer 9816 2658h Unable to send mail For details see the Log Viewer 9817 2659h Unable to send portion of mail For details see the Log Viewer A 8 A 2 Error Messages Error Code Meaning Decimal Hex 9818 265Ah Rosemead 9819 265Bh 9820 265Ch Unable to find designated database 9821 265Dh Unable to find designated Table Or there are no records in the designated Table 9822 265Eh Unable to find the designated field name 9823 265Fh Unable to find the designated data 9824 2660h Field data is incorrect 9825 2661h Validation failed 9826 2662h Error occurred while accessing the database 9827 2663h Unable to create the Pro Server handle 9828 2664h There are no character data 9829 2665h Reserved 9839 266Fh 9840 2670h Unable to open Action Report Sheet Template or unable to append sheet 9841 2671h Failed to start EXCEL 9842 2672h Unable to open Template Book 9843 2673h Action System Error 9844 2674h Unable to save Output Book 9845 2675h Designated Template Sheet s does not exist in Templa
110. name of month 2 C Day and time expression according to the locale HC Long expression of day and time according to the locale d Day expressed in decimal 1 H Hour in 24 hours expression 00 23 1 l Hour in 12 hours expression 01 12 1 j Days in decimal since the year beginning 001 366 1 m Month in decimal 01 12 1 M Minute in decimal 00 59 1 p AM PM of the current locale 2 S Second in decimal 00 59 1 U Sequential number of the week in decimal Sunday is regarded as the first day of the week 00 53 1 KW Day of the week in decimal Sunday is regarded as 0 0 6 1 yW Sequential number of the week in decimal Monday is regarded as the first day of the week 00 53 1 X Day according to the current locale AHX Long expression of day according to the current locale X Time according to the current locale 2 y The last 2 digits of year in decimal 00 99 1 BY Year in 4 digits in decimal 1 Name or abbreviation of the time zone If the time zone is unknown do EE not enter any characters 2 A Percent sign 2 If you add before d H I j m M S U w W y or Y e g d leading zeros will be deleted if there are e g 05 becomes 5 2 If you add before a A b B p X z Z or e g PHa will be ignored 9 30 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function GP Time STRING VARIANT Type Read Func
111. now equipped with two Ethernet I F units This can separate the network between PLC GP and GP PC to break up traffic The Ethernet Expansion Unit cannot be used with the GP 2300 GP 2400 GLC2300 or GLC2400 series units The Expansion Ethernet I F Unit is used for PLC data transfer and the internal Ethernet I F is used for data transfer via the 2 Way Driver Use of the Expansion Ethernet I F Unit will require the setting of a separate IP Address In order to transfer data to a PLC you will need to enter your GP GLC unit s Ethernet settings via the OFFLINE mode s INITIALIZE gt PLC SETUP gt PLC SETUP gt SETUP ETHERNET INFORMA TION screen However the Subnet Mask and IP Address must be entered in the PLC SETUP gt SETUP ETHERNET EXT INFORMATION screen This data must also be entered in the GP PRO PBIII for Windows software s Project Manager screen GP Setup menu s Communication Settings tab The entering of Ethernet settings for communication using the 2 Way Driver feature via the internal Ethernet I F is done using the GP unit s previously mentioned OFFLINE mode Select the INITIALIZE gt PLC SETUP gt EXPANSION SETTINGS gt ETHERNET SETUP area and enter the required setting data there Also enter the required settings in the Pro Studio program s Register Edit Node area Also enter the Port No in the Configure gt Network area 1 9 The following table describes what each set
112. or call start up other Windows JPEG viewer applications Internet Explorer Paint etc When you perform Save GP Capture Data GPunit screen displays and operation will stop for a few seconds Therefore you cannot perform the GP screen capture operation from a host level PC You should set the bit 0 of the GP unit s LS2076 to ON 1 to capture GP screens from a host level PC The 0 bit of LS2077 will become ON 1 during capturing and it becomes OFF 0 when completed 4 58 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 4 3 13 Writes Data to CSV file This Action writes designated Provider data to a CSV file The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name ere 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charact cton Same Bit Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision ae Writes Data to CSV File O O O O O O O O O O O O When an Action receives data from Provider Node e When an Action receives data of signed 16 bits decimal unsigned 16 bits decimal 16 bits hexadecimal all data is processed as signed 16 bits decimal When an Action receives data of signed 32 bits decimal unsigned 32 bits decimal 32 bits hexadecimal all data is processed as signed 32 bits decimal al following dialog will appear Setting Parameters pave File Version 4 10
113. point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDoubleD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStrD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI ReadDevice VariantD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 6 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Single Handle Direct Write Function Bit data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBitD _LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice16D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice32D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD32D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloatD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDoubleD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceStr
114. raised within life time life time will be reset at that moment After life time passed polling to the device stops automatically The figure on the next page shows Pro Server s behavior when a cache read request is given from an application via Simple DLL 9 41 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Pro Server s behavior when a cache read request is given from an application via Simple DLL Application Pro Server Returns cache data existing Cache data is deleted after life Cache Data time passed PLC Reads PLC data directly because cache data do not exist 2 I Executes polling to PLC according to polling L time I stops a When life time passed after the last read request is raised polling utomatically 9 42 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Designating Polling Time Pro Server decides polling time according to the following priority Designating polling time directly using Simple DLL or DDE Designate it as part of character string to the device designation part of Simple DLL or DDE The format is as the following lt Polling Time gt lt Polling Time gt Polling time value in ms Example When designating 20 seconds as polling time IErr ReadDevice Variant GP1 D100 20000 Data 1 EASY_AppKind_SignedWord 6639 Separate this with blank space after a device or a symbol and designated it
115. read and write functions The following procedures explain how to write data from Excel to a desig When developing applications with VB or VC refer to Chapter 9 Simple DLL Function Start up Microsoft Excel Select Visual Basic Editor from the Tools menu s Macro feature X Microsoft Excel Book1 i File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help De R EEG x fa Fo 87 Spelling F7 AutoCorreck al Fl B C Share workbook Track Changes r Merag Wophooks Protection 3 Goal Seek Scenarios Auditing 3 L p si liag B e o 43 Fi G Add Ins Customize Options Wizard k Record New Macro Al k F8 F11 3 37 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function 4 Select Module from Insert in the Visual Basic Editor 5 B Microso a Fibs Paste the declare statement in the inserted standard module aa Microsoft Visual Basic Book Eile Edit view Insert Format Debug Rur 6 This completes function declaration Eg Sant Un Chae Ca Redo Paste Ea eey Tise 2 ste y Clear
116. read function will be copied into the Clipboard Err ReadDevirelatGP2 DONQ4N WORD Enter valuedmeger type nere 1 This string was copie to the clip board Please paste and use in your applicatian 16 Double click Command1 on Form1 to paste the contents read function in the Clipboard between the Sub and the EndSub statements ra Project Form Code Private Sub Commandi Click Ead Sub 9 51 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 17 Declare the area to store read data You should designate three or more area elements if the number of read data is three The number of area elements is from 0 to 2 in this example However the area type Integer in this example needs to be matched to the symbol data type to use Fu Project Form Code Private Sub Comsan l Click Dim uData 2 s Integer 18 Designate the header area to store read data wData 0 and also designate 3 as the number of read data te Sub Comzandl Click Dim uData 2 s Integer lErr Bemdbevicel GPa DO0040 WORD xDatatO 3 Esa Suk Private Sub Comsan l Click Dim uData 2 s Integer lErr Bemdbevicel GPa DO0040 WORD xDaratO 3 List1 adarcem CStr wbara O O List1 4ddItem CStr wDacali 1 List1 addItem CStr wbeta 2 2
117. register as sender Registers provide data command as sender provider register as receiver Registers provide data command as receiver Argumenti lt String gt lt Value gt String Value Value display format err Error No Hex pr ProjectID Hex ow OwnerApp Hex ma MajorNo Hex mi MinorNo Hex Argument2 lt String gt lt Value gt String Value Value display format code Device code Hex addr Device address Hex pack DataPack Hex kind DataKind Hex count Data count by word Hex do First data 1WORD Hex Argument3 lt String gt lt Value gt String Value Value display format pr ProjectID Hex ow OwnerApp Hex ma MajorNo Hex mi MinorNo Hex dl DataLen Hex va Validity Hex Argument4 lt String gt lt Value gt String Value Value display format rn ResourceNo Hex pack DataPack Hex kind DataKind Hex count ProvidCount Hex howto HowTo Hex ext ExtDevType Hex code Device code Hex addr Device address Hex retry RetryCount Hex wait RetryWaitTime Hex A 14 A 3 Scale Conversion using Excel A 3 Scale Conversion using Excel This section explains the use of Microsoft Excel s scale conversion feature for input data The following example converts a range of I to 1000 to a range of 1 to 100 2s Microsoft Excel scale xls E File Edit view Insert Format Tools Da
118. set on entry nodes are displayed Provider Receive Alert Device Designate device to set to 1 ON Select device from the pull down menu This device is set before provider completion device is set For details of set reset timing between this device and other device refer to the timing chart in the previous page Detailed Settings Tab This tab s settings are enabled only when the 2 Way Driver is Ver 4 10 or later Provider Completion Settings I Receive Alert Settings Detailed Settings Provider Type Peer to Peer O Broadcast Caution Do not use the Broadcast setting unless you are familiar with Ethernet settings Use Provider Timeout Time from Network Settings Provider Timeout Time 20000 By Repiy Check Provider Type Select the provider type Reply Check Select if the replay for provider completion should be checked The maximum waiting time is the provider timeout time Retry Designates the Retry count when the Reply Check option is checked Enter a numeric value from 0 to 32 3 26 3 3 Registering Provider Data Provider Timeout Time Sets the provider timeout time If you wish to change the provider timeout time to desired numbers uncheck Use Provider Timeout Time from Network Settings Provider timeout time designated per the network project file npj with Pro Server V4 0 or older can b
119. should designate Sampling Condition Interval Condition and Data sampling from start to finish of data reception in the Condition field I Sampling method x Sampling method F Regular Sampling Periodic Sampling Sampling data when PC was distributed Condition sampling Condition Node Mame Device Data Type Condition El I EF oener Edge r Interval Condition a Interval msec plata sampling from start to finish of data reception Sampling using cache i sec Interval sec Polling data record file Change CiMy Documentsttat DB Saving Method fo maximum size Sampling Condition Designate the timing to sample device data You should designate the node name that you wish to perform a sampling the target device name the device model and the device change condition Interval Condition Designate intervals to check the device change and to sample data when the status changed Data sampling from start to finish of data reception Designate the intervals to save data before and after the device change occurred and the sampling condition was satisfied Intervals designated here should be longer than the sampling interval 7 38 7 3 GP Viewer When Yo
120. simultaneously The multi handle function name has an upper case M at the end to distinguish it from the single handle function For example the multi handle function which has the equal functionality as the single handle function ReadDevice Variant is ReadDevice VariantM You can use the multi handle function when you use a multi thread or access to more than one PLC simultaneously Reference gt Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi Thread Applications System Function This is the Pro Server s system function which does not belong to either the single handle or the multi handle function Cache Read When more than one application reads from the same device it takes time if Pro Server reads the PLC one by one according to those requests If Application A and B both request reads to the same PLC device the cache read function reads data from PLC according to the request from Application A first saves data in a cache buffer within Pro Server and responds to Application A as the answer to the read request Next for the read request from Application B the cache read function returns data read for Application A and saved in a cache buffer For detail refer to Details of Cache Read Polling Time and Life Time PC a Application A Cache Buffer Application To B sEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Pro Server GP PLC DDEs are all cache reads 9 3 9 1 Simple DLL
121. size of data file to be stored Designate the folder to save sampled data You should designate the total volume size of data to save among No maximum size is designated as much as storage media allows Designate maximum size and Periodic saving 7 2 Device View If you selected Designate maximum size you should also designate the maximum data size in MByte and the sampling method Selecting Continuous numbering for new files When the maximum allowed size is exceeded the following new file is created sk sk Sequence number DT ABCD 0 4DT gt ABCD 1 DT Selecting Save over oldest data The oldest Polling data is overwritten when the maximum allowed size is exceeded Selecting Do not save files after size limit reached When the maximum allowed size is exceeded Polling is stopped and an error message appears If you selected Periodic saving you should also designate the interval to upload the files Execute the device data sampling If you wish to test the sampling click ot button The sampling process starts and the contents are displayed on Device View The sampled data are not saved at this time If you wish to sample data once click etl button Data are sampled and saved every time you click the jet button regardless of the designated data sampling condition If you wish to sample data according to the designated data sampling condition click the
122. string data be sure to secure sufficient data area to be able to receive those data 9 15 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function 9 1 3 System and Other Control Functions Acquiring Pro Server Handle HANDLE WINAPI CreateProServerHandle lt Function gt Acquires the Pro Server handle to use when utilizing multi handle functions lt Return value gt Executed successfully Other than 0 handle code Not executed successfully 0 Releasing Pro Server Handle INT WINAPI DeleteProServerHandle HANDLE hProServer lt Function gt Releases the Pro Server handle already acquired lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code lt Arguments gt hProServer Pro Server handle to be released Loading Network Project File Single INT WINAPI EasyLoadNetworkproject LPCTSTR sDBName DWORD dwSetOrAdd TRUE Multi INT WINAPI EasyLoadNetworkprojectM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR sDBName DWORD dwSetOrAdd TRUE lt Function gt Loads the network poroject file designated by an argument lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code 9 16 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function lt Arguments gt sDBName Designate the full path to the network project file dwSetOrAdd Reserved fixed to 1 hProServer Pro Server handle Character String Conversion of Error Codes BOOL WINAPI EasyLoadErrorMessage INT iEr
123. the Pro Studio Tool menu s Transfer Network Project selection to send this updated data Reference gt 8 1 Transferring Network Project Files 8 5 9 Simple DLL Function This chapter describes the Simple DLL function 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function The Simple DLL is a series of API Using the Simple DLL you can read and write data of PLC connected to GP GLC Factory Gateway from applications in Visual Basic or Visual C via Pro Server The Simple DLL ProEasy DLL is embedded in Windows System folder at the installation The sample Pro Easy DLL program is included in the Pro SDK folder within the Pro Server CD ROM 9 1 1 Simple DLL Structure The Simple DLL is structured as follows unction Function Write with Cache Refresh Other Control Function MUS Aenale Read Function Cache Type Function Direct Type Write Function Direct Type Write with Cache Refresh Other Control Function System Function Single Handle Function This function uses sequential communication so that you cannot call other functions while calling a certain function You can however call the function without having to acquire an access handle 9 2 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Multi Handle Function This function allows you to use more than one single handle function with multiple partners
124. this software The file in which this information is stored is called a network project file x npj and is used by Pro Server for its data exchange with application programs To exchange data with the host PC each GP must have the 2 Way Driver and the network project informa tion downloaded to it along with the GP s screen information via GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 3 0 or later The 2 Way Driver is factory installed in the GP2000 and GLC2000 Series units Inside of PC Pro Studio GP PRO PBIII for Windows V 3 0 or later GE NE GP system or z Network Project file Protocols for Panel project file prw various PLCs computer PC npj 2 Way Driver 1 5 1 3 System Configuration On line In response to an application s request this software accesses PLC data by way of the GP using the network project file Prior to using Pro Server be sure to first use your PC s GP PRO PBIII for Windows software to download the 2 Way Driver and your PLC s protocol to the GP unit ODBC Connection Distributing VBAC User Excel Access E Mai _ Foe with gathered data Appl ication Automat ic SCADA HMI to Excel Samp ing Mr iting PC t 4 __4 4 me o ei gt serien mie 5 CSV lt Pro Server gt Data View ma ine a Printing ata BMP Ethernet E E E PLC PLC PLC SESS
125. to Device Designate the name of device to write to Field Designate the field of device to write to Type Designate the data type of data to write Data types are designated by the following values Value Data Type Value Data Type 1 Bit 7 Unsigned 32 bits decimal 2 Signed 16 bits decimal 8 32 bits hexadecimal 3 Unsigned 16 bits decimal 9 BCD 32 bits 4 16 bits hexadecimal 10 Single precision floating point 5 BCD 16 bits 11 Double precision floating point 6 Signed 32 bits decimal 12 Character string In the case of Microsoft Excel Sheet Example or Microsoft Access Table Example the value of D100 device of the provider node is written to the field1 field of the table1 table in DBA database as signed 16 bits decimal data Data Type 2 Equally the value of the D101 device and that of the D102 device are written to the field2 field of the tablel table in DBA database and to the field3 field of the table2 table in DBB database respectively as signed 16 bits decimal data Data Type 2 The sample table file ProDB xls is available in the Pro Server with Pro Studio Pro SDk folder When using ProDB xls DataBase mdb is in the same folder as the relational database sample e When Type is designated as 12 Character string 255 characters are read in from the device address designated in Device and until a NULL string is reached data is written t
126. to this manual information on additional modified functions may be provided as data files TABLE OF CONTENTS PREFAGE e E E E E E E 1 NOTE EE SE E T 1 TRADEMARK RIGHTS 252 seedsic nce dedsanisecdnacnecncesdauzenssaccsasseedaeseccusuncesdecdacsusassteaeedeeduus 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL m nnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnsnnnennennnnnsnnnennennnnnnnnnenen 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS i esessenemidnnvidennmn kven ad ken end k ddmd bankmann annia 4 MANUAL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY rnnneannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 9 ga 0 pe ME dannandi aiin 10 PACKAGE CONTENTS Lu nasnivensmsmenenm panne adm md 11 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT m rennvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenennnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnne 12 Chapter 1 Introduction TT oT a e E EE E A E admit samene 1 2 1 2 What is the 2 Way Driver esreassvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennne 1 3 1 3 System Configuration nnnsnanannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnvnmennevnnenneennnennnnnnnnnnnnnmennnnnann 1 4 1 3 1 External Configuration reasrasvannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnanennnnen 1 4 1 3 2 Internal Configuration asressrasvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennennnnannnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnennnnenennnnnnennenenene 1 5 1 4 Application Interfaces rraassnrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 1 11 1 4 1 DDE function Outline esasvensnvnnnvennnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnvnnnennnn
127. warning dialog will appear 7 7 4 The selected device data is displayed on Device View i Device View File E Option DataEdit Sampling or era emm me ltem name Node name Device name Valu 2030 GP2300L 2030 a 2031 GP2300L 2031 a 2032 GP2300L 2032 16 2033 GP2300L 2033 o 2034 GP2300L 2034 0 2035 GP2300L 2035 g4 2036 GP2300L 2036 o 2037 GP2300L 2037 0 2038 GP2300L 2038 Ag 2039 GP2300L 2039 0 7 2 Device View The contents here displayed on Device View are device data at the moment when you click OK in the procedure 3 This data is not updated 7 2 Device View 7 2 2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition This feature allows you to setup the data sampling condition from the sampling target device This section describes operations after you selected the sampling target device 1 Click Sampling of Device View File E Option DataEdit Sampling or e1 emm m ltem name Node name Device name Valu 2030 GP2300L 2030 a 2031 GP2300L 2031 o 2032 GP2300L 2032 16 2033 GP2300L 2033 o 2034 GP2300L 2034 o 2035 GP2300L 2035 94 2036 GP2300L 2036 o 2037 GP2300L 2037 a 2038 GP2300L 2038 43 2039 GP2300L 2039 a 2 The following dialog appears Click Y
128. wish to continue as Clicking Use Defaults resets all values to the default values 3 63 3 11 Configuring the Network 3 11 1 Configuring Ethernet Cards If the PC for Pro Server has equipped with two or more Ethernet cards it is required to designate the specific card for Pro Server to use If the PC has only one Ethernet card there is no need to change the settings 1 Select Configure s Network Configuration item Network Configuration IOK Project ID 1908 10120 15 46 4 ra Advanced Port No 8000 Help H r Network Remote Password Passward annm Ethernet Card r Using 32 bit access with a 16 bit device LowiHigh order is fixed Automatic device detection 2 Click the Ethernet Card button The Ethernet Card window will appear Ethernet Card IP Address Cancel Use Defaults Help H 3 Select the IP address of the card to be used by Pro Server and click OK After changing the Ethernet card make sure to restart both Pro Server and Pro Studio 3 64 3 12 Printing the Setting Data 3 12 Printing the Setting Data You can Print Pro Studio Setting data The items that can be printed are as follows Provider s list IP address sub net mask PLC type Registered symbol information by provider Symbol name symbol type device address d
129. you wish to display The following shows the contents per message Message Kind Contents System Message Indicates system messages for starting and shutting down the server System Error Indicates system level errors e g system fatal error Application Error Indicates action error messages Application Start Indicates action starting messages Application End Indicates action ending messages Application Warning Indicates action warning messages Application Message1 Indicates detailed action messages 1 for debugging Application Message2 Indicates detailed action messages 2 for debugging If you check When a message is remaining in the log it is saved automatically to a file data will be overwritten to the online log every time a new message occurs Log Clear If you click this option all contents of the online log will be deleted 6 13 6 4 Log Viewer 6 4 3 Switching Between Online and Offline Modes Log Viewer is started in the online mode If you open the previously saved log 21g it will be switched to the offline mode New log messages occurred during the offline mode will remain in the online log 1 Select File F Open O from the menu bar _ Online vay Event Log Vie File F Editi Contigurels Help H Current Log 1 Ctrl N PE Save S Ctrl 5 Save as 4 Quit Event Viewer 2 The Open dialog box appears Designat
130. 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table lt Arguments gt HANDLE hProServerHandle Pro Server handle to change the processing mode dwMode 1 for executing message processing 2 for suppressing message processing 9 32 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Acquiring Message Processing Method Single INT EasyGetWaitType Multi INT EasyGetWaitTypeM HANDLE hProServerHandle lt Function gt This function is to acquire which mode the message processing method is currently set to In the case of multi handle the function returns the current mode per handle lt Arguments gt HANDLE hProServerHandle Handle to acquire the state lt Return value gt 1 Executes message processing 2 Suppresses message processing 9 33 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function 9 1 4 Precautions When Using Function Precautions When LPVARIANT Returns an Undefined Error at ProEasy h Compila tion by VC When Visual C ver 6 is used to compile Pro SDK VC Public ProEasy h or the header data copied to the clipboard via Pro Studio s Programming extension VC Text the LPVARIANT may return an undefined error Since the LPVARIANT is defined within afxdisp h if the data is not included an error will occur To avoid this error to occur you should define include lt afxdisp h gt in stdafx h in a normal case GLC 32 Bit Device Bit Access Method The GLC unit s 32 bit addressi
131. 0 160 181 172 Windows Pi Pm65j 11 pr SKB PRW i f MELSEC_ONA 10 27 Printout 111 prar AKB PRW Proface HMI 123 ala 4KB ALA SKB PRW LBB WINDOWS 95102 4f rea Provider Information qt EEE EET Fr Action List a alarm POD SKB POD Ten alarm pr SKB PRW crash pr SBKB PRW 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes The character string data mode is set according to the data storage order of the used PLC Normally it is automatically set to the mode according to the data storage order of the used PLC therefore you do not have to change it When you changed the setting of the character string data mode you must reset the character string data mode in the project file prw of GP on the entry node side to the value designated here Reference gt GP PRO PB III for Windows Operation Manual GP Setup I Device Storage Il Byte LH HL III Word LH HL Character String Order of Data Storage Order in Storage Order in Data Mode Word Double Word Store from the front LH LH 4 data HL 2 HL LH 5 HL 1 Store from the end LH LH 6 data HL 7 HL LH 8 HL 3 The detailed settings of the selected network entry node are shown in the right side window After registration is completed the registered node name will be added to the network node list If you wish to change a node topic s data after it has been regist
132. 00 Hard disk capacity 100MB or more Required memory 64MB or more OPC cannot be used on Windows 98 Windows 98 SE or Windows Me When using Windows XP the security level should be set to the same level as Windows 2000 For setup procedures refer to Appendix 6 Changing Windows XP Security Level 10 2 10 1 OPC Server The following data explains the settings required when using the OPC Server These settings should be entered in each of the OPC Clients used ItemID The ItemID format is as follows ItemID XXX DDDDD SIG NUMCHAR SCL SCH EGUL EGUH e XXX Node name to be accessed DDDDD Symbol name to be accessed or applicable PLC s device address e SIG Signal condition Can be omitted When omitted this becomes NONE Corresponding signal condition type LIN BCD and SQRT NUMCHAR When the Item s data type is set to VIT BSTR the NUMCHAR value is used to place a character string in the position designated by the SCL value Using VT BSTR will automatically disable all options after SCL Designate the character string using byte values The default value is 40 bytes e SCL Lower limit value before scale conversion Can be omitted When omitted this becomes 0 e SCH Upper limit value before scale conversion Can be omitted When omitted this becomes 65535 e EGUL EGU s lower limit value Can be omitted When omitted this becomes 0 e EGUH EGU s upper limit value Can
133. 0200 Value Data Type 16 BittSigned 16 Bit Signed 16 BittSigned ltem Status Error Code M i a Data number 20 1 1 Delete 112 01 11 13 42 AM 0 0 0 0 117 217 112 01 11 13 47 AM 0 0 0 0 117 217 1142 01 11 13 52 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 11201 11 13 57 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 A201 11 14 02 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 112 01 11 14 07 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 A201 11 14 12 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 11201 11 14 17 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 112 01 11 14 22 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 112 01 11 14 27 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 UNDI 11 14 32 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 IURI 11 14 37 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 a o alals alala sjalale 4 La C ee Search Edit 7 43 7 3 GP Viewer Appending Sampled Data 1 Click Append of the Data Edit dialog 2 The next dialog appears Designate each item about the device that you wish to append and then click OK Items are equal to those in the Data sampling source dialog Reference 7 2 1 Setting Sampling Target Device Data sampling source Enter the data sampling source and sampling frequency then click Next Device Name 2040 B Data Type 116 Bit Signed Count O
134. 11252 AM 112101 11 14 02 AM IUR 11 14 07 AM TOT 11 13 57 AM 32 BIKBCD Float Double String Edit AUNDI 11 14 12 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 URM 11 14 17 AM OQO 11217 11201 11 14 22 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 Search EI 11201 11 14 27 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 11201 11 14 32 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 11201 11 14 37 AM 10 0 0 1 17 2 17 sle ele e a sje elale e 4 2 Enter the new contents from the keyboard The contents of the selected field are updated Data cannot be edited during Polling Editing Saved Data 1 Click Edit of the Data Edit dialog 2 The Edit button in the Data Edit dialog is highlighted and the Delete Record button appears Data Source Er Append ltem name 1 0000 2 0100 3 0200 Node name GP2300L GP2300L GP2300L Device name 0000 0100 0200 Della Value Data Type 16 BitiSigned 16 Bit Signed 16 Bit Signed Item Status Error Code 0 0 Data number fil 20 1 1 1RD 11 13 42 AM OQO1 1217 Search 112101 11 13 47 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 11201 11 13 52 AM OQO1 1217 11201 11 13 57 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 11201 11 14 02 AM 11201 11 14 07 AM 112 01 11 14
135. 12 AM Delete Record 1402 01 11 14 17 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 112 01 11 14 22 Abt 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 112901 11 14 27 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 i201 11 14 32 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 e e sje e el e e s e g e 112001 11 14 37 AM 0 0 0 0 1 17 2 17 4 3 Select the data that you wish to delete and then click Delete Record The selected data will be deleted Click on OK to set the selections made in Edit and or Delete Record Click on Cancel to delete all current selections 7 45 7 3 GP Viewer 7 3 4 Setting Drawing This feature allows you to change the display format of the data display area in GP Viewer 1 Click Option of GP Viewer I GP Viewer Ma File E Option DataEdit Sampling e Jeanne m 2001 11 02 11 2 01 z 20014 102 11 13 42 111367 11 13 57 m 2 The Wizard dialog appears Perform required settings and then click Option of GP Viewer to close the dialog Display Control Es Display Mode gt screen No i Previous Next Set Synchronous Mode synchronous Full Synd GP Syne Async Refresh Screen Data 7 46 7 3 GP Viewer Synchronous Mode You can designate the synchronization style between GP screens and GP Viewer There are 3 synchro n
136. 2 failed a zzzez com Device C Failure Stopped device C due to a failure PSN D ilur ice C Failure Valve 2 failed The repair part is at F1 Per 2 2 3 ice B Failure Oil pressure of device B is abnormal Device B Failure Oil pressure of device B is abnormal b z2222 com Stopped device B due to a failure 22 22com ab bz2222 com When sending the same message to more than one destination enter those addresses in the Key Code field separating them with commas If you do not create the Address column an email is sent to the address designated in th Send Mail Address field of the Setting Mail Information dialog box 4 42 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters You can register at maximum 5 messages with the same Key Code If an email cannot be sent an error message will appear in the log viewer The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name Fn 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charac cton Name Bit signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Writes Data to E pate O O O O O O O O O O O O Mail Title name Writes Data to E Mail Table ele O Ae Ou n ae alan Piedad cs i Yl Writes Data to E Mail o no designations i x x 7 7 x g x x 1 following dialog box will appear Login
137. 21h Pro Server API parameter error 9506 2522h_ Response time out 9507 2523h Pro Server failed in initializing the LAN 9508 2524h No data 9509 2525h Invalid device 9510 2526h Invalid address 9511 2527h The address is out of the valid range 9512 2528h Data type error 9513 2529h Transmission message error 9514 252Ah Cannot initialize Pro Server cache function 9515 252Bh Cannot load the network project because the database is used 9516 252Ch i Reserved 9559 2557h 9560 2558h DLL load error 9561 2559h Cannot find a function in DLL 9562 255Ah System error can be considered if this occurs 9563 255Bh The designated property ID is not defined 9564 255Ch Value conversion error Incorrect characters as numbers are designated 9565 255Dh Too many characters 9566 255Eh The number is too large 9567 255Fh Cannot start COMM 9568 2560h Cannot start GJ 9569 2561h Cannot open the s file 9570 2562h File read error 9571 2563h File write error 9572 2564h No tags exist No parameter class declarations exist A 6 A 2 Error Messages Error Code Decimali Hex Meaning 9573 2565h No end tags exist No parameter class declarations exist 9574 2566h Found the unexpected end tag 9575 2567h Signatures do not match 9576 2568h Unsupported parameter
138. 2493h An invalid value has been entered in s 9364 2494h A character unavailable for s is involved 9365 2495h s has not been entered yet 9366 2496h Cannot start a new process until the process result is returned from the server 9367 2497h Cannot terminate the application while waiting for the process result 9368 2498h Read permission required to execute this command Log on to the network again 9369 2499h Write permission required to execute this command Log on to the network again 9370 249Ah Administrator permission required to execute this command Log on to the network again A 4 A 2 Error Messages Error Code i Decimal Hex Meaning 9371 249Bh The specified number is not registered 9372 249Ch Reserved 9375 249Fh 9376 24A0h Cannot read the file Core ID 9377 24A1h Reserved 9389 24ADh Mode of Appointed handle is EASY_TB_STATUS_NOW or 9390 24AEh EASY_TB_STATUS_LAST_READ Please execute after changeing its mode to EASY_TB_STATUS_PAST or EASY_TB_STATUS_INDEX 9391 24AFh Unable to open the designated LS Area 9392 24BOh Designated LS Area is not open 9393 24Bih Failed to aquire CF Card s File List 9394 24B2h Failed to read CF Card s file s 9395 24B3h Failed to write CF Card s file
139. 3 IDEC FC3 FC4A Series SIEMENS S5 90 115 SERIES SIEMENS S5 135 155 SERIES SIEMENS S5 3964 R Protocol Siemens S7 200 PPI Siemens S7 200 via MPI Siemens S7 300 400 via MPI SIEMENS S7 300 400 ETHER 3 5 6 SIMATIC S7 via 3964 RK512 SIMATIC 545 555 CPU O O Oj CO CO CO O CO CO OJ OF OJ CO O JO Rockwell Allen Bradley Keyence Corp Shinko Electric Modicon Corp Allen Bradley PLC 5 SERIES Allen Bradley SLC500 SERIES AB Data Highway Plus Oo O ee O jO i AB SIc500 DH485 AB Remote IO hd x w 0 Allen Bradley ControlLogix DFI AB ControlLogix EtherNet IP Allen Bradley SLC5 05 ETHER KEYENCE KZ300 SERIES KEYENCE KZ A500 CPU KEYENCE KZ A500 LINK KEYENCE KV 10_80RW TW SERIES KEYENCE KV 10_40A D SERIES O Oj O O O O CO CO x KEYENCE KV 700 SERIES CPU SHINKO SELMART SERIES O O O Of CO OC O CO O gt xxO OD ee O jO OO O Modicon Modbus MASTER Modicon Modbus SLAVE Modicon Modbus Plus O O x O O O O FATEK FATEK FACON FB 09 Oo 2 Way Driver Device PLC Type GP 2500 GP 2300 eae in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Creo GP 2600 GP 2400 ones GP e91 GLC2500 GLC2300 GLC2600 GLC2400 ORIM VEXTA ORIM VEXTA E1 SERIES O O O Nome YAMATAKE SDC SERIES o o o o Corporation Ths eo TOHO ELECTRONICS TTM SERIES o o o o RKC Instrument
140. 3 Registering Action Item Parameters The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Action Name Bit Character Automatic Upload of Access Data O O O O O O O O O O O x 1 If you select Automatic Upload of Access Data in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Version 4 10 Access Data Folder Save Folder Dec M ac hd g Program Files 39 Program Files EJ Proface f E Fro lace eal E mdb Filename Save Filename se aMaD hemes Zero Supress Reset fi Pers Field Mame Details Help H Cancel Access Data Folder Enter the save destination drive and folder Ex C ProgramFiles Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK mdb Filename Designate the mdb filename Ex ProRcp mdb Table Select the reference table When an mdb file is selected all the mdb tables are automatically displayed Ex ProRcp table Save Folder If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents you designated are displayed If the folder does not exist the following window appears
141. 32 16 Copy to Clipboard 2033 0 Show Hide Time Bar 2034 9 LC cx 2035 1101 TIE GP 2300L 2036 10 2037 GP2300L 2037 0 2038 GP2300L 2038 1968 2039 GP2300L 2039 0 29 30 sec a 1 Select Data Export on the File F menu 2 The Export dialog appears Designate each item and then click Export Export File Name 2001711702 115 201 By 20014102 13 10 23 132031 EI 13 20 31 EE Export File Name ER Start Time End Time The First aay 201 Specified 1 10 23 Pw D Time theend fiir 201 Specified 1 20 31 Pr 2 Time eDevice Condition Valid O Keyword Divai D Other Export Header Gives G No Cancel Designate the location and the file name to save exported data The file extension is CSV 7 28 7 2 Device View Start Time Designate the time to start exporting data To export Polling data immediately click on the The First checkbox To export Polling data after a specific period of time elapses click on the Specified Time checkbox If you checked Specified Time you should also designate the start time to export End Time Designate the time to end exporting data To wait until all data is polled before exporting click on the The End checkbox To export Polling data afte
142. 4 Option This feature allows you to change the display format of the data display area in Device View 1 Click Option of Device View T T Eii i Device View File E Option DataEdit Sampling forb ere Item name Node name Device name Mau 2030 GP2300L 2030 a 2031 GP2300L 2031 a 2032 GP2300L 2032 16 2033 GP2300L 2033 a 2034 GP2300L 2034 a 2036 GP2300L 2035 10 2036 GP2300L 2036 10 2037 GP2300L 2037 o 2038 GP2300L 2038 72 2039 GP2300L 2039 a Ei 2001 11 02 111 201 pre 13 10 23 31316 zE re HE Coo a 16 sec pa 2 The Option dialog appears You can change the display contents or format of the data display area in various methods The following part describes the major operation method after the Option dialog appeared Line Setting character Setting Display Setting Graph Setting Line style Image Line None 4 Width Color C ener E Hi other EG OK Cancel I Apply 7 21 Setting a Line 1 Click the Line setting tab in the Option dialog 7 2 Device View 2 Items on the Line setting tab appear Designate each item in the Line Style field and then
143. 5 Playback Feature rasrasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnenennnnnnennnnnnnnnenannenennnnnnnnnennnnennnennenenen 7 26 7 2 6 Other Features 5 5 innoar apan araida aeoe naroon anaron anaana sp Onna Saroa o Sna paa Ainaa 7 28 TA JGP VIENE Ne 7 32 7 3 1 Starting GP Viewer rasrenenanrnnnnnnvnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnennnennene 7 32 7 3 2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition assesnvrennnnnnnvnnnnvnnnennnnennnnnnnnennnvnnnnvnnnvnnnennnnennneene 7 34 7 3 3 Editing Sampled Data rassvvnnnonernnnnnonnnnnvnnnnnornnnnnennennennnnnennnnnonsnnnnennnnnvennnnenennnnonnannvennnne 7 43 7 3 4 Setting Drawing ssrnannannnnenannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnenenennennnnnnennnnannnnnnnnenennnnenennenennnnenennene 7 46 7 3 5 Playback Feature rasrasnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnenenen 7 48 7 3 6 Other Features ssccielesicisscckcceesiectceceetbencedendestedncaenntedacsintetecestessscacsstesssuescedasceeseuddendetsas 7 50 7 4 Checking the Data Sampling Status rrnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennne 7 62 7 5 System Time B r osesoundteajeeevks i eine ceteicautiaaide nate nnmnnn nnan nann 7 64 Chapter 8 Maintenance via Ethernet 8 1 Transferring Network Project Files rranvrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnen 8 2 8 2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPS vnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnnnnnver 8 3 Chap
144. 6 PM Find Date E 2101 E 1 10 23 PM E F F 3 The display contents are updated and data are displayed showing one closest to the date entered in the middle 7 19 7 2 Device View Editing Data Source 1 Click the data source field that you wish to edit The column including the selected field is highlighted so that you can enter data from the keyboard in the selected field The pull down list may appear depending on the selected item I Data Edit EIE Data Source 1 2 3 Append 2030 2031 2032 GP2300L GP2300L GP2300L Delete 2030 2031 2032 0 000000 16 000000 v 16 BitiSigned 16 Bit Si Bit 16 Bit Bigned 2 2 16 BitUnsigned mpngdn 1 000000 16 Bit Hex nooooge 0 000000 16 Bit BCD o 100000 0 000000 32 Bit Signed 32 BittUnsigned 32 BilHEX 32 BIKBCD Float Double String Alarm Lower Limit 112101 1 10 23 PM 112 01 1 10 24 PM 112101 1 10 25 PM 112 01 1 10 26 PM 112101 1 10 27 PM 112 01 1 10 28 PM 112 01 1 10 29 PM 112 01 1 10 30 PM 112101 1 40 31 PM 112 01 1 10 32 PM 11201 1 10 33 PM 112 01 1 10 34 PM EI search EI Edit sle ele e a sje el gele e sje ele e e 4 2 Enter the new contents from the keyboard The co
145. Action is preformed 4 77 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 5 After setting Action Area Property click OK 6 Create another Action area referring to setup procedures 3 and 4 After setting the necessary Action area in the report prototype sheet the template appears as follows Line Mame Work Report Chocolate Pre Frocess Oper stor LOT ho Loiooo Recipe Low Temperature Chocolate T H H i H i HH i minute Result Produced Quantity Falure Quantity Unfinished Quantity Scheduled Quantity Produced Quantity Stating Time Endne Time UG Difference Failure Quantity F lure Rate Operation Time Hesa OOOO No 1002 52 Group Leader Checked By Edit Template m Action Area Display Settings Worksheet Name GROUP1 GROUPA GROUPA GROUP 0 Overwrite Type EG EG To Right D Overwrite Type 411 B13 To Right D Overwrite Type A1 B2 To Right 1 Historical Type B15 619 To Right Your template is now complete write Typ
146. Actions Example Access Table mdb file name Table name ProAlarm mdb ProAlarm Designate the WAV files Enter the message you wish to have appear when the Action Item is started p name C ID KEY L WAV DISP1 DISP2 C WINNT Media Ringin wav ProAlarm KEY 1 The sound is Ringin wav C WINNT Med i a Tada wav ProAlarm KEY 2 The sound is Tada wav The sample file ProAlarm mdb is available in the Pro Server with Pro Studio Pro SDk folder The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name Action Name 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Bit HEX Signed Unsigned BCD Signed Unsigned HEX Character BCD Precision Precision Alarm Log with Sound Alert Features O O O O O O O O O O x 4 20 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 1 If you select Alarm Log with Sound Alert Feature in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Version 4 10 Access Data Folder OK Sr T I ancel 3 Program Files 2 By Proface a Help H E Fro Server with Studio mdb Filename Log Data Save Table T Table
147. Book Folder Mame IC Program Files Pro facelPro Server with StuioINP Data File Name Report 96796 M9D xls Return to Detautt Settings o Start from Displayed State op Cancel HELP Template Designation Designate the sheet file created in the 4 4 3 Creating the Report Prototype section Designate the filename using the file s full path You can enter up to 217 single byte characters Also you cannot use comma for the template sheet name Click Reference and designate the file which becomes the report prototype from the Open dialog box Output Book Designate the folder where the Excel file written by the Action is saved and the filename used Designate the folder name using the full path You do not need to put at the end of the name Use no more than 74 single byte characters The total number of characters for the full path folder name plus filename should be 216 single byte characters or less If you use a macro the filename can be the node name device name or a time For node name or device name details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions Macro Sign Returned Data YY The current year Year in 4 digits M The current month 2 digits D The current date 2 digits h The current hour 2 digits m The current minute 2 digits S The current second 2 d
148. CC O Number of Log Data Items Key Field WAM Data Field Message Display Field Designate the table and field in the mdb file which have been created mdb Filename Displays the name of the current folder s Access database file mdb Select the file with the desired alarm conditions message s and sound wav information Ex ProAlarm mdb Table Displays the table s found in the Access database file designated above Any table names containing spaces will not be displayed Select the table with the desired alarm condition message s and sound wav information Ex ProAlarm Key Field Designate the key field After designating the table the field within the table will be displayed auto matically Ex KEY You must also set the number data type to the field within the table designated by the KEY field WAV Data Field Designate the sound field After designating the table the field within the table will be displayed automatically Ex WAV Message Display Field Select the field where you display a message After designating the table the field within the table will be displayed automatically Ex DISP1 DISP2 4 21 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Log Data Save Table If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents will display exactly as you designated If the folder does not exist the
149. Check Utilizes high speed data write and enter the cell where information for the write start location is saved in Write Position Save Cell If you click Reference you can designate Write Position Save Cell using the same operation as Write Data Range i e calling up the Excel sheet and designating the position with your mouse You cannot designate a cell designated by Write Data Range for the Write Position Save Cell Q Use all cells Use designated range Use Excel Bz H7 sheet tlizes high speed data write white Position Save Cell A Reference When you set up multiple Actions that use the Writes Data to Excel Book feature and then write to the same sheet using more than one Action be sure to designate a different cell for each Action s Write Position Save Cell If you use the same cell for every Action the write start location may shift Call up Excel display If you check Call up Excel display Excel will automatically start as soon as the trigger conditions are satisfied and you can refer to write data However Excel will quit exit after a preset interval once writing is finished Time Stamp If you check Attaches a Time Stamp in front of data the provided time will be written in the starting cell If you check Attaches a Time Stamp behind data the provided time will be written in the ending cell Time display format is fixed and written
150. Check Provider Information Search Active Node Save SRAM Backup Data Transfer Network Project Export Symbol Import C Package Symbol Check C Package Symbol Status Monitor Remote Logon Remote Logoff Device Backup Device Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway Syrballten Tue Address Date Type Polmg Tr 040 WORD Local D40 16 Bilsigned 1000 bai WORD Local D4 16 BilSigned 1000 Import symbol s from GP PRO PB3 or from Pro Studio exported file You can also right click the registered network node and click Import Symbol on the shortcut menu 2 The following dialog box will appear Select the file type to be imported Then click a desired file and then the Open button Open Look in E NFJDataB ase z k 3 The following dialog box will appear and the designated symbol will be imported File name Files of type Ewa Symbol file 25 Pro Studio D Error 0 symbols Registered 20 symbols Cancel p 3 10 3 2 2 Symbol Export The created symbols can be exported in a file format Ibe that can be used on GP PRO PBIII for 3 2 Registering Symbols Windows Also these symbols can be exported in a file format 2ws that ca
151. Confirm Operations available for each level are as follows Level Change settings Writing data Reading data Administrator O O O Read Write x O O Read only x x O Disconnect x x x Change Settings Provider information setting changes etc Writing data Data write via device monitor Reading data Data read via device monitor If you enter a password the following Login window will appear at the start of Pro Server Login ProS erver Password OK Cancel 3 56 3 9 Security Function 3 9 2 Remote Password Setup In order to prevent illegal accesses by a personal computer that has not been registered on the network a password can be registered for the entire network When remote access is attempted from a personal computer that has not been registered as a network node a dialog box will appear asking for the password After the registered password is correctly entered remote access can be performed Be sure to write down each registered password If a password is forgotten remote access cannot be performed 1 Select Network in the Configure S menu FileE Edit E Tools T Programming Suppor P DataVieulD Configurelsj View Help Das BE Pand EG UDP Port Number
152. Cs on the network at a predetermined times or event regardless of the brand of PLC used A Company s PLC B Company s PLC C Company s PLC U i 1 5 Provider Information Outline 1 5 3 Action Feature Overview When the designated trigger conditions are fulfilled an Action feature allows an application in a remote PC on the network to be activated Also the program triggered by the Action feature is called the Action Contents Action Features Automatic Upload of Access Data requires Microsoft Access Automatic Download of Access Data requires Microsoft Access Writes Data to Excel Book requires Microsoft Excel Download of Excel Recipe requires Microsoft Excel Upload of GP Log Data Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data Automatic Download of GP Filing Data Writes Data to E Mail Alarm Log with Sound Alert Feature requires Microsoft Access Data Upload to Database requires Microsoft Access Excel Data Download from Database requires Microsoft Access Excel Start Application Upload of GP JPEG Data Writes Data to CSV File Writes Data from CSV File Create Report using Excel Action Feature Overview Automatically creates daily and monthly reports via Creates Operation Starts a desired Alarm Histories via
153. D IDC_BUTTON y rect Height cyIcon 1 2 2 s2 Draw the icon dco DrawIcontx y wihIcon CDialog OnPaint I 7 The system calls this to obtain the cursor to display while the user drags the minimized window CURSOR CSampleDlg OnQueryDragIcont HCURSOR n hIcon CSanpleDlg OnButtonlf I eadDevicelo GP2 _DO0040_ WORD Enter value Receive buffer here 1 SampleDlg cpp OX 9 68 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 26 Declare the area to store read data You should designate three or more area elements if the number of read data is three SampleDIg cpp 4 Draw the icon dc Drawlcon x y m_hIcon CDialog OnPaint 1 vf the mininized window CURSOR CSampleDlg OnQueryDragIcont t HCURSOR m hIcon CSampleDlg OnButtonlt NORD wDatel 21 F 4 y rect Height cylcon 1 7 2 ve The systen calls this to obtain the cursor to display while the user drags ReadDewicel6 GP2 _DO0040_ WORD Enter value Receive buffer here 1 Ao 27 Designate the header area to store read data wData 0 and 3 as the number of read data You should also add a semicolon at the end of the read function SampleDlg cpp LECI 74 Draw the icon do Drawlcon x y m_hIcon CDialog OnPaint i vf the mininized window CURSOR CSan
154. D LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI WriteDevice VariantD LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 7 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Single Handle Write with Cache Refresh Function Bit data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBit LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice16 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice32 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD32 LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloat LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDouble LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceStr LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use data INT WINAPI WriteDevice LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName
155. DE Shing Copy Type Address Data Type Polling T Local D00040 16 BiiSigned 1000 Local D0004 16 BilSigned 1000 Local D00042 16 BitfSigned 1000 E Copy the write command sentence for Visual C by data type to clipboard or J 9 74 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 42 The write function will be copied into the Clipboard Message wiriteDevicet6rGP2 D00040 WORD EntervaluecTransmitting buffer here 13 This string was copied to the clip board Please paste and use in your application 43 Double click Button1 pasted on Dialog of the Microsoft Visual C menu Sample Microsoft Yisual C Sample rc IDD SAMPLE DIALOG Dialog File Edt View Insert Project Build Layout Tools Window Help Hiei Sl as k ela 2 B rsa El E z DEBUTON fF EN_CLICKED Ria e aa E 02 Sample Workspace Sample 1 project B Sample files B Source Files i Sample opp Sampler Ti SampleDig cop i Std f opp E Header Files E Resource Files E ReadMe tst Buttont uji IF aGs H esel er 3l aa be fr all th sa Ready 44 Click OK Add Member Funct
156. Del Select All Ctrl mI ind Ctrl F Find Next F Modu Replace Ctrl H General Declarations IF Option Explicit FroEasv TXT Pro Server API Declarations for Visi ProEasy DLL Version 1 0 Version 1 1 Version 1 5 Version 2 0 Version 3 0 Copyright Cc 1998 2001 Digital Electron Complying with Fro Sery Complying with the The version of the Pro Complying with Group It The version of the Pro SRAM backup data orite It is changed from the The version of the Pro Gp Veb Version 1 0 3 38 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function VBA Write Function 7 Click the desired symbol name QA PS Pro Studio FilelE EditE Tools T Programming upporilP DatdviemD Configure View HelplH Local D40 TE BiSned 1000 Local Da 16 BilSigned 1000 APS F Network Entry Node i e WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer Or MELSEC_QNA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qnd CPU Le WINDOWS 95 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer igm Provider Information LGB Action List Symbolfltem D Ne Help is F1 key NUM 8 Select Programming Support P s VBA Write function from the Menu Bar Fief EdE Tools T Programming Suppon F
157. E Network Entry Node I WINDOWS_NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer Ba MELSEC ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn CPU Eh WINDOWS 95 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer MT GP 230001 10100 0100 MEMORY LINK SIU Type fE Provider Information If you are currently editing a network project file the file must be saved before it can be sent to a GP 2 Click Transfer Network Project in the Tools T menu SLA PS Pro Studio EIER FilE Edt Tools T Programming Supper DataviemiD Configure S Viem Help H Eg Check Provider Information Search Active Node Fe APS Symbolftem Type Address W Data Type Polling Tr l Computer a EL EC QnA CPU CB wig Export Symbol meter as Import C Package Symbol a ial cpm Check C Package Symbol a Status Monitor r Action LI Darbs Remote Logon Remote Logott Device Backup Device Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway 3 The Transfer Network Project File window appears and then the transfer of the network project file begins Transfer Network Project File GP2 160 187 2 44 OMRON SYSMAC C SERIES LETT TTT TTT Time Coun 0 Sec Cancel You can transfer the file to multiple GPs at the same time by selecting Network Entry Nod
158. F2h The No of points setting is invalid 9459 24F3h The No of points setting is 0 or exceeds the setting range 9460 24F4h_ Cannot convert the set symbol into a device address 9461 24F5h A value input error occurred Enter a correct value 9462 24F6h The specified lifetime is invalid 9463 24F7h The designated bit location is incorrect 9464 24F8h 4 Reserved 9469 24FDh 9470 24FEh Unable to connect to designated Node 9471 24FFh Node is a Windows PC Unable to perform processing 9472 2500h Failed to save captured screen data as JPEG file 9473 2501h Screen Capture is not supported 9474 2502h Capture Approval Flag is not ON 9475 2503h Failed to aquire CF Card free space data 9476 2504h Data Transfer is not supported 9477 2505h ProNet dll has not been installed properly 9478 2506h Unable to perform due to the 2 Way Driver s version not being 4 50 or higher 9479 2507h Reserved 9480 2508h Failed to delete CF Card s file 9481 2509h Failed to change CF Card s internal file 9482 250Ah File exceeds 256 characters reduce number of characters 9483 250Bh Reserved 9499 251Bh 9500 251Ch Pro Server schedule management thread initialization error 9501 251Dh Pro Server LAN management thread initialization error 9502 251Eh Pro Server timer management thread initialization error 9503 251Fh_ Pro Server DDE control thread initialization error 9504 2520h Pro Server API control thread initialization error 9505 25
159. File Edit View Project Format Debug kun Query Diagram Tools Add Ins Window Help js 6 Ble als aa Start with Full Compile Ctrl Gener al II Break Chrl Break o End a Restart Shifk4 Ei Botte Rail Rani 9 52 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 21 Click Command1 to display three data form the symbol _D40_WORD in the ListBox Form Gioi 1111 2222 3333 Command 9 53 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function Creating Write Application 22 This section describes the application to write three data 16 bits signed read when clicking Command Conmand Writes three data 23 Select TextBox and then paste in Form1 Paste three TextBox s Project Form Form 5 Formi E E TextBox E m jme Of 9 54 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 24 Select CommandButton and then paste to Form1 Project Form Form mim E gi ia Form el es CommanaButton 25 Select the symbol name that you wish to write to among symbols registered on Pro Studio Select the heading symbol to write to A ms m Eg FilfE FdE Toos Programming Supporte DataVViaw D Confpuelg Views Hep E Piojecta Symbolltem ope faste se roma fF Network Enti Node Local D00040
160. File size BYTE bFileTimeStamp 8 1 File time stamp ends with 0 BYTE bDummy2 3 Dummy2 lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table 9 21 lt Supplement gt 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function As supplement of bFileTimeStamp time and date are shown as hexadecimal character strings where upper Abytes out of 8 bytes indicate time in MS DOS and remaining lower 4 bytes indicate date also in MS DOS The format of date and time in MS DOS is as the following Example In the case of 20C42C22 2C22 expressed as hexadecimal corresponds to date in MS DOS and 20C4 also expressed as hexadecimal corresponds to time in MS DOS so that 20C42C22 indicates 2002 1 2 4 6 8 Designates date in MS DOS This date is packed as one 16 bits value according to the following format Bit Contents 0 4 Day 1 31 5 8 Month 1 January 2 February 12 December Year However it is expressed as past years since 1980 9 15 The actual year can be obtained by adding 1980 on the value shown by these bits Designates time in MS DOS This time is packed as one 16 bits value according to the following format Bit Contents 0 4 Value that seconds are divided by 2 0 29 5 10 Minute 0 59 11 15 Hour 0 23 using 24 hours expression 9 22 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function CF Card File List R
161. Funn button The data Sample amp Save is executed according to the data sampling condition and the contents are displayed on Device View The display contents are updated according to the data change When you start the device data sampling various buttons for viewing sampled data are appended on Device View Refer to 7 2 5 Playback Feature for the viewing method of sampled device data Reference gt 7 2 5 Playback Feature 7 16 7 2 Device View When gathering data clicking the r icon or selecting the File Show Hide Time Bar menu item allows you to set the Time Bar as Show or Hide The System Time Bar is not displayed when Device View starts up It is displayed however after Sampling operation is performed Show Hide status data is contained in the DV file File E Option DataEdit Sampling HETTE ltem name Node name Device name Valu 2030 GP2300L 2030 a 2031 GP2300L 2031 a 2032 GP2300L 2032 16 2033 GP2300L 2033 o 2034 GP2300L 2034 o 2035 GP2300L 2035 105 2036 GP2300L 2036 10 2037 GP2300L 2037 a 2038 GP2300L 2038 Ta 2039 GP2300L 2039 a 2001111702 ar 201 2001 11 02 13 10 23 131316 13 BE ma 7 17 7 2 3 Editing Sampled Data This feature allows you to edit saved device data 1 Click Data Edit of Device Vie
162. GP577R SC41 24VP GP 577RT GP 577RS GP 577Rseries GP 2300L GP 2400ser GP 2400T GP 2500T oP GP 2500L P 25005 GP 25015 L L L GP 2600T GLC2300L LC2400series GLC2400T T2400 TypeA IT2400series IT2400 TypeB ann Gateway S S es S es P 2601series GP 2601T ies ies ies 2300serie ie 2500seri 2501serie 2600seri ie 2300ser 2500ser 2600ser GP577R TC11 Q GP377R TC11 24V GP377R TC41 24V GP477R EG11 P577R TC41 24VP P2300 TC41 24V P2400 TC41 24V P2500 TC11 P2500 TC41 24V P2500 LG41 24V P2501 TC1 P2600 TC11 P2600 TC41 24V P2601 TC11 LC2300 LG41 LC2300 TC41 24V LC2500 TC41 200V LC2600 TC41 24V GLC2600 TC41 200V O O Q X Q Q 24V i Q T2400 TC41 GP T2400 TC41 GP200V T2400 TC41 GLC T2400 TC41 GLC200V GW SE41 24V m GP Ethernet I F Unit or the Multi Unit E is required 2 GP Ethernet I F Unit or the Multi Unit E can be attached J w EJES ole oe External Ethernet The Expansion Ethernet unit is required to use the 2 Way Driver with a GP77R series GP 2501 series or GP 2601 series unit Therefore protocol for the expansion units cannot be used You cannot use both the 2 Way Driver and the Ethernet protocol together with a GP77R series GP 2501 series or GP 2601 series unit Reference gt Pro Server compatible PLC Vendors and Models Settings used will differ IP Addresses Port No etc depending on the type
163. I2 VT 14 VT_U12 VT_U14 and VT_R8 are converted to VT_R4 VT 14 4 bytes signed integer VT 2 2 bytes signed integer VT Ul2 2 bytes unsigned integer VT Ul4 4 bytes unsigned integer VT R4 4 bytes real VT R8 8 bytes real VT BSTR character string VT BOOL BOOL 10 4 10 1 OPC Server Interface Interfaces that this software s OPC server supports are as follows Object Interface Method Remaek AddGroup GetErrorString GetGroupByName GetStatus RemoveGroup CreateGroupEnumerator IOPCServerPublicGroups GetPublicGroupByName Optional RemovePublicGroup QueryOrganization ChangeBrowsePosition BrowseOPCitemIDs GetltemID BrowseAccessPaths IsDirty Load Save SaveComplated GetCurFile QueryAvailableltemProperties IOPCItemProperties GetltemProperties LookupltemID GetState SetState SetName CloneGroup IOPCPublicGroupsStateMgt GetState Optional MoveToPublic Read IOPCSyncIO Write Read IOPCAsynclO Write Optional Refresh Cancel Read Write Refresh IOPCAsynclO2 Cancel OPCGroup SetEnable GetEnable Addltems Validateltems Removeltems IOPCltemMgt SetActiveState SetClientHandles SetDatatypes CreateEnumerator IDataObject Dadvise Optional Dunadvise EnumConnectionPoints FindConnectionPoints GetConnectionInterface GetConnectionPointContainer IConnectionPoint Advise Unadvise EnumConnections Next Skip Reset Clone Next Skip Reset Clone Next Skip Reset Clone Q B IOPC
164. Information Build Events Custom Build step Be web References _ aT Additional Dependencies Specifies additional items to add to the link line ex kernel32 lib configuration specific DK Cancel Apply Help 7 You should install the header file ProEasy h to use read write functions provided by Pro Server Click the FileView tab in the Microsoft Visual C Workspace window and then double click the SampleDig cpp file In this example read write functions are used in the SampleDig cpp file A Fie Edt View Insert Project Build Tools window Help BRCO Bre H me Elres members Fj cCaboudig Eja NE EG SampleDlg cpp implementation file ve B E Sample files include stdaiz h include Sample h A Source Fil P en include SampleDlg h i 2 Sample re ifdef DEBUG ib HSanpeDig pp define new DEDUG NEV Staats opp Hundet THIS FILE i static char THIS FILE FIIE E E Header Files Hede POLLED LL ELELELEELEEL LTE ELL EE EL EEL EEL ELLE EEELELEELELEEL ELLE ELE LEELEEEEEELE r CaboutDlg dialog used for App About class CAbcutDlg public CDialog public CAboutDla 77 Dialog Data 7 MFE_DATA Cabout Dlg enum IDD IDD ABOUTBOK 47 JAFE DATA 77 ClassWizerd generated virtual function overrides
165. K Cancel Apply 3 The device data that you wish to append are displayed in the Data Edit dialog Deleting Sampled Data 1 Select the data that you wish to delete in the Data Edit dialog 2 Click Delete The selected data will be deleted Searching Sampled Data 1 Click Search in the Data Edit dialog 2 The Search dialog appears Enter the date that you wish to search and then click OK Search The First Record 112 01 11 13 42 AM The Last Record 1112 01 11 20 12 AM i Find Date 20 11 13 42 AM E OK Cancel 3 The display contents are updated and data are displayed showing one closest to the date entered in the middle 7 44 7 3 GP Viewer Editing Data Source 1 Click the data source field that you wish to edit The column including the selected field is highlighted so that you can enter data from the keyboard in the selected field The pull down list may appear depending on the selected item I Data Edit Mi Data Source 22 1 2 3 Append ltem name 0000 0100 0200 Node name GP2300L GP2300L GP2300L Delete Device name 0000 0100 0200 e Item Status Bit Error Code 16 Bit Signed g 2 am Lnr 16 BitUnsigned 16 Bite 16 Bit BCD 32 BitSigned Tait 11134 AM 22 BitUnsigned 16 BiSigned 16 BitSigned i TUUDI 11 19 47 AM 2 PUHE TUAN 1
166. Max 8 3 format string dekk lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table CF Card File Write Function Type Designation INT WINAPI EasyFileWriteCard LPCSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR pReadFileName LPCTSTR pWriteFileType WORD wWriteFileNo lt Function gt Writes the designated file to CF Card Write file can only be files designated in pWriteFileType An error occurs because GP77R Series does not support this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP to be written to pReadFileName Filename of a write source to CF Card full path pWriteFileType Type of file to be written to CF Card Refer to the supplement of the CF Card file read function wWriteFileNo No of a file to be written to CF Card lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table 9 26 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function CF Card File Delete Function Arbitrary File Designation INT WINAPI EasyFileDeleteInCfCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR sFolderName LPCTSTR sFileName lt Function gt Deletes the designated file on the CF Card Delete file can be arbitrarily freely designated An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP containing the data to be deleted sFo
167. OWS_NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer HdvoLogicTime Local GLC H a MELSEC_ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn amp CPU RAvgScanTime Local GLCHZ A nj HCommand Local GLCH3 Z Provider Information Da EN EE HEdtCount Local GLCHS BP Action List FaultCode Local GLC E HFaulRung Local BLCH7 ForceCount Local GLCH HOStausf Local GLCHI HOStaus l Local GLC TO HOStaus d Local BLOK HOStaus I Local GLC H2 HOStaustd Local GLCH3 HOStausf Local GLCHTA HIOStauslE Local GLCHT5 HOStaus 7 Local GLCHB HOStausg Local GLCH7 HOStaus 9 Local GLCH8 Hladderdontor Local GLCH9 LogicTime Local GLCH20 Month Local GLCHZT HPercent lloc Local GLCH22 HPercentMemC Local GLCHZ23 HFlatform Local GLCH24 HiRungNo Local GLCH25 HscanCount Local GLCH26 H5canTime Local GLCH27 d Help is F1 key RUM Select Tool T Check C Package Symbol from the menu bar FilelE EditE Check Provider Information Search Active Node Ba APS Save SRAM Backup Data EE Network Transfer Network Project Import Symbol Ba MEL Export Symbol ane import C Package Symbol Cheek CP Action acai a Status Monitor Dente enter Remote Logon Remote Logoff Device Backup Device Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway
168. PRO PBIII for Windows Tag Reference Manual You can assign alarm data active to the alarm block By default you can take it into Pro Server by designating Alarm Block1 Reference 3 6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM Simultaneous upload of multiple types of data from a single GP is not possible You cannot use this feature on Factory Gateway 1 5 Provider Information Outline 1 5 Provider Information Outline 1 5 1 Providing Information to the Host When a designated trigger s condition s set by Pro Studio is are satisfied PLC data is collected by the GP s resident 2 Way Driver and provided to the host PC Therefore since Pro Server can temporarily store this data in the PC s memory overall network traffic can be reduced For the procedure to register symbols in Pro Server s PC memory area refer to 3 2 Registering Symbols Reference gt 3 2 Registering Symbols Reference LS area in Pro Server Appl i m GP Trigger GP Trigger GP Trigger PLC for Manufacture A PLC for Manufacture A PLC for Manufacture A 1 5 Provider Information Outline 1 5 2 Providing Information between GPs Even if your system lacks a host PC or Pro Server you can transfer the provider information setting file setup in Pro Studio to each GP This then allows device data to be exchanged via the GP between PL
169. Previous and the Next buttons are displayed in the left and the right sides under the data display area respectively You can switch pages using these buttons Setting the Graph Color 1 Click Graph Setting tab in the Option dialog 2 Items in the Graph Setting tab appear Designate each item and then click OK Line Setting Character Setting Display Setting Graph Setting Normal color TN Le parning color _ EE r Other OK I Cancel Apply Normal color Select the normal graph color among 16 colors If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those click the Other button The Color Setup dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use Warning color Select the warning graph color among 16 colors If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those click the Other button The Edit Color dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use 7 25 7 2 5 Playback Feature This feature allows you to playback sampled device data on Device View 1 Select Open Data View Q on Data View D of the menu bar
170. Pro Server to read write PLC data via a GP The function API for this is provided in the form of a DLL Simple DLL Connection User appl ication DLL API Pro Server GP PLC V In environments where data transfer errors can frequently occur be sure your applications include a data transfer retry feature 1 4 Application Interfaces 1 4 3 OPC Interface Function Installing a Pro Server OPC server allows you to use applications that have an OPC client function such as Intellution s iFIX as well as others The OPC interface function can only be used on a Windows NT Windows 2000 or Windows XP system However the security level of Windows 2000 must be set to the same as that used by Windows XP For setting information see Appendix 6 Changing Windows XP Security Levels OPC Interface Design OPC client appl ication CO OPC Pro Pro Server GP 1 4 Application Interfaces 1 4 4 SRAM Backup Data Storage Function The backup data in the SRAM of each GP can be easily transferred to the host PC This SRAM backup function is available for logging data trend data sampling data alarm data log history and others SRAM Backup Function T For details about the types of data you can transfer to the host PC refer to the GP PRO PBIII for Windows Alarm N data Logging data Tag Reference Manual Reference GP
171. Pro face Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Operation Manual Copyright 2004 Digital Electronics Corporation All right reserved Made in Japan PREFACE Thank you for purchasing Digital s Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows for use with Digital s GP series touch panels To ensure correct use of this product be sure to carefully read the manuals included and keep them nearby so that you can refer to them whenever required NOTE 1 The copyrights to all programs and manuals included in the Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows hereinafter referred to as this product are reserved by the Digital Electronics Corporation Digital grants the use of this product to its users as described in the Software Operating and License Conditions section Any actions violating the above mentioned condi tions are prohibited by both Japanese and foreign regulations 2 The contents of this manual have been thoroughly checked However if you should find any errors or omissions in this manual please contact your local representative and inform them of your findings 3 Please be aware that Digital Electronics Corporation shall not be held liable by the user for any damages losses or third party claims arising from the uses of this product 4 Differences may occur between the descriptions found in this manual and the actual functioning of this product The latest information about this product is provid
172. SUBISHI MELSEC AnA LINK MITSUBISHI MELSEC AnA CPU MITSUBISHI MELSEC A JPCN1 MITSUBISHI MELSEC A ETHER MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX CPU MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX CPU2 MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX2 LINK MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX 1 N Comm MITSUBISHI MELSEC QnA LINK MITSUBISHI MELSEC QnA CPU MITSUBISHI MELSEC Q ETHER MITSUBISHI MELSECNET 10 MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES CC Link Type OMRON SYSMAC C SERIES O O O 0 O 0 CO 0 0 0 0 0 CO 0 oo OMRON SYSMAC C 1 n Comm OMRON SYSMAC CV SERIES l O O O x O x O O O O O O O O gt lt O O O ojo OMRON SYSMAC CS1 SERIES OMRON SYSMAC CS1 ETHER O O O O x O x O O O O O CO 0 O x CO CO CO O OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES SHARP NewSatellite JW Series Yokogawa Electric Corp Fuji Electric Co Ltd YOKOGAWA FACTORY ACE 1 1 Comm YOKOGAWA FACTORY ACE 1 n Comm YOKOGAWA FA M3 ETHER FUJI MICREX F SERIES FUJI MICREX F SERIES FLT FUJI MICREX F SERIES T LINK FUJI FLEXPC LINK FUJI FLEXPC CPU FUJI INVERTER FUJI TEMPERATURE PXR Toyota Machine Warks Ltd TOYOTA TOYOPUC PC2 SERIES TOYOTA TOYOPUC PC2 1 n Comm TOYOTA TOYOPUC PC3J SERIES TOYOTA TOYOPUC PC3J 1 n Comm O O O Yaskawa Electric Corp YASUKAWA Memocon SC SERIES YASUKAWA GL120 130 SERIES YASUKAWA MP2000 920 ETHER YASUKAWA PROGIC8 SERIES YASUKAWA MP900 CP9200SH SERIES YASUKAWA INVERTER Hitac
173. Server Supports only Flat Always returns an error due to supporting only Flat Supports only Flat IOPCBrowsServerAddressSpace OPCServer Optional IPersistFi Optional o IOPCGroupStateMgt IConnectionPointContainer IEnumOPCltemAttributes IEnumOPClItemAttributes lEnumString lEnumString IEnumUnknown IEnumUnknown OJOJOJOJOJOJOJO JOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJOJOJO O X X JO JOJO JOJO O O JX X X X X X X JOJOJO XX OJOJO OJOJO O Supported X Not supported 10 5 10 2 Connecting from an OPC Client 10 2 Connecting from an OPC Client Server Items Use the OPC Client program s Server designation to designate the OPC server s unique program ID as the program ID When using the OPC server for Pro Server enter digital opcpro 1 Next designate the server type If an In Process server is used enter in process if a Local server is used enter local and if a Remote server isused enter remote If remote is entered as the server type enter the PC name or IP address ft Akk sekk of the computer used for the OPC server Group Items In the OPC Client program s group section the OPC server s group object designation is performed
174. Simple DLL Termination INT WINAPI EasyTerm lt Function gt Releases resource that Simple DLL holds lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code Refer to the attached table For details refer to Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi Thread Applications Even if you execute EasyTime Pro Sever does not exit The Simple DLL function which exits Pro Server is not supported Message Processing Suppression Single INT EasySetWaitType DWORD dwMode Multi INT EasySetWaitTypeM HANDEL hProServerHandle DWORD dwMode lt Function gt If it takes time to process most of Simple DLL functions process Windows messages within those functions however you can designate if you wish to suppress this Windows message processing If you suppress it Windows messages are left in the message queue and will not be processed while executing functions As its result you can avoid unexpected accident such as the double function call due to clicking icons while executing functions However in this case because all Windows message processing are suppressed in addition to that of the Icon is clicked message be careful that important message processing will not be preformed either such as redrawing of the timer or windows You can designate it per every Pro Server handle if you suppress processing The default is to execute processing lt Return value gt Executed successfully
175. Studio system information The following description assumes the program s main window is open 1 Select System in the Configure S menu GA PS Pro Studio FilefF EdiE Tools T Programming Suppo Data iewlD Configure Viewty Helplt Gj El Se Password lE BS a E UDP Port Number Network 8 10 2015 8000 El Network Enty Node E WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Ci GP View l MELSEC_ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC URAICFUT B WINDOWS_95 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer M GPZ300L1 10 100 0 100 MEMORY LINK SIO Type i Provider Information ig Action List Setup system configuration 3 59 3 10 Configuring the System 2 The System Configuration window will appear Enter all necessary data and click OK Pro Gludia Folder DDE Polling Time CAP rogram Filesi EmA 1000 ms GP PROIPBS for Windows Folder glans Moria Sling tine CAP rogram Files Pro face Pro Server with Studioi C a ms Network Project File Auto Load _ _ _ Auto Log on DJ Auto Load Metone Projest File Mame Ds Legen C aeaiia bad Q Feadhhiis Made DDE Pop Up Message Display Message O Rea
176. Windows XP Security Level El eee ee 3 Select Network access Sharing and security model for local accounts from the Local Security Policy menu Security Settings A Security sett pE Account Policies interactive logon Message title for users attempting ta log on Not defined Password Policy f amp s Interactive logon Number of previous logons to cache in case domain contro 101ogans Accont Lockout Policy Interactive logon Prompt user to change password before expiration 14 days bce Policies R nteractive logon Require Domain Controller authentication to unlock worksta Disabled AER Interactive logon Smart card removal behavior No Action Microsoft network client Digitally sign communications always Disabled Microsoft network client Digitally sign communications if server agrees Enabled a Software Restriction Police Microsoft network client Send unencrypted password to third party SMB serv Disabled 1P Security Policies on Loca R8 microsoft network server Amount of idle time required before suspending ses 15 minutes Microsoft network server Digitally sign communications always Disabled licrosoft network server Digitally sign communications if client agrees Disa
177. Year in 4 digits M The current month 2 digits D The current date 2 digits h The current hour 2 digits m The current minute 2 digits S The current second 2 digits n Number of sheets created within the book 1 For example if you wish to create one sheet per day with date attached in the output book set the sheet name of the template book as M month D day If the sheet is created in the output book on October 31st the sheet name will be 10 month 31 day 4 92 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Even if you designate other characters than those in the table in the previous page right after it will not be recognized as the macro sign and will be ignored If you designate the sheet name in the Copy Sheet Template Sheet Name or HPrint Sheet Template Sheet Name command you should designate the sheet name of the template book in the original way macro sign before replacement Action Report Sheet When creating the output book this Action automatically adds the sheet with the name of Action Report in the output book In this Action Report sheet the latest record about what kind of data this Action has output to the output book is always written You can refer to it when checking for example the progress state of the process Also when the output book was once closed and then opened again this Action
178. You can use this function only on GP 2000 series GLC2000 series IT series Prior to performing this function with the CF Card inserted into the GP because the read data is tempo rarily saved in the CF Card 1 Click Save GP Capture Data on the Tools T menu of the Menu Bar SA PS Pro Studio OE File E EditlE Tools T Programming Support Dataview D Configuels View HelplH ETC APS Check Provider Information Search Active Node Save SRAM Backup Data Symbolfltem Type f Address Data Type Polling Ti E Network trapoter Network Project l WORD Local DAD T5 Emsigned 1000 vw a en bl DM WORD Local DA 16 BitlSigned 1000 Dr Esport Symbol H SN Import C Package Symbol gle Action Li Check C Fackage Symbol Status Monitor Derbe blander Remote Logon Remote Logoff Device Backup Device Restore GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway Save GP screen capture data 3 53 3 8 GP Capture Data Saving Function 2 The Screen Capture amp Save window appears After selecting all items click Save Screen Capture amp Save Node Name GP2300L1 F Folder Name C Program Files Pro face Pro ser ile Name ENODENYMD h som enoDesvamensnomf Deta oeu O Show Brawse Cancel HelpiH
179. a Node Name Select the node name If unselected the error dialog will appear Folder Name Enter the folder name to save data This defaults to the NPJDataBase folder in the current directory of Pro Server If not entered the error dialog will appear File Name Enter the file name This defaults to NODE Y M D h m s node name year month day hour minute Show Browser Select if you wish to display it on your browser after uploading the GP screen If you check ON the box it will be displayed on your browser This defaults to unchecked OFF When you execute Save GP Capture Data drawings and operations on the GP screen will stop for a few seconds Therefore you cannot normally execute the GP screen capturing operation from upper level PCs You should set the bit 0 of GP s LS2076 to ON 1 to capture GP screens from upper level PCs During capturing the LS2077 bit is set to ON on GP After finishing carpturing it will be automati cally set to OFF 3 54 3 9 Security Function 3 9 Security Function 3 9 1 Pro Server has a security function to protect PLC and GP data The following items are included in this function e Passwords to set up user levels User level password Password to protect accesses from unregistered personal computers Remote password User Level Password Settings Pro Server can restrict the range
180. a You can designate more than one read source for one table 4 36 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Data3 table MADE TYPE DATA NUMBER 1 Data2 table pe ee Bess See muuneR Datal tab G z NODE SYMBOL TYPE DATA NUMBER Pata table GP 100 21123 3 NODE Designates the read data source node SYMBOL Designates the head first address of the symbol device address to be read TYPE Designates the type of data to be read DATA Designates where the read data is written to NUMBER Designates the amount of sequential data to be read starting from the symbol device address designated by SYMBOL As shown above starting at GP unit internal address 100 data from 3 devices is read as signed 16 bit decimal data If more than one sequential data item is written each data item should be separated with a space comma in the Data field The following table shows the different data types and their corresponding codes Value DataType Value DataType 1 Bit 7 Unsigned 32 bits decimal 2 Signed 16 bits decimal 8 32 bits hexadecimal 3 Unsigned 16 bits decimal 9 BCD 32 bits 4 16 bits hexadecimal 10 Single precision floating point 5 BCD 16 bits 11 Double precision floating point 6 Signed 32 bits decimal 12 Character string The following table shows the data types that can be design
181. a display data form Yes G Ta specifying data absolute relative Yes display mode Yes display a data form when absolute is selected BIN BCD Yes input range when relative is selected Yes chart type bar chart pie chart half pie chart Yes fill patterns for a bar chart Yes chart fill patterns except for a bar chart No indicating a starting point of a meter type pie or half pie chart Yes specifying a display color Yes specifying a background color No blinking a background color No displaying alarm Yes specifying alarm background color No blinking alarm background color No specifying display rotation Yes 7 58 7 3 GP Viewer K Tag specifying a data absolute relative character string Yes specifying a word address Yes specifying a starting bit address No specifying a display address indirect No specifying a sign Yes rounding off numbers Yes specifying display write data form Yes bit length when relative is selected Yes input sign when relative is selected Yes input range when relative is selected Yes display range when relative is selected Yes the number of characters to be displayed when character string is TR selected character size Yes the number of digits to be displayed Yes the number of decimals direct indirect Yes specifying display style Yes automatic clear No checking the number of digits to be inp
182. a from a Provider s SRAM area CF Card or FEPROM The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name paren 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charact ction Name Bit Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision gt eee Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data 9 a 2 9 9 9 9 2 9 9 1 If you select Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Read from Version 4 12 2 Read filing data from GP Backup SRAM t Read filing data from CF Card ok GP Read filing data from GP FEPROM Save Folder Cancel E CREE a Program Files g Proface 3 Pro Server with Studio Sal NpiDatabase Help H ill I ile s Save format Save Name Excel file ls AY AMAD ehamets Binary file bin CSW file csv LEG Zero Supress Reset Read from Designates the read data source file SRAM CF Card FEPROM If you designate the CF Card FEPROM as the data read source you must designate the file No to be uploaded when entering Provider information settings since more than one file exists in the CF Card FEPROM 4 29 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Sav
183. a new file name Save As Save in rad F Eass F aBase mtam j Sample File name kz _ Le Save as type Network Project File npi Cancel p 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software 2 2 2 Exiting Pro Studio The following describes the procedure for exiting Pro Studio 1 Click Exit Pro Studio X in the File F menu ed Pro Studio E Fle EI EdtE Tool T Programming Support DatsVie D Configure S View Help New ToleN 7 Open Cubo Savels Dubs Project ID UDP Fort Number Save adlAl 200171170213 8000 hile TP Amtom Save Network Project File and Exit Pro Studio e If you change the settings of a currently open project and then attempt to close it you will be asked whether or not to save the new settings Clicking Yes saves the settings by overwriting the existing contents and then exits Pro Studio Clicking No exits Pro Studio without saving the changes e Exiting Pro Server automatically closes Pro Studio To be sure to terminate all communication be sure to exit Pro Server 2 10 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software 2 2 3 Starting and Exiting Pro Server The following explanation assumes that the Windows desktop is already displayed Starting Pro Server 1 Cl
184. acall nEdie f wDatal2 a Edit3 luritebevicele 682 DADLAU NORD wData 3 gt r 168 Co 5 REC CCUD AIBEAD Z 49 Click Execute Smaple exe on Build of the Microsoft Visual C menu ils Sempledlgepn Cih F7 E Build Sample exe F it is enuiar La Je we Batch Build Clean a E Sample files Sean Debug rts to obtain the cursor to display whik AA Source Fies Debug Remols Connection laeryDragleent hTeom Set Active Confiauation A Header Fies Cordiaualiur G E Resource Fles Profle inal ende t only g UodeteDate vData 0 m Edit1 gaDatal1 n Edit e vDatal2 a Edited J uritepericer6 G22 gt D00040 WORD wData 3 Executes the program Lr 88 CoS JJeedCoJp reea 50 Click Yes Microsoft Visual C cAPROGAAM FILES YPRD FALEYPRO SERVER WITH STUDIDVPRO SDKAVENS ampleiDebugisample exe This file does not exist Do you want to build it 9 77 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 51 After entering three write data to EditBox s click Button1 to execute writing three data from the symbol D40 WORD fre Sample Ts 1111 2222 La Butter 3333 9 78 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 9 2 3 Using simple DLL functions with Visual Basic NET Visual Basic NET diff
185. agram Tools Add Ins Wir qa oe Eg Add Form er Genera Fa Class Module A add User Control A By 1 Add Property Page Fy adhe borumene Add DHTML Page Add Data Report Add WebClass Add Microsoft UsarConnection Ha Hoe Bea am He More Activex Designers Add Fie Grl D aE Remove Form p ES References Components CtrleT l 2 Project Propgrtias 9 46 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 6 Select Standard Module on the New tab and then click Open Add Module 3 F Don t show this dialog in the future 7 Click Paste on Edit of the Microsoft Visual Basic menu to paste the declaration the con tents in the Clipboard to the added standard module ey Project Microsoft Yisual Basic design Ete ede Viem Project Format Debug Bun Query D Delete Del Delete Table fiemDatabase Select All CirlH A Seleck AIC alumns Table r Ph End Corer Find Mest F3 Replace Ctr H Haea Tab Shift Tab Insert File ca List Properties Metbods Ctr Ek List Constants CtrhHShift J es Quick Info Chri a Parameter Info Ckrl 5hift 1 At Complete Word CirH Space Go To Row Bookmarks 9 47 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 8 The declaration will be pasted This completes function read write functions de
186. al Computer PC AT compatible Pentium 133MHz or faster processor Display VGA 640 x 480 or higher 64 bit color or higher Hard Disk Space Requirements 20 MB or more 30 MB or more is recommended Memory Requirements 32 MB or more 128 MB or more is recommended CD ROM Drive Windows compatible OS Requirements 1 Windows 98 English or Japanese 2 Windows Me English or Japanese 2 Windows NT 4 0 English or Japanese Service Pack 3 0 or higher Windows 2000 English or Japanese Windows XP English or Japanese 2 Related software Microsoft Access 97 or later When using action contents Microsoft Excel 97 or later Browser IE V4 0 or later Visual Studio 6 0 SP3 or higher When using Simple DLL Function Supported languages Japanese English Printer Any printers that your OS supports Mouse Windows compatible Mouse is required for operation Ethernet Board 10BASE 2 5 T 100BASE T Network Configuration TCP IP Protocol Set up from Control Panel 3 Additional Items Ethernet Hub Ethernet cables etc User supplied The following operating environment is required when you use the OPC Server Item Specification Remark OS Requirements Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 0 or higher Windows 2000 Windows XP Hard Disk Space 100 MB or more Memory 64 MB or more 1 Pro Server Ver 4 5 does not support Windows95 2 You can not use this feature with the OPC Server 3 Until t
187. are together with the receipt to the distributor from whom yo bought it for a full refund Also please understand that the cost of returning the unused software product shall be bome by the purchaser Software Usage License In accordance with the terms and conditions contained herein the Conditions Digital Electronics Corporation Japan this Company grants the purchaser the Purchaser of Select Yes to accept the agreement Select No to cancel the setup atale hiela lt Back Yes 9 The User Information screen will appear Enter all the information and click the Next button Customer Information Please enter pour information Please enter pour name the name of the company for which you work and the product serial number User Name Digital Company Name Digital Electronics Corporation Serial Number Detal hiela Cancel case and click Next The data entered must also include the character 10 The key code entry screen then appears Enter the code printed on the rear of your CD ROM Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows 4 5 Setup KEY CODE Input N Input a KEY CODE consisting of 12 digits and 2 hyphens The KEY CODE is located on the back of the CD ROM s case KEY CODE Detale Cancel 2 1 Installing the Software After this
188. ata texts Foreground color Select the text color among 16 colors If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those click the Other button The Color Setup dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use Background color Select the background color among 16 colors If you do not find the color that you wish to use among those click the Other button The Edit Color dialog appears so that you can select or create the color that you wish to use Font Select the font that you wish to use Click Font The Font dialog appears Designate each item such as the font to use the font style the font size and the type and then click OK Row height Designate the row height of the data display area The unit is point and it is defaulted to 3 points 7 23 7 2 Device View Setting the Display Contents Is 2 Click the Display Setting tab in the Option dialog Items on the Display Setting tab appear Designate each item and then click OK Display Parameter ee Line Setting Character Setting Display Setting Graph seting Display Parameter T Dine count pet nanim v Item name ms Node name v Device name v Value Data Type Item Status Error Code E Data number Upper Limit Alarm Upper Limit Alarm Lower Limit C Br ka
189. ata INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI WriteDevice Variant DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LP VARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Multi Handle Write with Cache Refresh Function Bit data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBitM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice16M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI WriteDevice32M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD16M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceBCD32M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceFloat M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating point data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceDoubleM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI WriteDeviceStrM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceNam
190. ata View D menu of the menu bar allows you to start the tool to display data saved on Pro Server in various formats The following shows the overview of the display tool Device View Device View allows you to sample data from devices connected to Ethernet to monitor the status or to playback saved device data on Device View GP Viewer GP Viewer allows you to sample screen data from the GP system connected to Ethernet to display screen data or to playback saved GP data on GP Viewer In addition to the above you can also use the Data Sampling Status dialog showing the data sampling status on Pro Server or the tool such as System Time Bar applicable to user created application software The frame structures of Device View GP_ Viewer and the Data Sampling Status dialog differ from other windows The following shows the general view JDP 2 de nane Der ce nane value Dats Tyee 750040 MELSEG OH 000040 Fe 16 Bit lt 5 ened Device View When Setting Collection Device Fie Fl IF you clici this button the pull down meru appears to allow youto pesfonn data copy export or view sere psint Set Drawing Li yov click this button the Draing Sein change the display format or the display co Drawing Setup dialog dislog appre Fait Data i yov click this button the Edil Collected Dals dialog appears so Ihat Fou can peifoan editing works
191. ata file will be read out The Readout Detail Configuration area can be used to designate detailed readout information which will vary depending on the data readout method used E All the Row Readout Detail Description Configuration StartR ow Designates the startrow Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the lastrow Designates the number of rows Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last Number of Rows si The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file Data readout order is from 1 to 10 Humber of Rows m From the Middle to the Last of a Row Readout Detail Configuration StartR ow esignates the startrow Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the lastrow D i j Designates the number of rows Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last Number of Rows sth Designates the data read startcolumn Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the StartP ositon Fe The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file Data readout Description order is from 1 to 6 Start Position Humber of Rows 4 61 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters E Number of Readouts from the Middle of a Row Readout Detail Description Configuration StartR ow Designates the startrow Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the lastrow Designates the number of rows Entering 0 or a negative n
192. ata type polling time Registered provider information data by provider Provider title provider contents conditions symbol name check interval provider receiver 1 Select the File F Print P command SA PS Pro Studio File E l EditE Tools T Programming Support DataView D Configue S View v HelplH New Open O Save S Save acl 1 Aps Ctr Coho Ctrl 5 ETE 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer 0 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Gnd CPU 0 230 113 Windows Personal Computer 00 MEMORY LINK SIO Type 1998 10 20 15 UDP Port Number 8000 2A P5 2us 3 Sample A mtom Exit Pro StudialX Print this Network Project File When no Network Project file npj is open a dialog box will appear to ask a target file to print 2 The default printer will print the data Printable paper size is A4 only 3 65 3 13 Other Instructions 3 13 Other Instructions 3 13 1 This section describes instructions that you need to know for the Pro Server operation Special Protocol Pro Server recognizes following 12 kinds of protocols as Special Protocol e MITSUBISHI MELSECNET 10 e OMRON SYSMAC CS1 ETHER HITACHI HIDIC H ETHER Siemens S7 200 via MPI e Siemens S7 300 400 via MPI e SIEMENS S7 300 400 ETHER AB S1c500 DH485 AB ControlLogi
193. ated for the Provider Node symbol name 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Action Name Bit Character Automatic Download of Access Data O ojojoj O70 Oo 0 Oo 0 O x 4 37 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 1 If you select Automatic Download of Access Data in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Version 4 10 Access Data Folder Cancel 4 Program Files EY Fro face i Help H By Fro Server Field Name Details Access Data Folder Designate the Access file name drive and folder Ex C ProgramFiles Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK When the folder where Access files are saved is checked in the Action setting display if the folder exists information set will be displayed If not the following will appear Book Location Folder does not exist C AMp DocumentsDate Do you create new folder No Cancel Click Yes to create the folder and the folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled mdb Filename Select the desired mdb file Ex ProRcp mdb Table Sele
194. ating it click No The C Package symbol may not have been transferred to the designated entry node Transfer the project file prw to the entry node using C Package Cannot execute the process because the PLC type set on Pro Server does not match that defined in the PRO PB III project file The PLC Type setting is incorrect Change the node s PLC type to the same as the PLC Type in the project file prw Cannot find the project file on the import source Designate the project file on the import source to Edit E Edit Node PRO PB III Project File The project file prw may not have been designated or the designated project file prw does not exist Change the project file designated by the entry node to the appropriate one Cannot execute not in administrator mode Please login again Login again in administrator mode and re import the data Cannot connect to the designated entry node Cannot connect to the entry node is usually due to such a communication setting problem the IP address is incorrect or a cable is disconnected Check the IP address and all communication cables Cannot acquire symbol information from the designated entry node Failed to acquire information from the symbol file Cannot execute the process because the designated entry node does not support online upload You cannot check an entry node which does not support onli
195. be deleted Please Transfer the screen ta delete the Dieplay Unit Setting after Initialize Meron Execution Heta PrajeetFle Select Destination P besy If you send Network Project information on ethemet please send using Fro 5 tudio OF Cancel To send to GP77R series be sure to click on the Use 2Way Driver checkbox Otherwise the 2 Way Driver will not function Use 2Way Driver checkbox is initially checked for GP2000 GLC2000 series 3 Select 2WayEther from the Driver Type pull down list 2WayDriver Settings E Use ZwapDriwer p iver Type Aw ap2000 F Oo Network project isn t used ution et The Network Project is not used is checked only data in the project file is deleted Display Unit Setting will not be deleted Please Transfer the screen to delete the Display Unit Setting after Initialize Memory Execution Network Project File Select Destination IP Address zp It you send Network Project information on ethernet please send using Pro Studio OK Cancel If you transfer the GP screen data alone to the GP to which the network project file has been already downloaded the network project file might be deleted depending on transfer settings or a transfer method Transfer M ethod Transfer C able Ethernet Transfer Transfer
196. be omitted When omitted this becomes 65535 When the data type is set to VT BSTR designate the number of characters NUMCHAR for SIG as the value of bytes In that case optional items values after SIG will become ineffective The default value is 40 bytes Ex When converting D100 from 0 to 4096 of PLC connected to GP 1 node name to LIN 0 to 100 and accessing ItemID GP1 D100 LIN 0 4096 0 100 Program ID The accompanying OPC server s Program ID is as follows DIGITAL OPCPRO 1 Since CLSID is automatically registered to the registry at program installation use this Program ID to perform the connection 10 3 10 1 OPC Server Initialization File You can change initial values by editing the OPCPRO INI file The contents of the OPCPRO INI file is as the following Values are initial values Server Server_MAX 10 Group_MAX 10 Number of servers Item_MAX 100 Number of items Number of servers InproSvr_ScanRate 250 Scan interval for the In Proc server unit ms LocalSvr_ScanRate 500 Client Scan interval for the Local server unit ms CharacterStringCode 0 Character string format 0 UNICODE 1 muti bytes ItemID_Separator Designating the separator for ItemIDs Data Type The following describes VARIANT data types supported by attached OPC server For the I O driver all analog data are internally process by being converted to 4 bytes real numbers Therefore VT_
197. bled Microsoft network server Disconnect clients when logon hours expire Enabled Network access Allow anonymous SID Name translation Disabled Network access Do not allow anonymous enumeration of SAM accounts Enabled Network access Do not allow anonymous enumeration of SAM accounts and Disabled Network access Do not allow storage of credentials or NET Passports for ne Disabled Network access Let Everyone permissions apply to anonymous users Disabled Network access Named Pipes that can be accessed anonymously COMNAP COMNODE SQLIQUERY SPOOLSS LUSRPC Network access Remotely accessible registry paths System CurrentControlSet ControllProductOptions Network access Shares that can be accessed anonymously COMCFG DFS Network security Do not store LAN Manager hash value on next password ch Disabled Network security Force logoff when lagon hours expire Disabled Network security LAN Manager authentication level Send LM amp NTLM responses Network security LDAP client signing requirements Negotiate signing letwork security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including sec No minimum Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including sec No minimum Recovery console Allow aukonatic actinistrative logon i
198. butor Settings Panel Layout Process Name Command Corament Add Command New Book BCopy Book Change current sheet being used by Aci Quit Excel Close Quit Excel being used by Action Print Book Print Book Print out all Excel books being used by FOSEN Display Book Show Display Excel Book being used by Actiol Hide Book HHide Hide Excel Book being used by Action Delete Command Print Sheet HPrint Sheet 5 Print out select Excel sheet being used Empty Book HNew Book Create new empty Excel Book being u Open Sheet Copy Sheet Change current sheet being used by Ac Open All Sheets tCopy Sheets Change all sheets being used by Action GROUP GROUPI OK CANCEL Help If you select Process Name for the Provider information that has been set the Auto Start button will change from Wizard to Distributor Settings 8 If you click Distributor Settings the Provider Information dialog box will appear inform Title PROEXPT10 OK Providing Condition Provider Completion Settings I Receive Alert Settings Detailed 4 gt FT Description _ _ Cancel Power ON L Status ON Data is provided at the specified time only ance ON Time Tal status OFF Interval 4 ree Time O O 3
199. by an application program at the consumer node Provider receive alert device is set after the system writes provided data Provider Result Storage Bit Device Sets 0 if provider result is normal and 1 if not Data will be overwritten every time provider is received You can set only symbols with the Bit format Provider Error Code Storage Device Stores error codes when provider result is abnormal You can set only symbols with the 16 Bits or the 32 Bits format Consumer IP Address Storage Device Stores the IP address of the provider destination when an provider error occurs You can set only symbols with the 32 Bits format 3 25 3 3 Registering Provider Data Receive Alert Settings Tab This tab s settings are enabled only when the 2 Way Driver is Ver 4 10 or later Providing Condition Provider Completion Settings Receive Alert Settings Detanea I gt To enter data click on the grid Receiver Symbol Name row data cannot be entered Consu f R Receiver Sym Provider Receive Ale WINDO 1 MELSE 1 WINDO 1 Consumer Node Displays network entry nodes Row Displays the number of provider record You can set receive alert per provider record Receiver Symbol Name Displays device symbols names to receive provider Symbol names
200. can acquire and use more than one Pro Server handle within one thread you may not use Pro Server handle created by another thread When you release Pro Server handle you should release it in the thread that you created the handle as well 9 34 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function 3 When using Simple DLL you must call Easylnit in the beginning and EasyTerm at the end At this time the thread to call EasyInit must be same as that for EasyTerm Most of Simple DLL functions automatically call EasyInit internally if they are called before EasyInit Q is called Moreover when applications compete Simple DLL will also exit automatically however if EasyTerm 0 is not called until then Simple DLL will automatically call EasyTerm internally According to these functionalities in the case of single thread you do not have to consider program EasylInit or EasyTerm However in the case of a multi thread program there are cases that the thread to call the Simple DLL function in the beginning is different from the last thread when an application exits or when you do not know if they are same In such cases you should insert EasyInit and EasyTerm in your program In most programs the initially started thread main thread remains until the end so insert EasyInit in the beginning of the main thread and EasyTerm at the end 1 Execute EasyInit and EasyTerm once in one program i e at the beginn
201. cation 9 48 Creating Read Application 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 9 This section describes the application to read and display three data 16 bits signed when clicking Command1 Form Command Displays three read data 10 Click Toolbox on View of the Microsoft Visual Basic menu eq Project Microsoft Yisual Basic design File Edit view Project Format Debug Run OG ll FE code Object Shift F7 pcerers pefipition Shtat Last Fasiten hilaire LE Object Browser F2 E Immediate Window CtrHa Locals window EI Watch Window Bh Call hark Chat ka Project Explorer CtrlHR Properties Window F4 mai Form Layout Window Property Pages Shift F4 Table Zoom a Show Panes k EN Tool L Data view Window Color Palette Toolbars B Visual Component Manager 9 49 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 11 Select ListBox and then paste to Form1 i E vn de ner ListBox Project Form Form 12 Select CommandButton and then paste to Form1 5 fp m jm ComandButton ii 1 Project Form Form P jim 9 50 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 13 Select the symbol name that you wish to read among symbols registered on Pro Studio Select the headin
202. ceiver nodes Either that the device write failed at the Receiver node or that no partner ou eaten nodes exist while providing data 9642 25AAh Reserved 9659 25BBh 9660 25BCh Data Read failed 9661 25BDh Invalid access range of the read device 9662 25BEh Reserved 9669 25C5h 9670 25C6h_ It is an access range wrong point by the write of device 9671 25C7h Reserved 9699 25E3h 9700 25E4h Received the first trigger establish command for non existing provider information 9701 25E5h Reserved 9709 25EDh For information about 2580h 25A8h 25A9h refer to 2 Way Driver Error Messages and Syslog Features A 7 A 2 Error Messages Error Code Decimal Hex Meaning 9710 25EEh Received the second trigger establish command for non existing provider information 9711 25EFh i Reserved 9729 2601h 9730 2602h The GP is busy sending screen data or saving SRAM backup data to another PC 9731 2603h An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data The item ID differs from the previous ID 9732 2604h An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data The data type differs from the previous type 9733 2605h An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data The block No differs from the previous No 9734 2606h SRAM backup data read error The requested data amount is 0 o
203. ck OK Node Name GP1 PLC Type OMRON SYSMAC C SERIES r IP Address 192168 1 101 PC Node Data TST PLC Type Select Windows PC Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 IP Address Enter the same address as used in your PC s Control Panel Gateway 10 230 230 232 oe Mask Unused Use the same data as in your PC Control Panel s FROIFB3 ved String data mode 4 Append Bl OK Cancel Helpib A Node Name indicates a name of a communicator usually GP or PC that performs communica tion activities on the network which is usually a GP unit or personal computer This node name must e Consist of 31 characters or less Begin with an alphabetic letter e Use alphanumeric characters no differentiation between upper and lowercase letters _ under score tilde and 80h or higher ASCII characters e Select the GP PRO PBIII for Windows project file prw you wish to use You may also drag the file from Windows Explorer and drop it in the Pro Studio s main window fest 1 Pro Studio File E EdE Tools Programming Support P Data eee IE HJAR File Edt View Tools Help PT All Folders Contents of Database 5 Network Entry Node i Fm fa name Size Type 1 WINDOWS NT 21
204. claration a Project Microsoft Visual Basic design Module Code l g Eie Edit View Project Format Debug Run Query Diagram Tools Add Ins Window Help 2 amp Sleeleeed o l gt op SE SSPtos General Fj Declarations kal x General gi i Awl Co a o a m A a a ff Option Explicit Prokasy TXT Fro Jerver API Declarations for Vis Copyright C 1998 2001 Digital Eleerron ProEasy DLL Version Version Version Version Version B 8 Project1 Project1 aa Forms i EL Formi Form a Modules bowel Modulet Modulet Module mode BG Module Complying with Pro Jerv Complying with the The version of the Pro Complying with Group It The version of the Pro mm gt Returns the name used in code to identify Form control or data access object SRAM backup data write It is changed from the The version of the Pro Gp Weh Version 1 0 Operations from Step 1 through 8 mentioned above are common to both read and write For the subsequent part each procedure is described separately because procedures are different between read and write Refer to Step 9 through 21 to create the Read application Refer to Step 22 through 33 to create the Write appli
205. completes the program 9 84 Executing the Program 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 14 Before executing this program start up Pro Studio and create and load the NPJ file where PC is registered as the node and _LS0100_ WORD is registered as the symbol 15 To run the program start up Visual Basic NET and select the Debug Start menu item SG EasySample Microsoft Yisual Basic NET design Formi vb Design File Edit wiew Project Build Debug Data Format Tools Window Help ig ae D windows r B re amp Si a of gp Start 5 at et Toolbox a x Formi Start Without Debugging CtrlHHFS Data E Processes Components ES Exceptions Ctrl Alt E Windows Forms ae 93 Step Into F11 k Pointer NG A Label LE Step Over F10 A LinkLabel New Breakpoint CtrHB 16 Entering the value in TextBox1 and clicking Write will write the value to the device Clicking Read will read the current value from the device and display it in TextBox2 Ae fel Form elle 150 9 85 10 OPC Server This chapter describes OPC server for Pro Server 10 1 OPC Server 10 2 Connecting from an OPC Client 10 1 OPC Server 10 1 OPC Server Installing the Pro Server OPC Server allows you to use applications which contain the OPC Client feature ex Intellution s iFIX e
206. ct the desired Table file Ex ProRcp table Select the mdb file which includes the recipe DB master table 4 38 4 3 8 Download Recipe data for Excel 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters This feature writes Excel sheet data to a specified device address The following two types of Excel sheet data can be used for designating write data When writing to sequential single area addresses Column Change One Sheet Mode When writing to sequential multi area addresses Column Change Any Sheet Mode Device access is performed at a rate of 255 times per scan Thus if you designate more than 255 a time lag will occur If you designate a device address that does not exit a device access error will occur Column Change One Sheet Mode Type Block 3 Item 5 Address D108 Data Type 2 Block1 Block2 Block3 1 12 21 13 6 18 3 8 17 10 22 14 If the Provider s data and a Block No matches the data in that column will be written to the device address specified in Address Only one device address can be specified Item specifies the number of sequential words up to 10 000 words to write from the first top address specified in Address Designate the write data format type in Data Type The following table shows the different data types and their corresponding codes Value Data Type Value Data Type 1 Bit 7 Unsigned 32 bits d
207. d a pfg file which contains CSV file header information is created in the selected destination folder Uploaded CSV file data is saved in the same folder as the pfg file See the next page for an example folder structure 4 30 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters SSS is as pe ae CSV format folder structure The folder structure used when GP filing data is saved in CSV format Data save destination C Program Files Pro face Filename FileData Zero suppress feature Unchecked Not used Folder structure C Program Files Pro face FileData pfg FileData 0001 csv 0002 csv 0003 csv The Zero Suppress feature is reflected even in the names of CSV files being saved If Zero Sup press is used the CSV filenames will be 1 csv 2 csv 3 csv etc 4 31 4 3 6 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Automatic Upload of Access Data This feature reads device data into an Access file Be sure to create an Access table in advance to use this feature This Action compares Provider Data with table data and then reads device data according to the contents designated in the table The following explanation uses the ProRcp mdb file from the C Program Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK folder as an example ProRcp mdb contains 4 tables the ProRcp table the Datal table the Data2 table and the Data3 table ProRcp Table Recipe DB Master Table If Provider data matches t
208. d Only iade Hep Paring ms O Biseomnest tbo OK Cancel HelptH DDE Polling Time The DDE polling time designated here will be used as an initial value of the polling time when a symbol is registered GP PRO PBIII for Windows Folder Designate the folder where GP PRO PBIII for Windows is installed The default is C Program Files Pro face ProPB Win Network Project File Auto Load The designated network project file is loaded automatically when Pro Server starts For access rights by modes Reference gt 3 9 1 User Level Password Settings For the detailed information for other items Reference gt On line Help The polling time used set for collecting or writing data for each symbol providing data and monitoring devices may not be able to be performed under certain conditions These conditions include the currently regis tered number of GPs number of Tags used on each screen sent type of PLC connection and number of other currently open Windows applica tions Entering 0 will allow the system to operate at its maximum speed Use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to fine tune your system If you create and add Pro Server s short cut to the Windows Start Up menu Pro Server will start automatically with a network project that has been designated via Network Project File Auto Load 3 60 3 11 Configuring the Network 3 11 Configuring the Network Follow the proce
209. d data to the connected GPs The following description assumes that the GP PRO PBIII Ver 3 0 Transfer feature s window is open Be sure to first install the 2 Way driver in order to transfer a network project file x npj from the GP PRO PB III for Windows to a GP unit Reference gt 2 1 Installing the Software 1 Click on 2WayDriver in the Setup menu J Transfer EE Transfer Setupl view Options Help felle ra ke Eee ransfer Method Automatic System Setup Automatic Description B Line Send Ta Ethernet Transfer Status Prepare Status Overall Progress Zw ayDriver Settings NUM e When transferring the network project file with GP PRO PBIII for Windows use the data transfer cable Transferring your screen data in the on line mode temporarily causes the GP to display the transfer screen The initial screen will be restored as soon as the data transfer is completed 5 2 5 1 Transferring Data to GPs 2 Select 2WayEther from the Driver Type pull down list 2WayDriver Settings I Use 2vayDriver Driver Type Away2000 Fj 4 Network project isn t used Caution When The Network Project is not used is checked only data in the project file is deleted Display Unit Setting will not
210. data is 1 2 3 4 then the data write will look like 1 0 2 3 0 4 0 99 66 99 Except for hexadecimal data when writing non string data only and are handled as special single byte number and value characters Data is read from the left most digit and when a character that cannot be handled as a number is found data read stops at the value immediately prior to that character If the left most position s data cannot be handled as a value that data is changed to a 0 value When writing hexadecimal data be sure to use only data that is from 0 to 9 and from A to F Double byte single byte uppercase or lowercase When values read in exceed the range allowed for the designated data type All 16 and 32 bit data that exceeds the allowed range for the designated data type will be converted to hexadecimal and the lower 4 digits with 32 bit data the lower 8 bits of data will be written However 16 bit 32 bit hexadecimal data will cause an error Handling double quotation marks When double quotation marks are used in the first data position until the second quotation mark is found the data is considered to be one unit If in that row the second double quotation mark cannot be found the entire row is treated as a single piece of data Double quotation marks found in any other position in the row of data are treated as characters Writing of string data is performed as follows Ex 1 If singl
211. ded and then click OK MFC ClassWizard amp H Message Maps Member Variables Aukomation I Actives Events i Class Info Project Class name Add Class Y ae EEE ample EJ il haana Ei Add Variable oc WENS amples S ampleDlg h c4 WIEWS amples S ampleDlg cpp Control IDs Type Member Delete Variable Uveitis lua Description map to CListBox member Pu C 19 Select Button and then paste it in the dialog EEE ERAEN Button MPLE DIALOG Dialog B File Edt Yiew Insert Project Build Layout Tools window Help R ajs na h EE ER aE Emele El IDC BUTTONT Je ffen_cuckeo Ea ves di ag EL dy EE S vorkepace Sample 1 project E E Sample files B E Source Fles i E Sample opp i E Samplere he Eamon cpp E Std cpp ader Fles Resource h Sampleh SampleDigh Sample Button 4 gt F Cs flg Res JE Ir 3 es sal Fr 2 E Fea 85 65 Jr 80460 J BEAD 9 66 20 Select the symbol name that you wish to read among symbol
212. dition device and provider completion device via application program Provider Node Device Providing Condition Data device is reset Device Providing Completion Data Consumer Node Writes provided data Executes an action An application program recognizes provider completion when provider completion Set by the system after Q provider completion Wait for more than 2 check interval until executing next provider When Provider Completion Device is designated and Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings is checked while Upper Edge Trigger is selected in the Providing Condition tab e When Provider Completion Device is designated and Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings is checked while Lower Edge Trigger is selected in the Providing Condition tab Reset providing condition device Set providing condition via application device via application program program V Provider Node recognizes provider Device Providing Condition Data completion device is reset Device Providing Completion Data Consumer Node Writes provided data Executes an action An application program completion when provider If both of providing condition device and provider completion device have been reset an application program can set providing condition device for the next provider Th
213. double call will not be processed applications may execute unexpected actions or may cause other problems Reading Character Strings in VB There are following two methods to read character strings in VB When reading character strings using ReadDeviceStr in VB In this case you must designate fix the size of the area to save character strings read in advance Public Sub Samplel Dim strData As String 10 Correct designation method because it designates the size to read Dim strData As String Incorrect designation method because it does not designate the character string size Dim IErr As Long lErr ReadDeviceStr GP1 LS100 strData 10 If lErr lt gt 0 Then MsgBox Read Error amp lErr Else MsgBox Read String amp strData End If End Sub 9 39 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function When reading character strings using ReadDevice Variant in VB If you do not designate the size of the area to save character strings read in advance use the Variant type Public Sub Smaple2 Dim IErr As Long Dim vrData As Variant Designate the Variant type to the area to save data read lErr ReadDeviceVariant GP1 LS100 vrData 10 EASY AppKind Str If 1Err lt gt 0 Then MsgBox Read Error amp lErr Else MsgBox Read String amp vrData End If End Sub Be careful that GP GLC uses NULL characters to complete character strings Therefore if character strings
214. dure below to change the Network Port Number setting The ports to be used should be consecutive ports beginning with the first port number entered The default port number setting is 8000 which uses ports 8000 and 8001 The following description assumes the Pro Studio main window is open 1 Click Network in the Configure S A o Studio M j E FielE Edi Toolstl Programming Suppor E DataView D Confique s Viewty Help H BIC a S 2 Spm Password ject ID UDP Port Number Eh 2 Network Entry Node 18 10 2015 8000 3 WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal C GF View a MELSEC QNA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Gna CFU 5 WINDOWS 95 10 230 230118 Windows Personal Computer by GF2300L1 10 100 0 100 MEMORY LINK SIO Type 465 Provider Information P Action List Setup network configuration i MUM A 2 The Network Configuration window will appear Enter all necessary data and click OK To enter advanced settings click on Advanced E Cancel ProjectiD 1998 10 20 15 46 4 Advanced Porto 2000 re Network Remote Password Help H Password Gommn Ethernet Card
215. e AFE_VIRTUAL CAbout Dlg protected virtual void DoDataExchange CDataExchangex pDE DDE DDV support r JAFX VIRTUAL M7 Inplenentaticn protected 77 AFE_MSG CAboutD1g Z TYAFX MSG DECLARE MESSAGE MAP CAhoutDlg C boutDlg CDialogtC boutDle IDD 274 AFX_DATA_INIT C boutDlg ARE_DATA_INIT a File 7 Ready Ln L Colt EC COU OvAIREAD 9 61 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 8 Add include Pro SDK Public ProEasy h in the SampleDig cpp file to complete the read write function declaration SampleDig cpp x Sample Microsoft Visual C je File Edit Yiew Insert Project Build Tools Window Help LIE sa Semlo gt Bre al ENS CaboutDlq P class members Y C bouDig PIEL f2 ra E SampleDlg cpp F implementation file E Sample files F489 Source Files A Sample re fi eader Files esource Files eadMe tet 2 Sample cpp 2i SampleDie cop LE StdAfa cpp stdafs h Sanple h SanpleDlg h Fublic FroEasy hb include include include include ifdef DEBUG define new DEBIG NEW undef THIS FILE tatic char THIS FILE endif FIE PLL ELEEL LAL LOL OLE ELE ELLE ELI ELE CL DOLL ELE
216. e File name and then click Open Open Look in I gg New Folder02 z aaj 20021023 21g 20021101 2Ig File name oor Open Files of type Ewa Event log file 2lal Cancel p 3 Log Viewer switches to the offline mode and the selected log file x 2lg will be displayed In the offline mode the Log Viewer background becomes black gt 20021101 21g 2Way Event Log Viewer L E FilefF Editf Contiguel Help H pe g e Time Level Message 2002 10 01 19 07 49 Sys Msg Pro Server Pro Server has started 2002 10 01 19 48 28 Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action Start 2002 10 01 19 48 28 End Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action End 2002 10 01 19 48 51 Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action Start 2002 10 01 19 48 51 End Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action End Excel Repart ACTION 1 Show Action Start Excel Report ACTION 1 Show Action End Excel Repart ACTION 1 Show Action Start 2002 10 01 19 52 52 End 2 Report ACTION1 Show Action End Ready MT kum To return to the online mode select File F Current Log N from the menu bar 6 14 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 Data View This chapter describes data sampling viewing tools GP Viewer and Device View Data View Overview Device View GP Viewer Checking the Data Sampling Status System Time Bar 7 1 Data View Overview 7 1 Data View Overview The D
217. e Bit signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision 809 Upload of GP Log Data O O O O O O O O O O O x 1 Select Upload of GP Log Data in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter The following dialog box will appear Read Location 2 GP SRAM backup data CF CARD backup data Data type Setting Farameters Version 4 12 F f Create new Book Save To Folder Template File Location E c C DAME_E id i Not use a template file amp Program Files Use a template file ga Proface ER Pro Server with Studio Ic CORIVE_E 7 al NpjDatabase JC Fie Wainie a Program Files SOO al Proface MAD he a Pro Server with Studio Zero Supress 3 NpiDatabase 2 Append data to Book temp lt Book ie Currently 0 pen Save fom 2 Do not save data MIJ SLS form Use Temporary Book CS form Next Cancel Help H Read Location Select the reading source from either SRAM or CF Card 4 23 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Data type Select one of the following items from the pull down box Logging Data Trend Graph Data Sampling Data Alarm History Data Alarm Log Data Block 1 When designating an alarm block in GP PRO PBIII for Windows Block 2 When
218. e DLL ProEasy DLL Function CF Card File Name Change Function INT WINAPI EasyFileRenameInCfCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR sFolderName LPCTSTR sFileName LPCTSTR sFileReName lt Function gt Renames the designated file on the CF Card An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP containing the data to be written to sFolderName Folder name of the CF Card file to be changed Max 32 char sFileName 064 Name of the file to be changed Max 8 3 format string lek sFileReName File name used after name is changed Max 8 3 format string dekk lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table CF Card Free Space Size Acquisition Function INT WINAPI EasyGetCfFreeSpace LPCTSTR sNodeName INT pioUnallocated lt Function gt Acquires a free space size in CF Card connected to the designated entry node If ECOM older than V4 1 is mounted on GP an error occurs lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP to be read from pioUnallocated Fee space size in CF Card acquired in byte lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table 9 28 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function GP Time DWORD Type Read Function DWORD WINAPI Eas
219. e Folder If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents will appear exactly as you designated If the folder does not exist the following window appears Book Location Folder does not exist C AMy DocumentsDate Do you create new folder No Cancel Click Yes to create the folder The folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled Save Name Designate the file name used Default value is 7Y M D h M s The Reset button will make your entry back to the default value File names can be designated indirectly For details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions Zero Suppress If you check this option no zeros are supplied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros M D h m s month day hour minute second Ex 04 or 07 If you do not check this option 0 zero is added to the file name if the file name includes M D h m s month day hour minute second data and that number is a single digit Default is checked File s Save format Designates the format used when the file is saved Select either Excel xls Binary bin for GP PRO PBIII for Windows or CSV csv format If a CSV file was selecte
220. e LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use data INT WINAPI WriteDevice M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI WriteDevice Variant M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 12 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Read Write Function Parameters lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code lt Arguments gt bsNodeName Pointer to the node name char string Specify directly the network node name registered with Pro Studio or the IP address Ex 1 To specify the node name GP2 Ex 2 To specify directly the IP address 192 9 201 1 bsDeviceName Pointer to the symbol char string to perform Read Write Specify directly the symbol name or the device address Ex 1 To specify the symbol SWITCH1 Ex 2 To specify directly the device M100 Function Symbol Data Type Bit 16Bit 32Bit Float Double String S U HEX BCD S U HEX BCD XXXDeviceBit O E XXXDevice16 O XXXDevice32 3 O XXXDeviceBCD16 0 XXXDeviceBCD32 O XXXDeviceFloat O XXXDeviceDouble g O XXXDeviceStr O XXXDevice O O O O O O O O pxxData Pointer to the R
221. e List and then entry nodes that you wish to transfer the file from the listed entry nodes on the right side 8 2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs 8 2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs If you have modified screen data via the GP PRO PB III screen editor software follow the procedure below to transfer only screen data to the GP The following description assumes that GP PRO PB III s data transfer window is open 1 Click Transfer Settings in the Setup menu J Transfer fe Transfer Setup View Options Help ean oe ENE GE ransfer Method Priel Description E Line Transfer Status Troe Apr System Setup Send To Frepare Status Automatic Automatic Ethernet Overall Progress Zw ayDriver Settings NUM 2 When the Transfer Settings window appears click Ethernet in the Send To pull down list and click OK Transfer Settings end Information Upload Information GP System Screen Filing Data CF card HERE Data Trans Fune CSW Data CF card Communications Port COMI lid Baud Rate 115 2K FF ftees Retry Count 5 E p Transfer Method 9 Se
222. e Location If you wish to use an existing template file check Use template file and then designate the template file name XLT The designated template file should contain only sheet1 Book is Currently Open Check this option when books with the same filename will be open during writing Select either Do not save data or Use Temporary Book If you check Do not save data written data will not be saved and it will be deleted If you check Use Temporary Book written data will be temporarily saved under a separate filename The temporary filename will be 7 Y M D h mM s xls After data were written Check this option when you print out written data Select the printing timing from either Printing is every time or Printing is one every the sheet If you check Printing is every time printing will be performd every time data is written If you check Printing is one every the sheet printing will be performed after all data is written to the designated range 4 10 4 2 Registering Action Items 2 After setting all parameters and clicking Next the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Select a Data Write Pattern 3 Return Help H 2 Q 2 i Use all cells Use designated range Tess hs hest White Position Save Cell 1 Relkenee amp Call u
223. e byte string AB CD E is written to word address LS100 the data is stored as follows LS100 LS101 LS102 AB CD E Ex 2 If the single byte string ABC DE is written to LS100 Word device the data is stored as follows in the LS area LS100 LS101 LS102 AB C DE Ex 3 To write the single character E mentioned in Ex 1 to LS103 insert two single byte spaces between D and the next comma AB CD__ E to push this data to LS103 gt LS100 LS101 LS102 LS103 AB CD E 4 64 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 4 4 Using Create report using Excel Action You can create an Excel book that includes a variety of information such as PLC device data GP screen data and GP backup data You can use this data to create various reports such as a work report or an error report The following describes the steps for using this Action GP GLC First create an Excel report template book and designate what kind of information will be written to which part of this template book Use a Provider to send this Action s special command s The Action analyzes the command and performs it If the Action receives the command for the first time the Action reads information from the template book The Action performs various operations according to the command such as creating copying 1 in the figure below the output book or reading data from GP GLC and writing it to the de
224. e database dialog designate the time until connection is established with the database server 4 55 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 4 3 12 Upload of JPEG Data Pro Server allows you to read the on line GP screen data in your PC If the VM unit is attached to the GP video capture data can also be read Prior to performing this Action be sure you have a CF Card inserted into the GP since read data is tempo rarily saved in the CF Card You can use this Action on GP2000 Series GLC2000 Series and IT Series units The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Upload of GP JPEG Data O O O O O O O O O O O O Action Name Bit Character 1 If you select Upload of GP JPEG Data in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Version 4 10 Capture Data Type I naa GP Capture Data E mee Q Video Capture Data Uphad Hew Fl Whales le Save To Folder i This file name already exists Se Z O Save Rewrite Te al Gy Number End Of FileName E Pro Server with Studio r NPJDateBase Show Browser File Name NODE ET MED chances Zero Supress
225. e ell Name ons Device Value PC Time GP Time Device Value If you create many Action areas in the template it may take a long time to update the setup information 2 to 3 minutes per 100 Action areas Please keep this in you mind when you create Action areas 4 78 4 4 5 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Registering Commands The items described here correspond to the procedure described in 4 4 1 Registration Procedure of Report Creation Action If you click Settings in the Edit Template dialog the Settings dialog will appear I Settings Auto Stari Manual Start Command Start Timing Settings Use Command Panel PC Screen of Register to Panel when adding Command i Panel Layout Praa Aeril blaa A Process Name 1 Command 1 Provider Infor 1 Comment fa Add Cornmand New Book Copy Book Change current sheet being used by Quit Excel Close Quit Excel being used by Action Print Book Print Book Print out all Excel books being used Eoin Displap Book Show Display Excel Book being used by Al Hide Book Hide Hide Excel Book being used by Acti Delete Command Print Sheet HPrint Sheet 5 Print out select Excel sheet being us Empty Book HNew Book Create new empty Excel Book beir Open Sheet HCopy Sheet Change current sheet being used byt Op
226. e entire sampled data check The End If you wish to export until the designated time check Specified Time If you checked Specified Time you should also designate the end time to export Device Condition This is the reserved data You should not change the designated value Export Header If you wish to include the header information in exported data check Yes If not check No Export Executes the data export Cancel The process is stopped and goes back to GP Viewer Although you can start multiple GP Viewer programs you cannot export data simultaneously You can export data even while storing data However if you checked Designate maximum size Save over oldest data in the Saving Method dialog you cannot export while storing data Saving Data 1 If you wish to save displayed data to GP Viewer click Save S on the File F menu Data are overwritten If you wish to save displayed data to GP Viewer as a separate file name click Save As A in the File F menu The Save As dialog appears Enter the file name and then click Save S Print 1 Click Print on the File F menu The printing process is performed 7 51 7 3 GP Viewer Page Setup 1 Click Page Setup P in the File F menu 2 The Print Setup dialog appears Designate each item and then click OK
227. e folder to save sampled data You should designate the total volume size of data to save among No maximum size is designated as much as storage media allows Designate maximum size and Periodic saving If you selected Designate maximum size you should also designate the maximum data size in MByte and the sampling method Selecting Continuous numbering for new files When the maximum allowed size is exceeded the following new file is created 22k Sequence number DT ABCD 0 4DT gt ABCD 1 4 DT Selecting Save over oldest data The oldest Polling data is overwritten when the maximum allowed size is exceeded Selecting Do not save files after size limit reached When the maximum allowed size is exceeded Polling is stopped and an error message appears If you selected Periodic saving you should also designate the interval to upload the files Execute the device data sampling To perform sampling registration for GP display screens click the a button To poll sample registered device data click the r Un button If you wish to sample data according to the designated data sampling condition click the Pei button The data Sample amp Save is executed according to the data sampling condition and the contents are displayed on GP Viewer The display contents are updated according to the data change When you start the device data sampling various buttons for viewing sa
228. e of appinted handle is closed 9419 24CBh Database access error 9420 24CCh INI file s in the action contents cannot be opened 9421 24CDh s of INI file s in the action contents cannot be analyzed 9422 24CEh Action s uses action contents not yet installed in the network project 9423 24CFh There are too many actions to register 9424 24D0h The specified action has already been registered 9425 24D1h The action contents which action s uses cannot be started 9426 24D2h The designated action is not registered 9427 24D3h An error occurred on the Active X IF 9428 24D4h The designated action has been registered in the registry 9429 24D5h Reserved 9449 24E9h 9450 24EAh The node name or symbol name is not specified 9451 24EBh The node name is not specified 9452 24ECh The data type setting is not valid A 5 A 2 Error Messages Error Code Decimal Hex Meaning 9453 24EDh The node name and symbol is not delimited with 9454 24EEh The symbol name has not been registered or it is not a valid device address 9455 24EFh Cannot continue the process no valid device is specified 9456 24FOh Cannot make word access to 32 bit devices 9457 24F1h The address is out of the valid range 9458 24
229. e set per provider sheet If you uncheck Use Provider Timeout Time from Network Settings you can designate provider timeout time per provider sheet individually If provider is executed before provider destination GP is started such as more than one GP is started simultaneously an error is displayed on the provider destination GP You can avoid unnecessary error display by setting the number of retry If you use the system in the environment where communication errors frequently occur you can avoid unnecessary error display by setting the number of retry When a large volume of data is sent the GP will not refresh its display whie data is being provided The volume of data which can be provided at one time differs depending on an area supported by PLC For the volume of data which can be provided at one time refer to each PLC manual Moreover symbols designated to provider nodes consumer nodes depend on the maximum number of data which can be provided The following table shows the relationship between the maximum number of data which can be provided and symbols to be designated Maximum Number of Maximum Number of Maximum Number of Data Device Type Data When Designating Data When Designating When Designating Other to Access Format Special Protocol Symbols Special Protocol Symbols Symbols to Provider to Provider Nodes to Consumer Nodes Consumer Nodes Bit Device Bit 255 1 16 16 Bits Bit 255 1 16 Device 16 bits 255 40 255
230. e system resets provider completion device when it recognizes provider condition device to have been reset 3 24 3 3 Registering Provider Data The following shows timing among Providing Condition Device Provider Completion Device Provider Result Storage Bit Device described later Provider Error Code Storage Device de scribed later Consumer IP Address Storage Device described later and Provider Receive Alert Device to be set in the Receive Alert Settings tab Set providing condition device via application program V Application program checks if provider was executed successfully from provider result when provider completion device has been set Provider Node Device Providing Condition Data Provider completion device is set after saving Device Providing provider result Completion Data Provider Result If provider reply is an error Storage Bit x the provider result storage bit Provider Error Code t 1 will be set the error code will Consumer IP be set to the provider error code and the consumer IP address will be set to the consumer IP address storage If the contents of the response are successful the Address Storage Writes provided data Executes an action Consumer Node provider result storage bit will be reset Device Providing Receive Alert Data Provider receive alert device is reset
231. e that messages are send from Windows according to the order of Message and then Message2 The message pump takes Message out and calls the subroutine for Messagel Then after returning from the subroutine it takes the next message Message2 out and calls the subroutine for Message2 Message soler Message p Processing Message Pump Message2 KD g Message2 Processing 9 36 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function At this time suppose that it takes a long time to process Messagel Then Message2 cannot be processed because the process cannot return to the message pump Message1 Processing Message1 X The process NT stop here Message Pump Message O g Message2 Processing In such a case force the message pump run Call DoEvents for VB and call GetMessage and DispatchMessage for VC Message1 Processing Call the message pump since it takes a long time to process Continues processing and returns when it completed Message1 Message Pump Message2 Processing Message2 Message Hr gt Pump The Windows application is the OS developed on the assumption that the application runs the message pump cleverly Simple DLL functions run message pumps within themselves to avoid the thing described in the example for the process which takes a long time 9 37 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Funct
232. ead Function Type Designation INT WINAPI EasyGetListInCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR sDirectory INT pioCount LPCTSTR szSaveFileName lt Function gt Writes the file list in CF Card inserted to GP GLC to the file designated via a parameter The file list that can be read out is limited to those designated in sDirectory An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP to be read from sDirectory Directory name to be acquired upper case only Only following directories are supported LOG Logging Data TREND Trend Data ALARM Alarm Data CAPTURE Capture Data FILE Filing Data pioCount The number of files read szSaveFileName severe Name of the file that read out directory information is stored to The amount of data stored to array in the stEasyDirInfo format as many as designated by pioCount are stored as binary data Moreover the filename and the file extension are stored as upper case characters only struct stEasyDirInfo I BYTE bFileName 8 1 Filename ends with 0 BYTE bExt 3 1 File extension ends with 0 BYTE bDummy 3 Dummy DWORD dwFileSize File size BYTE bFileTimeStamp 8 1 File time stamp ends with 0 BYTE bDummy2 3 Dummy2 lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table 9 23 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy
233. ead Write Data The following table shows types of data to access and of arguments Type of data to access Data Type Bit data WORD pwData 16 bit data WORD pwData 32 bit data DWORD pdwData 16 bit BCD data WORD pwData 32 bit BCD data DWORD pdwData Single precision floating point data FLOAT pflData Double precision floating point data DOUBLE pdbData String data LPTSTR psData General use data LPVOID pData General use data for VB LPVARIANT pData 9 13 wCount Read Write data quantity 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function With the Read WriteDeviceStr function the quantity of string data is counted as the number of bytes Always specify the data quantity as a multiple of 2 for devices with 16 bit data and a multiple of 4 for devices with 32 bit data The following table shows the maximum numbers of read and write Type of data to access Maximum number of read Maximum number of write Bit 255 16 16 bit 1020 1020 32 bit 510 510 16 bit BCD 1020 1020 32 bit BCD 510 510 Single precision floating point 510 510 Double precision floating point 255 255 Character string 1020 single byte 1020 single byte wAppkind Data type specification Value Data Type Value Data Type 1 Bit 7 Unsigned 32 Bit 2 Signed 16 Bit 8 HEX 32 Bit 3 Unsigned 16 Bit 9 BCD 32 Bit 4 HEX 16 Bit 10 Float 5 BCD 16 Bit 11 Do
234. eadout Detail Descriotion Configuration Designates the startcolumn Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last StartColumn Saluma Designates the number of columns Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the Number of Columns Sr olu Designates the data read startrow Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the StartP osition few Number ofReadouts Designates the readout data row The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file Data readout order is from 1 to 6 Start Column Number of Readouts Humber of Columns 4 63 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Important Information when Writing Device Data from a CSV file When using this action be sure to understand the following points a 2 3 4 5 6 7 When setting up the action the write data format for the destination device is set to a single format For example If the first 5 rows of CSV data are set to bit the following rows of data cannot be read as string data Any rows of data with empty cells will be treated as follows When the data type is set to string empty cells are ignored during readout Ex If the CSV data is A B C D then the write order is A B C D e When the data type is not set to string any other type 0 is written however if the last cell of data is empty the row is ignored Ex If the CSV
235. eceiving the Provider information You should designate sampling times before and after receiving in second and the sampling interval in second 5 7 2 Device View Designate each item in the Polling data file field of the Sampling method dialog and then click OK Change I Sampling method JET Sampling method G Regular Sampling Periodic Sampling oO Sampling data after change in device Qo Sampling data when PC was distributed Condition Data Sampling in specified seconds Sampling using cache Polling data record file Change Ciy Documentsttat DB Saving Method fo maximum size Use this button to change the folder used to save sampled data Saving Method If you click this button the Saving Method dialog appears Designate each item in the Saving Method dialog and then click OK I Saving Method r Saving Method EEE No maximum size is designated as much as storage media allows Designate maximum size Wien Sampling data exceeds meriiou Conte numbering enews Save over oldest data Ping bulier ypey Do natsaa es aer ale lmikreeshed Mage 405 Periodic saving Newile wen day Q Mente svenymantiy Designate the maximum
236. ecimal 2 Signed 16 bits decimal 8 32 bits hexadecimal 3 Unsigned 16 bits decimal 9 BCD 32 bits 4 16 bits hexadecimal 10 Single precision floating point 5 BCD 16 bits 11 Double precision floating point 6 Signed 32 bits decimal Sample table file is in the folder Pro Server with Pro Studio Pro SDk 4 39 Column Change Any Sheet Mode Type 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Block 4 Block Name 1 2 3 4 Address D100 D200 D300 D400 Item 7 5 7 2 Data Type 2 2 2 3 1 2 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 5 2 3 6 3 Sheett Sheet2 Sheet3 If the Provider data and a Sheet No match the data in that sheet will be written to the device address es specified in Address Multiple device addresses can be specified at one time Item specifies the number of sequential words to write from the first top address specified in Address Designate the write data type to Data Type Designate the Data Type using the same method as used in Column Change One Sheet Mode on the previous page The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name Ken 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charac gun Name Bi Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Download Reci da ll te I Orel ae Mica has lO Ae Nh Oe es ol 0 UI Data for Excel
237. ed If unselected the error dialog will appear 6 3 Read Performance Measuring Tool Device Address Enter the device address or the symbol name to start measuring This is defaulted to LS0000 This will vary depending on the PLC model If not entered or entered an incorrect address the error dialog will appear If you click the right side icon the Device Address Entry window appears and you can designate the device address from this window Number Enter Number 255 has been set as default The minimum number is 1 and the maximum number is 65535 although it changes depending on the device address and the access type If you designate Special Protcol symbols imported from the project file prw on GP PRO PB III for Windows to device addresses the maximum number to be read is restricted to the contents of the table below If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers the warning dialog will appear Device Type to Maximum Number of Access kormat Read Bit Device Bit 255 16 Bits Device Bit 255 16 bits 255 32 bits 127 32 Bits Device Bit 255 32 bits 255 Access Type Select the access type This is defaulted to 16 Bit Read Type Designate the read type This is defaulted to Direct Time The measured read performance value after the execution is displayed 3 The processing status of the read performance measuring is displayed in the now d
238. ed in the accompanying data files i e Readme txt files etc and or separate documents Please consult these sources as well as this manual prior to use 5 Even though the information contained in and displayed by this product may be related to intangible or intellectual properties of the Digital Electronics Corporation or third parties the Digital Electronics Corporation shall not warrant or grant the use of said properties to any users and or other third parties 6 Digital Electronics Corporation does not warrant that any intellectual rights of this software and the system constructed by installing this software are not issued Copyright 2005 Digital Electronics Corporation All rights reserved For the rights to trademarks and trade names see TRADEMARK RIGHTS TRADEMARK RIGHTS The company names and product names used in this manual are the trade names trademarks including registered trademarks and service marks of their respective companies This product omits individual descriptions of each of these rights Trademark Tradename Right Holder Microsoft MS DOS Windows 98 Windows 98 SE Microsoft U S Windows Me Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Explorer Active X eMbedded Visual C eMbedded Visual Basic Excel Access Intel Pentium MMX Intel U S Pro face Digital Electronics Corporation VGA PC AT IBM U S FIX32 FIX MMI FIX FA iFIX Intellution
239. edited When data is being written to a GP s internal memory FEPROM or to its CF Card the GP will switch to OFFLINE mode until the data transfer is completed After the transfer is completed the GP will be reset However the Online Transfer option can be selected when writing to the CF Card The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name PETR i 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Chara evenams Bit signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Automatic Download of GP Filing Data Ojo Oy Oy OO Oe 8 O 1 If you select Automatic Download of GP Filing Data in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Save Folder E core e Ca amp Program Files ER Pro face Sa Pro Server with Studio S NpiDatabase Filename MELSEC QNA LS0000 bin WINDOWS MT LS0000 bin MELSEC ONA D40 WORD bin Setting Farameters Version 4 12 EE Cancel Help H write to 9 GP Backup SAAI te CF Card I Online Transfer GP FROM M Save Folder Select the folder where the downloaded filing data will be saved 4 27 Filename 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Designates where the write data source file w
240. efined by special protocols with Pro Server s various features there are following restrictions Pro Server Features Action Restriction Contents Print O No restrictions ee a The number of device is restricted Symbol Import Export 2 Way ProPB O No restrictions Device Monitor The number of write device is restricted Device Backup The number of device is restricted Device Restore The number of device is restricted Read Time Measurement The number of device is restricted ProEasyAPI ReadDevice WriteDevice amp The number of device is restricted DDE O No restrictions Device View The number of device is restricted For the database storage feature if symbol device definition is changed on the way you cannot refer to precise past data GP Viewer For the play back feature if symbol device definition is i changed on the way you cannot refer to precise past data Data Storage For the database storage feature if symbol device definition is changed on the way you cannot refer to precise past data GP Web When you imported the project file prw on Pro Server you must re compile it or no restrictions Gin with restrictions The maximum access number to special devices is as the following Device Type to Format Maximum Number of Maximum Number of Access Read Write Bit Device Bit 255 1 16 Bits Device B
241. elp H F EE El apr ears Save SRAM Backup Data Symbolfltem Type Address Data Type Foling Ti Be Network D40 WORD Local D40 16 Bit Signed 1000 ae WINI Testes Meee Proget _D41_WORD Local DA 16 Bit Signed 1000 Ma Import Symbol VELI Export Symbol we WIN Import GLC Symbol ES Provider ona dr Action LY gt S Monitor Remote Logon Remote Logoff Device Backup Dewice Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement q F Check provider data NUH FA 3 29 3 3 Registering Provider Data 2 The following dialog box appears Pro Studio Provider information is correct Download size is 492 bytes Although the program checks provider data automatically during saving it will not display the file size In the following cases an error will occur After entering provider information the data type of a symbol has been changed a symbol name has been changed or deleted or anode name has been changed or deleted If an error occurs you will not be able to transfer the network project file npj to the GP DO NOT edit or delete a symbol or that symbol s designated provider node Maximum size of provider information data is 60 kbytes Rule of thumb Register Node eee 88bytes Register Provide Information 120bytes 3 30 3 3 2 3 3 Registering Provider Data Action Items Using the action item function you can designate the desired action item s
242. elp is F1 key 2 6 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software e Starting Pro Studio automatically starts Pro Server Pro Server resides in memory and its indicator appears on the right side of the taskbar e Quitting Pro Server automatically exits Pro Studio as well To start Pro Server only click the Start button and when the Start menu appears point to Programs Pro face and Pro Server with Studio and then click on Pro Server Creating a Network Project File A network project file npj stores information such as the network entry nodes symbols and provider information settings Creating a New Network Project The following explains how to open a window and create new network projects 1 Select New N in the File F menu lim Tes Untitled Pro Studio Fils EditE Took T Programming Suppor P DataviemD Configuel View Helplk OpeniO CuHO Save S ChS Save asf PHE CiP 1 miom Project ID UDP Part Number 2001 11 02 13 8000 Exit Pro Studio X Create new Network Project File i 2 7 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software Opening Saving a Network Project File The following procedures explain how to open close and save a network project file Before you proceed open the Pro S
243. en All Sheets Copy Sheets Change all sheets being used by Act eg apar GOLFI a o OK CANCEL Help Process Name 9 kinds of frequently used command lines have been registered as samples Groups created in Edit Action are registered as command lines For Auto Start information refer to 4 4 7 Registering Provider Information Auto Start And for Manual Start information refer to 4 4 6 Creating Command Panel Manual Start 2 After selecting the command line to set edit using a mouse pointer if you either double click it or click Edit Command the Process dialog box will appear Process Command Line Mame lew Book Command Copy Book Change current sheet being used by Action to new sheet copied trom template Comment OK CAMCEL Help You can enter or change the command line name the command and the comment For restrictions when registering commands command lines refer to About Commands on the next 4 79 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 3 If you click the w button on the right of the Command field the Command List dialog will appear Comand List Command 5 hom Hide Print Sheet hem Book Copy Sheet Jfr 1 If
244. ennnvnnnnennnnennnnnnnvnnnnvnnnennnnennnnennnennnvennn 1 11 1 4 2 Simple DLL Functlon 5mo5eeisiseneerieisemrtdenseeedddbe teten Senerara apata aaO Vedati niian 1 12 1 4 3 OPC Interface FUNCtON iasisiczssceccccesisseccwetaceseesnnncsadtavedsecesssserdondsdecssucsctcsesewestenseseestectdees 1 13 1 4 4 SRAM Backup Data Storage Function nss asenannannnnnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennennnenne 1 14 1 5 Provider Information Outline anasvenrnnnnnnvennnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennnn 1 15 1 5 1 Providing Information to the HOSt asrrasennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnenennennnenne 1 15 1 5 2 Providing Information between GPS rassrssnvennnennnvennnnnnnvennennnnennnnennnennnnennnnennnnnnnvnnnnvnnne 1 16 1 5 3 Action Feature Overview ns snnvrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnvennevnnnennnnennnnennnennnnennnennnennnnvnnne 1 17 1 6 Overview of Data View nnrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnevnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnevennnnevnnnnnnnnennnn 1 18 1 7 Configuring the System r rasvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnner 1 19 Chapter 2 Pro Server Fundamentals 2 1 Installing the Software nnaasnvvnnernnnnnnnnnnnevennnnnnnnnnnvnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnevennnnnnnnnnnven 2 2 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software ssrrannnnvvnrnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnenennnnnnevnnnnnvnnr 2 6 2 2 1 Using Pro Studio asrnssensnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnenennnnnnenn
245. ere the connection will be terminated You can establish only one connection for one consumer node Device R W Time Out If there is no response within the time designated here after Pro Server raised a read write request it will be regarded as timeout Action Time Out If there is no response within the time designated here after provider or action is executed it will be regarded as timeout However in the case of provider this is effective only when you checked Reply Check and Use Provider Timeout Time from Network Settings in the Detailed Settings tab Reference 3 3 Registering Provider Data Frame Time out When working on mass data a provider node sends data dividing those into more than one packet while a consumer node receives a packet sent in turn If a consumer node cannot receive the next packet within the time designated here after receiving one packet it will be regarded as timeout 3 62 3 11 Configuring the Network TCP IP Time Out In TCP communication ACK will be returned to data sent If ACK is not returned it will be retried however if ACK is not returned even at retry time it will be disconnected Time designated here is maximum waiting time for one action from data sending till ACK return After you have selected an advanced setting the following message appears Pro Studio A If the advanced settings are changed data transfer may be effected Do you
246. ered simply right click on the topic to bring up a list of selections From these click either the Edit Node or Delete Node selections or from the menu bar click the Edit menu s Edit Node or Delete Node items SA PS Pro Studio File EdME Tools Programming Support DatsiemiD Configure S iewlV HelplH S F Nodel op TP Address FLC Type Project Fie foe Gy y Node WINDOWS_NT 210 160 181 1 Windows 3 WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer MELSEC_QNA 10 220 254 254 MITSUBIS a MELSEC_QNA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn amp CPU WINDOWS 35 10 230230113 Windows E WINDOWS 35 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer GFI 1821681101 OMRON a GP1 192 168 1 101 OMRON SYSMAC C SERIES 48 Provider Informati 4B Action List q F Help is F1 key i NUM a Clicking either fa or allows you to edit the registered nodes in the order of registration When is clicked on while the last regis tered node is highlighted the edit mode will change to the add mode and a new node will be added 3 4 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes 3 1 2 Searching a Network Node You can create a list of the GPs and PCs that are active in the network and immediately register any node that is not in the network p
247. erer provides read write functions as DLLs You should designate the LIB file to use those DLLs Click Setting on Project of the Microsoft Visual C menu x Sample Microsoft Visual C Eile Edit View Insert Project Build Layout Tools Window Help ddd To Project Set Active Project gt r eja Dependencies Export Makefile CSampleDig AMPLE_DIALOG Dialog Insert Project into String Table B E Version Workspace 9 59 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 6 Designate the LIB file using Object library modules in the Link tab and then click OK Pro SDK Vc Public ProEasy lib is designated in this example because the LIB file ProEasy lib exists in Pro SDK Vc Public under the folder where Pro Server has been installed Project Settings ZI Settings For win3 Debug General Debug C C Link Fiesourct BE case fe i Output File name E ebug Jampleexe Objectdibrary modules _ Public Prot asp ib Generate debug info Link incrementally gd Enable profiling Project Options Public ProE asylib Anologo subsysten windows incrementakyes pdb Debug Sample pdb debug machine 1386 Jout Debug S ample exe Ignore all default libraries Generate mapfile
248. ers from Visual Basic 6 0 regarding format specifications for Integers etc Therefore Pro Studio s VBA Declare Function cannot be used When using Visual Basic NET instead of VBA Declare Function be sure to use the ProEasy vb file located in the Install folder Structure of Pro SDK Included in the Install folder are the declaration file and sample program to enable easy use of DLLs with Visual Basic NET The diagram below shows the structure of Visual Basic NET related files in the Install folder Pro SDK VB NET VAPIN ProEasy vb Declaration file EasySmplVBDotNet Sample Program Visual Basic NET SampleMVBDotNet Sample Program Example Visual Basic NET Project Visual Basic NET 1 Start up Microsoft Visual Studio NET and select the File New Project menu item WindowsApplication1 Microsoft Visual Basic NET design Form1 b Design Add Project File Edit View Project Build Debug Data Format Tools Window Help New k Project Ctrhshift n bug Open gt 39 Eile ctrian r at at E Close if Blank Solution Vee Add Mew Item Ctrl Shift A Add Existing Item Shift 4lk 4 Open Solution EL l Close Solution 9 79 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 2 Select Visual Basic Projects for the Project Types and Windows Application for the Templates Project Types Te
249. es DATAVIEW Now performing Data Collection setup First designate the name of the file used to shore collected data 3 The Save As dialog appears and you can create the file to save the sampled data The file extension is DB After you designated the file name click Save Save As IK Save in I E My Documents File name Save as type Fro Server DataBase File DB kl 7 2 Device View 4 The Sampling method dialog appears Check the Sampling method that you wish to execute The contents of the Condition field differ depending on the Sampling method selected You should perform the setting according to the contents displayed When You Selected Regular Sampling in Sampling method The setup contents are as the following You should designate Data sampling in specified seconds and Sampling using cache in the Condition field I Sampling method CX rSampli ethod Periodic Sampling g Sampling data after change in device Qo Sampling data when PC was distributed Condition E Data Sampling in specified seconds Sampling using cache Polling data record file Change ew Documents tst DB Saving Method fo maximum size Data Sampling in specified seconds Desi
250. es the overview of each option I GPVicwer ED FiejF Option DataEdt Sampling Data Export Save 3 Save asf Print Page setup P Preview Copy to Clipboard Show Hide Time Bat Exits 200171002 rar 201 2001 11 02 1113 42 11 23 27 11 23 27 23 24 25 15ec E Exporting Data 1 Select Data Export on the File F menu 2 The Export dialog appears Designate each item and then click Export Export File Name Start Time End Time Y The First 44s 2001 TheEnd fia 201 Specified 1113 42 aM Specified 41 93 97 a D rime LE Prime LE Device Condition p Export Header Gh ves O No Valid O Keyword Olirvalid D Other Cancel Export File Name Designate the location and the file name to save exported data The file extension is CSV 7 50 7 3 GP Viewer Start Time Designate the time to start exporting data If you wish to start exporting immediately after you clicked Export check The First If you wish to start exporting at the designated time check Specified Time If you checked Specified Time you should also designate the start time to export End Time Designate the time to end exporting data If you wish to export th
251. escribes the registration procedure to use the Create Report using Excel Action Designing Action conditions Registering entry nodes Registering symbols Q Creating the Original Report Create the book using Microsoft Excel which becomes the prototype of the report Q Registering and Setting Actions Select Create Report using Excel as the Action to be registered and set parameters Edit the report prototype created in procedure 4 as the template Registering commands Register commands to be used by the Action Q Us M Creating the Command Panel Register it when using information Register Provider the Command Panel to operate the output book k information according Provider command Registering Provider Y to the Provider informa tion wizard to perform a U 4 Transferring the network project file Transfer the registered contents to entry nodes For details of the registration procedure for through refer to 4 1 1 Action Item Registration Reference gt 4 4 3 Creating the Report Prototype Reference gt 4 4 4 Setting the Report Action Reference gt 4 4 5 Registering Com mands Reference gt 4 4 6 Creating Command Panel Manual Start Reference gt 4 4 7 Registering Pro vider Information Automatic Start Reference gt 8 1 Transferri
252. et being used byte HCopy Sheets Change all sheets being used by EOE OK CANCEL Help Use Command Panel PC Screen If you check this option the Command Panel will be displayed when starting Pro Server Auto Register to Panel when adding Command If you check this option commands are added automatically to the Command Panel when selecting new commands 4 84 2 If you click Panel Layout the Command Panel Layout dialog box will appear Editing the Panel Layout 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action _ Command Panel Layout New Book owen Print Book Display Book Hide Book GROUPA EE TIL If you move the mouse pointer to right left bottom edges of the dialog box the mouse pointer will change to the size adjust pointer You can also adjust the dialog box s size to change the number of buttons displayed in the panel Moreover the panel display location can be set by moving the Command Panel Layout dialog to the desired location on the screen If you right click command buttons the following command list will appear so that you can designate commands to set to those buttons You can use left click and drag to move existing commands to different locations The maximum number of buttons which can be disp
253. eviceName LPVOID pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind General use data for VB INT WINAPI ReadDevice Variant M HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPVARIANT pData WORD wCount WORD wAppKind 9 9 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Multi Handle Direct Read Function Bit data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBitDM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 16 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice16DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit data INT WINAPI ReadDevice32DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount 16 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD16DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName WORD pwData WORD wCount 32 bit BCD data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceBCD32DM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DWORD pdwData WORD wCount Single precision floating point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceFloatDM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName FLOAT pflData WORD wCount Double precision floating point data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDoubleDM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName DOUBLE pdbData WORD wCount String data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceStrDM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR bsNodeName LPCTSTR bsDeviceName LPTSTR psData WORD wCount General use data INT WINAPI ReadDeviceDM HANDLE hProServer
254. fective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name to acquire data from You cannot designate Windows computer nodes pFormat s s s Format setup character string of time to be acquired as character string The format designation code after the percentage sign is converted as shown in the following supplement Other characters will remain and be displayed as they are 9 29 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function posTime nosses Time acquired as character string However if the area more than the acquired character string length plus 1 NULL is not secured unexpected memory area damage will occur If not secured actions are not guaranteed lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table lt Supplement gt The format designation code after the percentage sign is converted as the following Other characters will remain and be displayed as they are They are internally given to the argument used by the member Format of the CTime class of MFC For example if the actual time is 2002 1 2 12 34 56 the character string will be 2002_34 56 when designating Y M PS Format Designation Code Folder a Abbreviation of day of the week 2 A Complete name of day of the week 2 b Abbreviation of month 2 B Complete
255. file editing format There are 13 types of backup data you can upload or save 1 Click Save SRAM Backup Data on the Tools T menu QA PS Pro Studio mm less FilelE EdHE Tools T Programming Supper DataviemiD Configwe S Viewty Helplk Check Provider Information Search Active Node E APS Jata Symbolltem Type Address Data Type Poling Ti Network e _D40_WORD Local D40 16 BitfSigned 1000 S win eee S D41 WORD Local DH 16 Bit Signed 1000 de Export Symbol Io WIN Import C Package Symbol EP ask OPackage Symbol CBr Acton eck C Package Symbol Status Monitor Remote Logon Remote Logoff Device Backup Device Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway a 3 Save SRAM backup data of this node as csv file NUM lA 2 The Save SRAM Backup Data window appears After selecting the network entry node the data you wish to save and the file in which the data is saved click Save Save SRAM Backup Data GP1 10 181 9 112 MITSUBISHI MELSEC QNA CPU p Data 189 Logging Data 9 Trend Data 13 Sampling Data 13 Alarm Log Data 13 Alarm History Data 15 Alarm Block 1 1 Alarm Block 2 15 Alarm Block 3 1 Alarm Block 4 13 Alarm Block 5 5 Alarm Block 6 13 Alarm Block 7 13
256. following window appears Book Location Folder does not exist C AMy DocumentstD ata Do you create new folder i No Cancel Click Yes to create the folder The folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled Number of Log Data Items Enter the number of items to be logged When the number of items exceeds this value the oldest last saved item is deleted 4 22 4 3 3 Upload of GP Log Data 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Back up data can be read online from the Provider GP unit s SRAM or CF Card by designating the read source If XLS format is selected for the data save format Excel must be installed in the PC You must also set the GP PRO PB III for Windows logging feature to upload GP log data For details of the logging feature refer to GP PRO PB III for Windows Operation Manual When you open the network project file that contains the Upload of GP Log Data action in a different environment Japanese OS English OS the contents of the Data type are displayed incorrectly Please make the settings of the Setting Parameters once again The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name EN 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charac cuon Mem
257. formation So Action List Status Bar Network Project Detailed Information Information List Title Bar Displays the currently open network project file npj s name Menu Bar Displays the menu to be used to operate Pro Studio Use the mouse or keypad to select a desired menu and the pull down menu appears Tool Bar Displays icons that represent frequently used commands Click on an icon to execute that command Status Bar Displays operation related messages and other information Network Project Information List Displays the currently open network project file s contents in a tree structure Detailed Information Displays network project information list nodes symbols and actions 2 13 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 Operation This chapter describes how to register various types of system information Registering Network Entry Nodes Registering Symbols Registering Provider Data Using the DDE Function Using the VBA Support Function Saving Backup Data in SRAM Device Data Backup and Restoration GP Capture Data Saving Function Security Function Configuring the System Configuring the Network Printing the Setting Data Other Instructions 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes 3 1 1 Registering a Network Node The procedure for e
258. g Overrun Count Number of times that sampling failed at the designated timing Status Database status Polling Start If you select a database that a sampling is not currently executed this button becomes active If you click this button the data save is started Polling Stop If you select the database that a sampling is currently executed this button becomes active If you click this button the data save is stopped Detail After selecting the database that you wish to check the detail click the Detail button If you click it the Detail dialog appears The detailed contents of the selected database are displayed Property After selecting the database that you wish to change the data sampling condition click the Set button If you click it the Sampling method dialog appears so that you can change the data sampling condition of the selected database The operation procedure is equal to the procedure after Step 4 in 7 2 2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition or in 7 3 2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition Reference 7 2 2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition 7 3 2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition 7 63 7 5 System Time Bar 7 5 System Time Bar This section describes the operation procedure of System Time Bar 1 Select System time bar on Data View D of the menu bar AM mtom Pro Studio File F Edit E Tools I Programming Support P Dataview D Conf
259. g STRING length 1 String default length 1 1 If the data type is String the data length is the maximum number of characters If Null Data is included the characters up to that point will be sent received as data Polling Time Polling Time Polling Time is designated in ms units Device Designation Example Here the Device Address D100 is BCD data and the sampling frequency is 500 ms PROSERVRIGP Node Name D100 BCD 500 When designating the data type or polling time be sure to put a space in front of the period A 3 A 2 Error Messages A 2 Error Messages A 2 1 Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Error Messages This section describes Pro Server with Pro Studio s error messages The error codes and error messages will be displayed on the personal computer where Pro Server is currently operating In addition these error codes will be used when the simple DLL completes abnormally s indicates character strings and x indicates hexadecimal values Error Code Meaning Decimal Hex 9300 2454h Cannot find network project file 9301 2455h 5 Reserved 9329 2471h 9330 2472h Cannot execute the command because resources are insufficient Terminated program 9331 2473h The system resource was dead locked Terminated program 9332 2474h Syste
260. g symbol to read from A ma fm Eg Fil E Edit E Tools Programming Supporte DataVlew D Configure S View Helpld Projects Symbolltem ype flAddess Data Type Polling T 1 Network Enti Node Local D00040 TEBiSigned 1000 iq GP 10 100 010 OMRON SYSMACC SERIES DOOM WORD Local DOQO4i 16 BilSigned 1000 Om GP2 10 100 017 MITSUBISHI MELSEC AnA LINK P00042 WORD Local D00042 16 BitfSigned 1000 EG WINDOWS 10 100 0 20 Windows Parsonal Computer 485 Provider Information BB Action List Heb is Fl key in NOM F 14 Click VBA Read function on Programming Support of the menu File E Edit E ToolstI Programming SuppeniP DataVlew D ConfiguelS View Helplil Die faen veADestere Function as Project D Network Entry Nod I y GPI 000 0 YC Declare Function Om GP2 10 100 0 WC wite function WINDOWS 11 WC Read function E Provider Infornatiod bie Action List T Address P Local D00040 16 BitlSigned 1000 DO WORD Local DODO 16 BilSigned 1000 000042 WORD Local D00042 16 BiSigned 1000 Data Type Poling T DDE String Copy Copy the VBA read command statemerifby data tyne to cipboard Copying the NU Al 15 The
261. g the Pro Server software s standard installation These include Actions for uploading GP log data writing data to a designated Excel book and others To use Action Items you must first register the desired Action and then set the conditions that will trigger that Action Depending on the Action Item chosen you may need to install Excel Access or a RDB Relational Database in both the Provider and Consumer nodes This chapter s description assumes that the required Excel Access and or RDB have already been installed If your PC is running Windows 98 Windows 98SE or Windows Me and you have set up multiple Action Items you may not be able to start an Action Item due to insufficient memory This problem cannot be solved however by adding more RAM memory 4 2 4 1 1 Action Item Registration 4 1 Overview The following procedure describes how to register an Action Item Designate Action conditions Set up the type of Action to perform on a GP or on Windows computer These conditions power ON timing switch ON OFF etc areused to perform Actions known as triggers when you register Provider information in the registration procedure Q Register entry nodes R egister Provider and consumer nodes as entry nodes g egister symbols used for Action triggers G 8 Register symbols Ri Us Select Actions to register and set Action parameters The se
262. ge cautions apply e Data Types when designating the Device Name Default Decimal signed 16 bit The data type can be changed if after the device name a single byte space and one of the data type designa tion shown in the table below are attached Ex When using decimal unsigned 16 bit and storing 40505 to D100 designating Lot No DEV D100 WORD will change the filename to Lot_No40505 Designated Designated BIT Decimal Unsigned 32 bit DWORD Decimal Signed 16 bit WORD Hexadecimal 32 bit HEXDWORD Decimal Unsigned 16 bit WORD BCD 32 bit BCDDWORD Hexadecimal 16 bit HEXWORD Single precision floating decimal FLORT BCD 16 bit BCDWORD Double precision floating decimal DOUBLE Decimal Signed 32 bit DWORD Character string STR Cautions when using Non character Strings for Symbol Names The filename is created using the data type registered in the Register Symbol dialog box Ex If the value 0x999 is saved to the BCD format symbol Product 3 when Data DEV Product 3 is designated the filename changes to Data 9999 e Cautions when using Character Strings for Symbol Names Attaching an asterisk plus a number after a symbol name allows you to designate the number of charac ters Default value is 32 characters and the maximum is 255 characters Ex A string DEV MOII STR 10 means that the 10 characters after the symbol name MOJT are read out and file names are created until the s
263. gnate the device data capturing interval in second This is defaulted to 1 second Sampling using cache Check this box to use the cache to sample device data 7 2 Device View When You Selected Periodic Sampling in Sampling method The following settings are available You should create the periodical sampling schedule using the Append the Delete and the Edit buttons in the Condition field I Sampling method es Sampling method F Ch Regular Sampling Periodic Sampling Sampling data after change in device Sampling data when PC was distributed Condition Da Time Count Append Delete Edit Polling data record file Change CiMy Documents tst DB Saving Method fo maximum size Delete After selecting unnecessary schedules click Delete to delete selected schedules Append Click this button to create the new sampling schedule If you click the Append button the Designate the data sampling date dialog appears Designate each item in the Designate the data sampling date dialog and then click Next i Designate the data sampling date Designate the data sampling date Date Gi Week Of Own DO Tv Gl Wed Om Gl ei D ig Ererydey Weekday Hulda
264. gon Smart card removal behavior Microsoft network client Digitally sign communications always Microsoft network client Digitally sign communications if server agrees Microsoft network client Send unencrypted password to third party SMB se Microsoft network server Amount of idle time required before suspending s Microsoft network server Digitally sign communications always Microsoft network server Digitally sign communications if client agrees Microsoft network server Disconnect clients when logon hours expire Network access Allow anonymous SID Name translation Network access Do not allow anonymous enumeration of SAM accounts Network access Do not allow anonymous enumeration of SAM accounts an Network access Do not allow storage of credentials or NET Passports for Network access Let Everyone permissions apply to anonymous users Network access Named Pipes that can be accessed anonymously Network access Remotely accessible registry paths Network access Shares that can be accessed anionymously Network security Network security Force logoff when lagon hours expire Network security LAN Manager authentication level Network security LDAP client signing requirements Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including sv Network security Minimum session security for NTLM SSP based including s lanon Do not store LAN Manager hash value on next password
265. gt GP PRO PB III for Windows Operation Manual Symbol Editor 1 Select the target node from the Network Entry Node list A PS Pro Stud lim E Fiel EdilE Took T Programming Support E DataView D Configuel5 View Hell Da li APS Be Network Entry Node E WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer jm MELSEC ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qnd CPU ke WINDOWS_95 10 230 230 113 Window Computer Tu GLC2 30002 10 100 0 101 MEMORY LINK SID Type 465 Provider Infomation ABP Action List Help is F1 key NUM Vi The Import GLC Symbol menu from Pro Server ver 4 0 or earlier has been integrated into the Import C Package Symbol menu 3 12 2 3 2 Registering Symbols Designate the project file to import in the Edit Node screen s Project File PRO PB3 window Node tamie BLS PLC Type MEMORY LINK SIO Type F IP Address 10 230 230 120 PG Node Data PLC Type Select Windows PC Sub Net Mask 255 0 0 0 IP Address Enter the same address as used in your PC s Control Panel Gateway Pau 730232 Sub Net Mask Unused Use the same data as in your PC Control Panel s data PROIPES String data mode OK Cancel Help When
266. gurets Viewly HelplH OE neme ee Sa mtom B E Network Entry Node AE Provider Information Si Action List On icles 10 100 0 95 MEMORY LINK Symbolllter Open Data view O Data Sampling Status System time bar Option Type f Address Data Type Polling Ti You should make sure to connect to the GP system because the commu nication process will start when you click GP Viewer You can upload the connected GP screen on GP77R SERIES however the GP system is reset once If your model does not support the online uploading function the warning window appears If the password protection has been set to the GP screen the password entry dialog appears 7 32 7 3 GP Viewer e The GP Viewer screen refresh period is set via Pro Studio s gt Config ure gt System gt DDE Polling Time dialog box Default 1000ms If the GP Viewer s screen refresh time becomes too slow increasing the DDE Polling Time value will speed it up 2 While the upload process from the GP system is running the following dialog appears The dialog will disappear when the upload process is completed Reading GP data reading Analyzing Screen files A9001 49999 3 The selected GP screen data
267. he KEYCODE device data is read to the TBL table in the location described by the MDB cell Example ProRcp Table KEYCODE MDB TBL 1 G YProgram Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb Datal 2 C Program Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb Data2 3 G YProgram Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb Data3 KEYCODE Field compared with Provider data The field in the Access database is Number MDB Field used to designate the Access database file that contains the table designated by TBL If the table to designate is included in the same file where the recipe DB master table is set it can be left blank TBL Field to designate the table where the data read source node and the symbol device address are set For example if Provider data is 1 the contents set in the Data1 table in the C Program Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb file will be performd because the first line of KEYCODE matches to the value Data1 Data2 and Data3 Tables Recipe Information Table Sets the read data source node and the symbol device address These are also tables where read data is written to You can designate more than one read source for one table 4 32 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Data3 table TT NONE TYPE DATA NUMRER 1 Data2 table H anne CYMRA TYDE DATA ae NUMRER G z NE
268. he DDE server In Pro Server specify the device address of the PLC connected to the GP You can use the symbol name defined in Pro Studio for this name Address example PROSERVRIGP s Node Name Symbol Name The actual address of the PLC can be used The IP address itself can be used Example To read the data stored in address D100 of a Mitsubishi PLC which is connected to a GP running the Mitsubishi protocol and with an IP address of 160 187 2 101 enter the following data PROSERVRI 160 187 2 101 D100 When creating names do not use cell names and an identifier character A 2 A 1 2 Device Address Options A 1 DDE Function Details If you use symbol names defined in Pro Studio the data type and the sampling frequency for the symbols will be set automatically However when the device address is specified directly you can specify the data type and the sampling frequency as options Available Data Types The available data types are as follows Contents Data Type Data Format Value Bit Data BIT Oor1 Unsigned Word Default WORD 0 to 65 535 Signed Word WORD 32 768 to 32 767 HEX Word HEX 0000 to FFFF BCD Word BCD 0 to 9 999 Unsigned Long Word DWORD 0 to 4 294 967 295 Signed Long Word DWORD 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 HEX Long Word HEXDWORD 00000000 to FFFFFFFF BCD Long Word BCDDWORD 0 to 99 999 999 Float FLOAT 9 9E 16 to 9 9E 16 Strin
269. he GP screen so that you should be careful about it Setting the Display of Polling Time and Decimal places Within the Device Monitor box click Polling Time Polling Time Falling Timetms Integer places Decimal places mo 7 DD i Enter values for Polling Time ms Integer places and Decimal places and click OK The maximum value that can be entered for Integer places and Decimal places is 15 For each item s details refer to Online Help Reference gt Online Help Device Write Method Double click the desired section to enter device address data L51018 Enter the value Pressing Enter will write the value to the device address and the next device address s Write Dialog Box will appear Clicking 0 or 1 will write a value of 0 or 1 to the device address Writing address data with the Address Hold button pressed down will continue to write data to the same address 6 4 6 2 GP Status Monitoring Here you can monitor the status of any GP connected to the network 1 Click the node you wish to monitor 6 2 GP Status Monitoring SAPS Pro Studio File E EditfE Too Programming SupportE Dataview D Configuels View Help H OE bedi Provider Information Lot Action List Da MELSEC 10 bok WINDOWS 35 10 230 230 119 windows Personal Computer S
270. he TCP IP protocol is set Pro Server with Pro Studio cannot be used e Depending on the type of Ethernet hub used Pro Server may be unable to transmit data Be sure to test and confirm the compatibility of Pro Server with your Ethernet network prior to installing a complete Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows system e When using a Switching Hub if the GP and the Switch Hub are started at the same time a communication error can occur If the Switching Hub cannot be started first Set the GP s START TIME to slow the start of the GP 12 When installing and using the GP Viewer the following system environment is required Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver 5 0 or Includes JavaVM higher Ver 5 0 3176 or higher Related Software e When using Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver 5 0 some of the features may not display as desired To solve this problem please use Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver 5 01 or later in combination with the latest version of Microsoft Java VM The latest versions of Microsoft Internet Explorer and Microsoft Java VM can be downloaded from Microsoft s homepage e When using GP Viewer on a PC with GP Web installed please be sure the version of GP Web is 1 5 or later 13 m 2 Way Driver Hardware GP77Rseries GP 2000series GLC 2000series ITseries Factory Gateway 1 GP 377Rseries GP 377RT GP 477R series GP 477RE Built in Ethernet GP477R EG41 24VP GP577R SC1
271. he same symbol for all of the registered network nodes This setting will be ignored if the device specified by the symbol does not exist in the registered network nodes Data Type Designate the data type of the symbol to be registered Data types that you can designate are 12 types shown in the table below Data Type Data Type Data Type Bit BCD 16 Bits BCD 32 Bits TA I Pare 3 Single precision floating 16 bits signed decimal 32 bits signed decimal daint f i Double precision floating 16 bits unsigned decimal 32 bits unsigned decimal Boint 16 bits hexadecimal 32 bits hexadecimal Character string 3 8 3 2 Registering Symbols For setting editing C Package symbol and GLC there are following restrictions to the setting of these symbols formats Device Format Designated Changeable Format Notes by Symbols Word Type Formats other than Bit You cannot select an type signed unsigned 16 32 unchangeable format bits hexadecimal BCD single precision floating point double precision floating point character string Bit Type Supports only the Bit format 32 Bits Word Type Supports only the 32 bits GLC symbols only format signed unsigned 32 bits hexadecimal BCD single precision floating point Polling Time The data here shows an example of data being read out via the DDE feature Under certain conditions the polling time used for collecting or writ
272. hed is designated as the trigger Designate the Symbol Name and then click on the Next button To register a new symbol click Register Symbol and register the new symbol in the Register Symbol dialog box For how to register symbols see 3 2 Registering Symbols Provider Information Setting Wizard Touching Screen Buttons Designating Providing Conditions Touching Screen Buttons Use the following steps to perform an Action when screen button is touched 1 Create button in the GP PRO PBIII Editor software that will turn the Frovider Node s internal device LS Area ON when a screen button is touched 2 Register the Provider Node s device created in step 1 as a symbol 3 Designate the symbol below Symbol Mame Feo E Cancel Help If When the designated device is turned ON is designated as the trigger Designate Symbol Name and Check Interval and then click on the Next button When registering symbols the procedure is the same as that of When the screen s button is touched Provider Information Setting Wizard Designated Device ON Time Designating Providing Conditions Designated Device ON Time Use the following steps to perform an Action when the designated device tums ON 1 Register the Provider Node s device as a symbol 2 Designate the symbol 3 Designate the checking period used
273. hi Ltd Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems HITACHI HIDIC S10a SERIES HITACHI HIDIC S10a JPCN1 O O O CO O 0 0 O O O O O CO O O OC O OC O OC OC O HITACHI HIZAC EC SERIES HITACHI IES SJ300 L300P Series O x O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 O O gt lt 0 O O O O O HITACHI HIDIC H SERIES HITACHI HIDIC H2 SERIES O O O x O O O O O O O O O O O CO O 0 O x CO CO CO O 0 O O O CO O OO HITACHI HIDIC H ETHER x O O O O x O O O O CO O O O O O O O O O O x O O x O CO O O x O O O O x O x x O O O O O O x x O OJ O O 2 1 2 2 3 1 7D 3 2 1 1 2 3 Vendor Name Toshiba Corp Device PLC Type in GP PRO PBIII for Windows TOSHIBA PROSEC EX2000 SERIES GP77R GP 2501 GP 2601 2 Way Driver GP 2500 GP 2600 GLC2500 GP 2300 GP 2400 GLC2300 GLC2400 O TOSHIBA PROSEC T SERIES TOSHIBA PROSEC T ETHER O O O Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Koyo Electronics Industries Co GE Fanuc AutoMation MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP SERIES KOYO KOSTAC SG8 SERIES O O O KOYO KOSTAC SR21 22 SERIES KOYO DL 305 SERIES KOYO DL 205 405 SERIES GE FANUC SERIES 90 SNP X GE FANUC SERIES 90 30 70 SNP Fanuc Motion Controller FANUC POWER MATE SERIES IDEC Izumi Corp Siemens AG IZUMI IDEC_1 IZUMI IDEC 2 IZUMI IDEC 3 IZUMI MICRO
274. hpedber Oes 16Bit G SgpedDes 32Bit gt Aer in Ce ero 3 46 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration Node Name Select the node name If unselected the error dialog will appear Save Folder Enter the path to the folder that you wish to save data This is defaulted to the NPJDataBase folder in the current directory of Pro Server If not entered the error dialog will appear File Name Enter the file name By default the file name will vary depending on the node name the device address the saved type and the data type If not entered the error dialog will appear Device Address Enter the device address that you wish to start saving This is defaulted to LS0000 If not entered or entered incorrectly the error dialog will appear Backup Number Enter the number of backup data The maximum number of data that you can backup depends on the device However maximum numbers of data that you can backup from Special Protocol symbols are restricted to the contents of the table below Device Type Maximum Number of Maximum Number of to Access Format Backup Data from Special Backup Data from Other Protocol Symbols Device Bit Device Bit 255 16 Bits Bit 255 Device 16 Bits 255 Depends on a backup 32 Bits 127 data file 32 Bits Bit 255 Device 32 Bits 255 If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers the warning dialog wil
275. ial machinery systems must be equipped with a mechanical emergency stop switch that can only be operated by people Also for other kinds of systems similar mechanical switches must be provided to ensure safe operation of that system A Cautions Q Do not turn off your personal computer s power switch during the execution of a program Also be sure your PC Power Management area s System Standby and Turn off hard disk are set to Never Do not change the contents of this product s project files using the Text Editor software m CD ROM Usage Precautions To prevent CD ROM damage or malfunctions please observe the following instructions Do not remove a CD ROM disk from the CD ROM drive while the operation lamp is lit Do not touch the CD ROM recording surface Do not store the CD ROM disk in a place where it may be exposed to extremely high or low tempera tures high humidity or dust 10 PACKAGE CONTENTS The Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows package includes the following items Check that there are no missing items before using the software m Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows m User Registration Japanese English Application CD ROM Japanese English m Installation Guide Japanese English Front Back Japanese English 11 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT m Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Item Specification Remark Person
276. ialog Now reading device data 6 8 6 3 Read Performance Measuring Tool If the contents set in the Data Read Performance Measurement dialog are incorrect a dialog will appear The contents of dialog are as following Dialog Contents Workaround Cannot designate a bit type symbol to If you designated a BIT symbol in the measurement other than in the BIT format Device Address field you cannot mea sure read time designating the access type other than in Bit Reset the access type to Bit and then execute measurement Cannot designate a symbol other than in If you designated a symbol in formats BIT to measurement in the BIT format other than Bit in the Device Address field you cannot measure read time designating the access type in Bit Reset the access type to something else but Bit and then execute measurement 4 The measured result is displayed in the Time field of the Data Read Performance Measure ment window Data Read Performance Measurement Node Name MELSEC_QNA F Device Address L50000 Number Access Type ReadType Q ait 16Bit Direct 325 O Cache Double Time 129 Vnser FF E lose HelptH Time may vary depending on the environmental condition number of tags on a screen PLC connection style application software running on Win dows at the same time
277. ick the Start button and when the Start menu appears point to Programs Pro face and Pro Server with Studio and then click Pro Server ie windows Update accessories EB Online Services B StartUp d Intemet Explorer Settings HEG MS DOS Prompt nes Outlook Express ER Windows Explorer Documents b RER Pro Studio X m Ej a In k 5 Log Of Administrator St NOHEN Windows9S Shut Down 2 While Pro Server is running the Pro Server icon appears on the right side of the task tray Bodine pot an Starting Pro Studio automatically starts Pro Server Exiting Pro Server 1 To exit Pro Server right click on the Pro Server icon on the right side of the task tray Action Execute Start Fro Studio aay Log Viewer k About Pro Server Login 2 11 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software 2 When the shortcut menu appears click Exit k Action Execute Start Fro Studio Away Log Viewer About Pro Server Login e Exiting Pro Server automatically exits Pro Studio e If an application uses Pro Server as a DDE client an alarm message will appear before you exit this software An alarm message dialog will appear when you try to exit Pro Server while it is collecting data Exit Pro Server Pro Server is now saving data To quit Pro Server use one of the following two methods uto Polling S
278. ied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros M D h M s month day hour minute second Ex 04 or 07 If you do not check this option 0 zero is added to the file name if the file name includes XM D h m s month day hour minute second data and that number is a single digit Default is checked File Save Method Select either Create new Book or Append data to Book If you designate a fixed file name it will be written in sheet1 Book is Currently Open Select an Action from Do not save data or Use Temporary Book when books with the same filename are open during writing If you selected Do not save data written data is not saved when book files with the same filename are opened If you selected Use Temporary Book data is temporarily saved under a separate filename The temporary filename will be Y M D h m s x1s Save form Select either Excel x1s or text csv file formats You can also select both file types and both types of files will be created Template File Location If Use template file is selected be sure to enter the Drive Folder and Template File name e The designated template file should contain only Sheet1 e If you designate the GP units CF Card as a reading source you must designate the file No to be uploaded when entering Provider information since more than one file exists in the CF Card 4 25 4 3 Registering Action Ite
279. igits SER Number of output book creation 1 or more For details refer to 4 4 8 Record File of the Last Output Book Name For example when designating Y M D if it is November 1st 2002 the output book name will be 2002 11 O1 x1s Date and time on the server PC when newly created are added to the default filename 4 70 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Start from Displayed State If you check Start from Displayed State you can start with the output book opened when executing the Action Click Edit Template Excel is started and the designated sheet file is opened The Edit Template dialog box also appears The created report prototype can be changed to suit your needs for example by entering the write data title You must designate the area to write data and set device addresses of data to be written in the report prototype The area set here is called the Action area n PG Ga Action Area Display Add Area Settings D d e ej ena oje z z smjs x 3 Worksheet Name Group Name varte Type Cell Name Direction Work Report Jee TH FIL iy m Ready LI Pl nt J Add Area Use to create the Action area to write data on the template Settings
280. igure S View Help H Device View GP Viewer Symbollltem Type address Data Type Poling Ti Open Data iew O Data Sampling Status i Provider Information k Action List Option 2 System Time Bar appears Click Change Database to open the database file that you wish to display System Time Bar Folling Start Polling Stop hange Databasd 7 64 7 5 System Time Bar 3 The contents of the selected database is displayed in System Time Bar System Time Bar mila Ea Saved Time pr 2101 pg TA TOT I en EA 15 Ear Polling Start an BE Time Bar Polling Stop Close 20 30 40 50 O0 10 20 Now Play Display Switch Time Setup Saved Time This field shows the saved time of the saved device data The field shows from the left the saving start time the time for currently displayed data and the last saved time When the current status is displayed the time for currently displayed data is identical to the last saved time Time Bar Saved data can be displayed by sliding the time bar control to either side The data saving process continues even while you operate the control Time Setup You can designate the t
281. ile name Is Referente m Cancel HelpiHy 3 The following dialog box will appear and the symbol will be exported F 1o Studio Symbol Exported 3 2 3 3 2 Registering Symbols Importing C Package Symbol For Pro Server to access to the C Package symbol Special Protocol symbols and GLC symbols variables registered on GP PRO PB III you should import Special Protocol symbols and GLC symbols defined in the GP PRO PB III for Windows project file prw to the network project using Pro Studio When importing screen definition symbols via Pro Server those symbols must be used on the same version screen editor software used to create them The following 12 kinds of protocols require symbol registration for drawing data e MITSUBISHI MELSECNET 10 e OMRON SYSMAC CS1 ETHER HITACHI HIDIC H ETHER e Siemens S7 200 via MPI e Siemens S7 300 400 via MPI e SIEMENS 57 300 400 ETHER e AB S1c500 DH485 AB ControlLogix EtherNet IP e Allen Bradley SLC5 05 ETHER Schneider TSX via UNI TELWAY Schneider Modbus TCP ETHER Schneider Modbus RTU 1 n comm These 12 kinds of protocols are regarded as Special Protocol on Pro Server and the protocol description on Pro Server is shown as OMRON SYSMAC CS1 ETHER x For Pro Server to support Special Protocol GP PRO PB III for Windows for creating the project file k prw is required Reference
282. ile to be read from CF Card wReadFileNo No of a file to be read from CF Card pWriteFileName Name of the file to save a CF file read full path podwFileSize Size of a CF file read lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table lt Supplement gt Following 17 file types are supported You can read only files saved in the designated folder in CF Card The following table shows those types of file supported File Type Folder File Type Folder ZF FILE ZL LOG ZR FILE ZG ALARM Zl DATA ZH ALARM ZO DATA ZA ALARM ZT TREND ZC MRM ZS TREND CP CAPTURE Z4 to Z8 ALARM 9 25 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function CF Card File Write Function Arbitrary File Name Designation INT WINAPI EasyFileWriteInCfCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR pReadFileName LPCTSTR sFolderName LPCTSTR sFileName lt Function gt Writes the designated file to the CF Card Write file can be arbitrarily freely designated An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP to be written to pReadFileName Name of file to be read from full path sFolderName Folder name used when writing the file to CF Card Max 32 char single byte sFileName Name of the file to be witten to CF Card
283. ill be saved bin xls or pfg When designating CSV files that were uploaded via GP Filing Data s Write to Automatic Upload Function be sure to select a pfg file A pfg file contains CSV file header information Designates the write data s destination When a CF Card is the write destination selecting the Online Transfer option enables online download to the CF Card i e data can be transferred even while the GP is online This feature is available only with GP2000 Series units And you will need to install both GP PRO PBIII C Package02 or later and the 2 Way Driver version 4 10 or later If you designate CF Card FEPROM as a data read source you must designate the file No to be uploaded when entering Provider information settings since more than one file exists in the CF Card FEPROM After an Excel file is uploaded and saved as a CSV file it cannot be downloaded Grouping uploaded CSV files into an Excel file and downloading them is not possible A CSV file exported from GP PRO PBIII can be downloaded to the GP unit by overwriting it with the corresponding uploaded CSV file However Comments Addresses and Data Formats specified in the uploaded CSV File will then be downloaded to the GP unit and all GP PRO PBIII settings will be lost 4 28 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 4 3 5 Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data This Action Item will automatically upload filing dat
284. ime unit for one graduation of the time bar Now Play Display Switch Now and Play buttons are available You can playback the saved data from the designated time either by sliding the time bar control to the time that you wish to start the playback or by clicking the Play button after clicking the time for currently displayed data the center field of Saved Time and then entering the time to start the playback Polling Start If you click this button the data save is started Polling Stop If you click this button the data save is stopped Close If you click this button you can exit the System Time Bar 7 65 7 5 System Time Bar Change Database If you click this button the Open dialog appears If you select the database that you wish to display and click Open it is displayed in System Time Bar Purpose of System Time Bar System Time Bar has been developed for the purpose of using the Time Bar data playback feature on your own applications If you read the file used on your own application e g application to display the database value in a bar graph format that is equal to the Pro Server Database File 4DB into System Time Bar you can synchro nize the action of System Time Bar with the display contents of your application e g length change of a bar graph so that you can playback the database contents on various applications If you set back data from the present to the past using
285. information SMTP server name SMTP port number IT POP before SMTP POPS server name POPS port number User name Password Sender s Mail address Send Mail address Message type IT Title name Setting Mail Information Version 4 50 Table information I Table 25 110 Go C DRIVE_98E 3 Program Files 29 Pro tace Ea Pro Server with Studio 118 Excel file name Sheet name Cancel Mail server settings Specify the mail server used to send the email POP before SMTP If you select Writes Data to E Mail in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the Check this setting to authenticate the POP address when sending mail If selected a authentication is performed using a POP3 server prior to connecting to an SMTP server and sending data POP server name Designates the POP3 server used for POP authentication POP3 port number Designates the port used to communicate with the POP3 server Range is from 1 to 65535 4 43 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters User name Designates the user name used when performing POP3 authentication Password Designates the password used when performing POP3 authentication Mail address Enter the sender s email address Send Mail address Enter a receiver s email address Enter addresses separa
286. ing Excel Select Mode Designate the data sheet type to be written 4 41 4 3 9 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Writes Data to E Mail This Action feature allows you to automatically send an E Mail without special programming Mail data can be the Provider s data or the message sheet created by Excel Multiple error information items can also be sent by E Mail This feature allows you to quickly contact employees or managers about site problems without having to rely on an operator to send the message There are three email types Send Provider data as Title Send fixed Title e Send Title and message using Provider data The following describes how to enter setting data for each method Send Provider Data as Title Uncheck Title name and Table and use the same Symbol Type data used for Provider information Send Fixed Title Check the Title name field and designate a Title Send Title and Message Using Provider Data Check Table name and designate the Excel template file created If Provider data matches the value in the Key_Code field the data in that line will be sent by email Example Excel Message Sheet Key Code Title Message Address afllz2222 cO0m Valve 1 failed abzzzzz com ice A Fai Devi ure 1 Device A Failure Stopped device A due to a failure kanrin 1 Device A Failure Valve 1 failed The repair part is at F1 Fer 2 Device C Failure Valve
287. ing and receiving of data or the timing of a device s ReadAYrite Action Registration Action Name ACTION Parameter Cancel HelpibH Action Registration If you wish to create your own custom Action Item you must register the Action Item using the Action Registration feature Standard Pro Server with Pro Studio Action Items are automatically regis tered during installation 4 Enter your desired name for the selected Action Item in the Action Name box 5 If you click Parameter the selected Action Item s detailed settings dialog box will appear 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters 4 2 Registering Action Items The following describes the entering of sample parameters for the Writes Data to Excel Book Action For parameter setups of other Action Items refer to 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters and 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action If you select Writes Data to Excel Book and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Setting Parameters Book Location Version 4 10 Next Fro face il i Cancel NPJD ataBase HelpiH p Book Name EYXMADEh amp ms Append data to Book Py Zero Supress Book is Currently Open G Do not save data Use Temporary Book p Template File Location Not a template file C Use templa
288. ing and at the end of the main thread 2 One or more Pro Server handles should be created per thread and used only within the thread that each handle is created for Furthermore you should cancel the handle within the thread 9 35 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Processing Windows Messages Most Windows programs are event driven programs which display dialogs or make sounds according to events such as An icon is clicked A mouse is moved A key is pressed and so on When an event occurs Windows sends the message indicating the event kind to an application An application recognizes an even occurrence by receiving the message and executes corresponding process In this manual the part where a message is received from Windows in turn and breaks up to each process for VB it corresponds to DoEvents and for VC it is the part where GetMessage and DispatchMessage are executed is called the message pump When you normally program in VC or in VB the message pump is concealed in the VC or VB framework so that you do not particularly worry about it however if this message pump does not run properly Windows applications become awkward For example when a routine takes time to process a certain message and the process does not return for a while because an application cannot receive an event occurred during that time from Windows an application cannot process the event Example Suppos
289. ing data for each symbol distributing data and monitoring devices may not be performed These conditions include the number of currently registered GPs number of Tags used on each screen sent type of PLC connection and number of other currently open Windows applications Entering 0 will allow the system to operate at maximum speed Use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to fine tune your system 3 When all settings are selected the detailed settings appear in the right side window If you wish to change a symbol s data after it has been registered simply right click the symbol name right window to bring up a list of selections From these click on either the Edit Symbol or Delete Symbol selections or from the menu bar click on the Edit E menu s Edit Symbol or Delete Symbol items 3 9 3 2 1 Importing Symbols 3 2 Registering Symbols This section describes how to import symbols The usable symbol data include symbols imported from GP PRO PBIII Ibe symbols exported from other network project file x 2ws and comment data csv from GPP function software for Windows Mitsubishi Electric 1 Click Import Symbol in the Tools T menu SLA PS Pro Studio Fie Edt Tools T Programming Supper DataviemtD Configure S Viem Help H HOT BB Fe APS G Network B win arga B win F Provider BP Action Li
290. ing from negligence of this instruction A Warning may cause death or serious injury Incorrect operation resulting from negligence of this instruction Caution may cause injury or damage to equipment Q Indicates Instructions Procedures that must be performed to ensure correct product use Q Indicates Actions Procedures that should not be performed General Information Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and term for general information Symbol Description Provides hints on correct use or supplementary informa tion Indicates manual name page number related informa Referen f eference tion Pro Server with Downloading Ethernet 2 Way Driver information to the GP Pro Studio for allows the Host PC to use the network to send and receive Windows data from a PLC via the GP Includes the new GP PRO PB III for Windows and Pro Ge Ui Control Editor software This single package allows you to BEE perform a aide variety of tasks from screen creation and editing to logic programming PLC Acronym for Programmable Logic Controller FGW Abbreviation for Factory Gateway PRECAUTIONS Product Usage Precautions To prevent program malfunctions or accidents be sure to observe the following instructions Warning Q Touch panel switches should NOT be used for a device s Emergency Stop switch Generally speaking all industr
291. ion Member function name Oriel Massage BM CLICKED Object ID IDC BUTTON 9 75 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 45 Paste the contents of the Clipboard write function into the OnButton1 member function BEEEINET CH SampleD T ampleDig Eer SamsleDig co5 Blender Fes B E Resource Files oof ReadMe t 2rer Mra 7 2 memben 2 OnButrant Eli fe t E p i E The systen calls this to obtain the cursor to display whi ve the nininized vi CURSOR CSampleDlg QnQuergDzagloon si BCURSOR nm hTeon i CSanpleDlg OnButtenl is ViriteDevicele GP2 DO00 0 WORD Enter value Transaittin 5 intel co J RedCcuo RIE AN Z number of write data is three els ng ls eB T ampleDig Eler 7 memben 2 OnButrant El 2 E Sample files Source Fies Elde opp r 9 Hender Flea 0 Resource Files ir FeadMe bl EET El k lt lt The systen calls this to obtain the cursor to display vhil gt the nininized window i EcURSOR CSampleDlo OuQuersDzagleont BCURSOR n_hTeon gt CSonpleD1g OnButton1 NORD wDate 31 l UriteDevice GP2 _D00040_VORD Enter value Transaitting a El a en Col 5 EEC COU BEER 47 Set three write data entered into th e
292. ion Prohibiting Function Double Call Simple DLL functions prohibit to perform separate communication double call while they perform communication with certain partners while calling Simple DLL functions It is possible using a multi handle function For details refer to the section about multi handle functions However because Simple DLL functions run message pumps within themselves applications will start when events occur If you call a function within the message process routine the double call may occur The following describes double call examples 1 Double Call due to Pressing Two Buttons Suppose that there are two buttons A and B If A is pressed a device read function is called and if B is pressed a device write function is called In this case if the B button is pressed while calling a device read function due to the A button pressed a device write function is called At that time the function double call occurs and turned out to be an error The function calls the message pump because it takes time to process Processing Processing Routine for Read Routine for Write the B Button Processing the A Button Processing gt Message l Message Pump Function Pump Function Call Process Call eg rg Lg Completion Error return due to the function double call 2 Double Call due to Timer When a periodical process is executed in Wi
293. it 255 1 16 bits 255 40 32 bits 127 20 Single precision floating point tet Double precision 63 10 floating point Character string 510 single byte 80 single byte 32 Bits Device 16 bits 255 1 32 bits 255 40 Single precision floating point 299 a0 Double precision 127 20 floating points Character string 1020 single byte 160 single byte 3 13 Other Instructions SSS a 3 13 2 Address for Windows Computer You can use up to 27 names as Windows computer exclusive device names that is LS LSA LSB LSC LSD LSY and LSZ The device address ranges from 0000 to 9999 in decimal word In BIT upper 4 digits are designated in decimal and the lowest 1 digit is in hexadecimal ranging from 00000 to 9999F The PC exclusive LS area and be used as the setup area for simple DLL functions the provider feature or the action item feature 3 68 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Action Items This chapter describes how to set up and use Action Items Overview Registering Action Items Registering Action Item Parameters Using Create Report using Excel Action 4 1 Overview 4 1 Overview When you add an Action Item to your PC s existing Provider data registered in 3 3 Registering Provider Data that Action called an Action Item will operate based on a trigger received from a Windows PC or GP on the network 16 types of Action Items are installed durin
294. kend Sat Sun under the day check boxes Month Designate a day of a month to sample device data You can designate either a particular day one day or the last day every month Device data are sampled on the day designated here every month If you click Next the Designate the sampling time dialog appears Designate each item in the Designate the sampling time dialog and then click OK Append allows you to create the new sampling schedule and it will be displayed in the schedule field Edit allows you to change the contents of the selected schedule I Designate the sampling time E p Start time Starttime 05 55 am re Sampling count One time only JE fro 1 iepeati H times even peniad Back OK Cancel Start Time Designate the time to start capturing device data The sampling will start at the time designated here Sampling count If you wish to sample device data once check One time only If you wish to repeat device data sampling designate the sampling condition You should designate the sampling interval and the number of sampling Edit Click this button to change the contents of the selected schedule 7 37 7 3 GP Viewer When You Selected Sampling data after change in device in Sampling method The contents of the Condition field are as the following You
295. l HelpiH ee Designate the exe file for the application to be started If you click Reference the Open dialog box will appear so that you can designate the application s exe file You can also designate user defined software applications e g EXE or COM Startup Options When a startup option or Provider data is used as a parameter enter that data and click the appropriate check box to designate the type of data 4 18 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Node name The Provider node name is automatically added as a startup option Write data Provider data write data is automatically added as a startup option If there is multiple Provider data lt single byte space gt is added between lt Provider data gt entries Example lt starting options gt lt single byte space gt lt Provider data gt lt single byte space gt lt Provider data gt Current Folder Designate the current folder that contains the Application Name 4 19 4 3 2 Alarm Log with Sound Alert Feature 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters This feature allows the simultaneous output of sound data and display of alarm data while automatically saving a Provider s Alarm history data Also after creating the following Access table data the Action Item s table designation settings can be used to compare the Provider data and a Key Code and then based on the result perform the designated
296. l appear Mode Select the saved type This is defaulted to BIN binary Format Select the data type This is defaulted to 16 bits unsigned decimal Select the number system only when the saved type is CSV If you select CSV for Mode when designating a special protocol symbol in the Device Address field nothing will be output in the Comment field of the CSV file for addresses without symbol registration 3 47 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration 3 The backup processing status is displayed in the now dialog ow saving device data to file Of 255 0 If the contents set in the Device Backup dialog are incorrect following dialogs will appear Dialog Contents Workaround Designate number up to 255 for data Reset the value in the Backup Number backup in the BIT format field and then execute backup Cannot execute bit type symbol backup If you designated a BIT symbol in the other than in the BIT format Device Address field you cannot execute backup in formats other than BIT Reset the format to BIT and then execute backup Cannot execute symbol backup other than If you designated a symbol other than a a bit type in the BIT format bit type in the Device Address field you cannot execute backup in BIT Reset the format to something else but BIT and then execute backup 4 When the backup process has been completed
297. layed on the Command Panel is 7 vertical by 10 horizontal 70 total You can display one Command Panel per Action Command Panel Layout Quit Excel GROUP1 Do n t set New Book Quit Excel Print Book Display Book Hide Book Print Sheet Empty Book Open Sheet Open All Sheets GROUPI 4 85 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Command Panel Display When you read the network project file that uses the Create Report using Excel Action after starting Pro Server the Command Panel will appear on a PC screen if you have checked Use Command Panel PC Screen in the Settings dialog box If you wish to display the Command Panel after closing it once right click the Pro Server icon displayed in the Windows taskbar and select an Action name from Action Execute ACTION Action Execute Start Pro Studio Zw ap Log Viewer About Pro Server Login The following control list appears If you select Show Command Panel the Command Panel will be displayed again In the control list in addition to Show Hide Command Panel you can also select Show Book Show command Hide Book Hide command and Quit Excel Close command Show command panel Hide command panel Show Book Hide Book Quit Excel Cancel 4 86 4 4 7 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Registering Provider
298. lderName Name of the folder used when deleting the CF Card file Max 32 char single byte sFileName Name of file to be deleted from CF Card Max 8 3 format string kkk lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table CF Card File Delete Function Type Designation INT WINAPI EasyFileDeleteCard LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR pDeleteFileType WORD wDeleteFileNo lt Function gt Deletes the designated file on the CF Card Files deleted are limited to those designated by pDeleteFileType An error will occur if a GP77R Series unit is used with this function lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name of GP containing the data to be deleted pDeleteFileType Designates the type of file to be deleted refer to supplemental table wDeleteFileNo No of a file to be deleted from CF Card lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table lt Supplement gt If the file does not exist and this function is performed no error will occur and it will be completed normally Following 17 file types are supported File Type Folder File Type Folder ZF FILE ZL LOG ZR FILE ZG ALARM Zl DATA ZH ALARM ZO DATA ZA ALARM ZT TREND ZC MRM ZS TREND CP CAPTURE Z4 to Z8 VALARM 9 27 9 1 Simpl
299. lert Settings DetailealL A Power ON ial ON Time Tal Interval Upper Edge Trigger Rewrite J LowerEdge Trigger Trigger Provider Node Consumer Node s OK Cancel timing Descriptio n x Status ON fe choose the provider s conditions and Status OFF ee WINDOWS NT Z Symbol Name al WINDOWS NT Symbol Length Constant value MELSEC_QNA Symbol Name re For provider node symbols and consumer node symbols only the same format can be selected Providing Condition Tab Providing Condition Provider Completion Settings Receive Alert Settings Detailed 4 Description 11 F Power ON y Status ON Please choose the provider s conditions and timing ON Time lel Status OFF amp Interval Upper Edge Trigger HE I Rewrite Lower Edge Trigger I Trigger Following items are displayed by selecting the providing condition Setup Items Processing Remarks after Providing Condition Symbol Name Time Interval Setup Designated Interval Power ON X X On Time Interval
300. line Command specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color No blinking a background color No drawing an arrow Yes drawing a solid line Yes drawing a dotted line No Rectangle Command specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color No blinking a background color No drawing a solid line Yes drawing a dotted line No chamfering Yes specifying the number of dots in chamfering Yes solid fill pattern Yes fill patterns except for a solid fill No 7 54 7 3 GP Viewer Circle Ellipse Command specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color No blinking a background color No drawing a solid line Yes drawing a dotted line No solid fill pattern Yes fill patterns except for a solid fill No Arc Sector Command specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color No blinking a background color No drawing a solid line Yes drawing a dotted line No Polygon Fill Command specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color No blinking a background color No drawing a solid line Yes drawing a dotted line No solid fill pattern Yes fill patterns except for a solid fill No Ruler Co
301. lor Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color Yes blinking a background color No alarm process Yes specifying an alarm color Yes blinking an alarm color Yes specifying an alarm background color Yes blinking an alarm background color No operator process Yes specifying display rotation Yes 7 60 7 3 GP Viewer S Tag starting method Yes post start read Yes text size Yes text font No number of texts to be displayed Yes specifying a text color Yes blinking a text color Yes specifying a background color Yes blinking a background color Yes display location Yes clearing display Yes specifying display angle Yes T Tag write action mode bit word special Yes specifying an operator Yes hierarchical screen switching Yes special actions except for T tag extension No Q tag extended action No function key process No interlock capability Yes grouping with the automatic disable capability Yes addition subtraction on from a specified digit Yes GP reset Yes AUX output No buzzer sound Yes reverse display Yes U Tag specifying method of the window registration screen direct V g indirect display a data form when indirect is selected BIN BCD Yes action mode Yes reshuffling of overlapped screens Yes 7 61 7 4 Checking the Data Sampling Status 7 4 Checking the Data Sampling Status This secti
302. m Parameters 2 Clicking the previous Setting screen s Next button calls up the following screen Select a Data write Patter Z Return Help H 2 Qo 0 Gy Use all cells Use designated range Use Excel kL ME sheet Gi Item names are used OF Item names are not used Gy Call up Excel display 9 No Excel display JE Time stamp is used 2 Time stamp is not used Select a Data Write Pattern Select the radio button that corresponds to the data write direction desired Write Data Range Select the data range used for the data saved When CSV is selected as the data save format the Template and Data write patterns cannot be selected Settings are fixed to Data write Z type Use all cells Item names are not used and Time stamp is not used 4 26 4 3 4 Automatic Download of GP Filing Data 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters This Action Item will automatically download filing data to a Provider GP unit s SRAM area CF Card or internal memory FEPROM Data that has been previously uploaded from a GP can only be downloaded once Also only uploaded Excel data or CSV data can be changed and even that data cannot be added to or deleted Also Comments Addresses Data Formats and other data settings cannot be
303. m error 9333 2475h Cannot execute the command because program versions do not match 9334 2476h j Reserved 9339 247Bh 9340 247Ch An error occurred when accessing the lt s gt file 9341 247Dh Pro Server is being used by too many applications 9342 247Eh OS resources are insufficient insufficient memory 9343 247Fh The set connector is used by another application 9344 2480h Pro Server has not been started Could not reference data 9345 2481h Pro Server has been terminated Could not reference data 9346 2482h _ Cannot continue Pro Server has been terminated 9347 2483h_ Cannot continue Pro Server has been terminated 9348 2484h_ Could not start Pro Server 9349 2485h Could not start Pro Studio 9350 2486h Unsupported command Cannot continue 9351 2487h Failed in loading the network project file 9352 2488h The entered node name has already been registered 9353 2489h The entered node name has not been registered 9354 248Ah Backup data type specified is not supported 9355 248Bh Failed to writing to the file 9356 248Ch Could not create a file to store the SRAM backup data 9357 248Dh The node name entered has not been registered 9358 248Eh Pro Server is already operating Cannot start two copies 9359 248Fh Reserved 9360 2490h s has not been entered 9361 2491h 0 cannot be entered in s 9362 2492h s should be xxx xxx XXX xxx format where xxx is a value between 0 and 255 9363
304. me Change the sheet name in the Title field to something new If you wish to change a node topic s data after it has been registered simply right click on the topic to bring up a list of selections From these click either the Edit Node or Delete Node selections or from the menu bar click the Edit E menu s Edit Node or Delete Node items The contents of provider settings may affect system communication speed In such a case refer to A 5 Optimizing Communication Speed and change settings Reference gt A 5 Optimizing Communication Speed 3 28 3 3 1 Checking for Provider Data Errors 3 3 Registering Provider Data The following procedure explains how to check provider data If after registering provider data you delete the relevant symbol name or network node or alter any symbol s data type an error message will appear If no errors are found in the provider data the data s file size when it is downloaded to the GP will be dis played The file size shown in this dialog box reflects the amount of GP screen area used The following description assumes that the program s main window is open 1 Click the Check Provider Information item in the Tools T menu SLA PS Pro Studio HOT FiefF EdE ME Dataview Configue S Viewty H
305. me when writing data more than one time Data written previously remains as historical data When the write area is exceeded writing continues on the next sheet Scroll Type When performing multiple data writes the row following the previously written row is used to begin writing with the previously written data retained as a history If the data write area is exceeded rows of old data are deleted as new data is written see below 19 Fesul Time No Prod Defects Prod Types 2002 8721 4 45 22 oo n 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 a7 28 29 30 31 32 33 2002 8 21 4 46 4 Newest data is added here Data scrolls upwards as new data is added Loop Type When performing multiple data writes the row following the previously written row is used to begin writing with the previously written data retained as a history If the data write area is exceeded the oldest row of data is overwrited as each new data row is written see below 18 Date Time 20 2002 8 21 24 22 23 24 on d Newest data overwrites old data here 26 Lz 28 128 30 aa 2002 8 21 4 73 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action The following data types are not available when the Scroll or Loop functions are used 4 Logging Data e 5 Trend Graph Data
306. mmand specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color No blinking a background color No drawing a solid line Yes drawing a dotted line No ruler type Yes number of graduations to be divided Yes 7 55 7 3 GP Viewer Text String Command specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color Yes blinking a background color Yes specifying a shade color of a carving style Yes blinking a shade color of a carving style Yes text direction Yes text style Yes text size Yes text rotation angle Yes text font No Mark Call up Command specifying a display color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying a background color Yes blinking a background color Yes specifying a mark size Yes 7 56 Supported Tag Commands The following GP PRO PBIII tag commands are supported by GP Viewer Only the following tags are supported C tag E tag e F tag G tag K tag L tag e M tag N tag e S tag T tag U tag 7 3 GP Viewer Among these tag commands there are some features not available with GP Viewer Refer to the following list for each tag command The display may differ for GP and for your GP Viewer even if drawing commands are supported C Tag character size Yes specifying a di
307. mplates gt Visual Basic Projects T ore FF visual C Projects Be H LE E 6 Visual C Projects Windows Class Library Windows E Setup and Deployment Projects Application Control Library 5 Other Projects R visual Studio Solutions B ASP NET Web ASP NET Web Web Control Application Service Library 4 project for creating an application with a Windows user interface Name EasySample Location O Pro Serversample F Browse Add to Solution Clase Solution Project mill he crested at M I Pra ServerSamnleiFaevSamnle Declare Function 3 Copy the Pro SDK VB NET API ProEasy vb file from Pro Server with ProStudio s Install folder to the new project 4 To add the copied ProEasy vb file to the project open Visual Basic NET and select Project Add Existing Item 4 EasySample ual Basic NET design Forml yb Design i Eile Edit View Project Build Debug Data Tools Window Help i tg S Add Windows Form g p Debug E os pa add Inherited Form e 4 4 Inherited For me me dra ot a Bl 4 p x oo Add User Control A om d Inherited Control Add Component Add Module xogo Add Class Ef i E ef i tal Odd New Item CtrlHShift A Add Existing Item Skift lt A Exclude From Project HEA
308. mpled data are appended on GP Viewer Refer to 7 3 5 Playback Feature for the viewing method of sampled device data Reference gt 7 3 5 Playback Feature 7 41 7 3 GP Viewer When gathering data clicking the icon or selecting the File Show Hide Time Bar menu item allows you to set the Time Bar as Show or Hide The System Time Bar is not displayed when GP Viewer starts up It is displayed however after Sampling operation is performed Show Hide status data is contained in the DV file I GP Viewer Mia File E Option DataEdit Sampling me fornem m 200111102 aay aor ES 20014102 11 13 42 135 11 13 57 7 42 7 3 3 Editing Sampled Data This feature allows you to edit sampled device data 1 Click Data Edit of GP Viewer GP Viewer File E Option Data Edit Sampling ial ES 200111102 11 201 20011102 11 13 42 iLlis 11 13 EE VEE 53 54 55 56 3ec 15ec a I ig 7 3 GP Viewer 2 The Data Edit dialog appears You can edit data in various methods The following part describes the major operation method after the Data Edit dialog appeared Data Source 29 1 2 3 item name 0000 0100 0200 Append Node name GP2300L Device name 0000 GP2300L GP2300L 0100
309. n Computer Status Monitor Dente Hanlar Remote Logon Remote Logoff ure Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway Restore file data to device 3 NUM A 2 The Device Restore window appears After selecting all items click Restore File ame Format Node ame MELSEC_ONA E Device A aress Restore Number Feste Cancel HelpiH File Name Enter the file name which you have created according to the procedure in the section 3 7 1 Device Data Backup All buttons except for the cancel button will stay dimmed until you designate the correct file Format If you designate a file in the File Name field the following table showing formats corresponding to files will appear File Format Bit Length Write Format Display Binary 1 Bit 16 16 Bits 32 32 Bits CSV 1 Bit 16 Unsigned decimal 16 Bits unsigned decimal Signed decimal 16 Bits singed decimal Hexadecimal 16 Bits hexadecimal 32 Unsigned decimal 32 Bits unsigned decimal Signed decimal 32 Bits signed decimal Hexadecimal 32 Bits hexadecimal 3 50 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration Node Name Select the node name from the selec
310. n n rxsseasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnennennnenn 4 15 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters rrnnnunnannnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnn 4 18 4 3 1 Start Application Action item arasseasrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnanennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnennene 4 18 4 3 2 Alarm Log with Sound Alert Feature anrasnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennene 4 20 4 3 3 Upload of GP Log Data ssssescsssssessesseeseesnnesseeesesseeenesnesensenenensenesnessneenoesneesoeeaeens 4 23 4 3 4 Automatic Download of GP Filing Data asrasvennvnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnennene 4 27 4 3 5 Automatic Upload of GP Filing Data reerennrnnvennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennene 4 29 4 3 6 Automatic Upload of Access Data ernasrnnvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennene 4 32 4 3 7 Automatic Download of Access Data nernannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnene 4 36 4 3 8 Download Recipe data for Excel rasreasrnsnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnannnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnne 4 39 4 3 9 Writes Data to E Mail easranornornnonnevnnennnvnnnennvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennennnne 4 42 4 3 10 Upload to the database ssrranvrnnnvnnnvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnvnnnvnnnennnnennnnennnennnnennnnnnnnvnnnnsnnennnnennnnene 4 45 4 3 11 Download from the database
311. n Desig Access Designating Special nating Other Device Protocol Symbols Bit Device Bit 255 255 16 Bits Device Bit 255 255 16 bits 255 255 32 bits 127 255 Single precision floating point 127 255 Double precision floating point 63 255 Character string 510 single byte 510 single byte 32 Bits Device 16 bits 255 255 32 bits 255 255 Single precision floating point 255 255 Double precision floating point 127 255 Character string 1020 single byte 1020 single byte If you designate values exceeding those maximum numbers or if all devices within the restricted range have not registered as Special Protocol symbols the warning dialog will appear 3 The Data Input window appears Conditions that you have designated so far are displayed in the window You can also click and edit each item If you have made a mistake click Back If you do not have other devices to sample data click OK i Data Input Sampling device data is shown in a list When adding additional data sampling devices click the Add button 27 ltem name Node name Device name value 1 2030 GP2300L 2030 0 Append 2 2031 GP2300L 2031 1 3 2032 GP2300L 2032 0 Delete 4 2033 GP2300L 2033 1 5 2034 GP2300L 2034 a 6 2035 GP2300L 2035 1 7 2036 GP2300L 2036 a 8 2037 GP2300L 2037 D g 2038 GP2300L 2038 1 10 2039 GP2300L 2039 D Upper Lower
312. n be imported to another network project 1 Select the Tool T Export Symbol from the Menu Bar GA PS Pro Studio Fiel EdkE Tools Programming Support Dataview D Configure S View HelpiH HOT Eg Check Provider Information BB fei Search Active Node Ea APS Save SRAM Backup Data Symbolltem ope Address Date Type root EE Networkl Transfer Network Project 040 Wa Local D40 T6 BilSigaed 1000 jec y BWIN por Symbol DA WORD Local DA 16 BiSigned 1000 FPE MEL S M impart EPackage Symbol EF Provider heck Package Symbol pie eck C Package Symbol Status Monitor Remote Logon Remote Logalf Device Backup Device Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Perfomance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway z D Export symbols to GP PRO PB9 or to ProStudio exported file roa A Right clicking on a desired node can also be used to select Export Symbol 2 The following dialog box will appear Designate the format and name of the file to be exported and click Export Symbol Export Export Format is 2 Way Format 3 GP PRO PB3 Format to their default values This feature exports only symbol names and device addresses After this feature is used the Data Type and Polling Time will revert I Export Global Symbol Export f
313. n the GP PRO PBIII for Windows software s Project Manager screen GP Setup menu s Communication Settings tab The entering of Ethernet settings for communication using the 2 Way Driver feature is done via the previ ously mentioned OFFLINE mode Select the INITIALIZE gt PLC SETUP gt EXPANSION SET TINGS gt ETHERNET SETUP area and enter the required setting data there You need to also enter the required settings in the Pro Studio program s Register Edit Node area and the Port No in the Config ure gt Network area 1 7 The following table describes what each setting is used for 1 3 System Configuration Setting PLC Transfer Settings 2 Way Driver Settings Remarks IP Address o x These settings apply to a single Ethernet I F and only one setting value can be entered When the Subnet Mask 9 a PLC Transfer Settings are not Gateway entered the 2 Way Driver Settings IP Route Address 9 X will be enabled Be sure the Port No s used are not the same Port numbers are Port No O O allocated continuously for a total of 10 No s starting from the 2 Way Driver Port No entered O Setting enabled X Setting disabled 1 8 1 3 System Configuration Network with GP s embedded Ethernet and the extended Ethernet I F unit PC Ethernet Eq Expansion Ethernet I F Unit Ethernet After attaching the Expansion Ethernet I F Unit your GP unit is
314. nce Measuring Tool This tool allows you to measure the data read performance from the designated node 1 Click Data Read Performance Measurement on the Tools 1 bar of the Menu Bar SAPS Pro Studio File E Edit E ToolsT Programming Support Dataview D Configuels Viewly HelplH OE Remote Logon Remote Logoff Device Backup Device Restore Check Provider Information Search Active Node E Save SRAM Backup Data Symbolfltem Type Address Data Type Polling Ti EF Network Transfer Network Project 040 WORD Local 040 T6BilSigned 1000 Bw eons DA WORD Loca DA TE BilSigned 1000 Import Symbol i a Export Symbol Provider Import C Package Symbol i f Check C Package Symbol r Action Li Status Monitor Derbe Henlar Save GP Capture Data Data Read Perform Setup Factory Gateway Mesure data read performance 2 The Data Read Performance Measurement dialog appears After designating all items click Begin Node Device Address Data Read Performance Measurement Node Name MELSEC_QNA Fj L80000 Number 255 H ReadType f Direct Cache Access Type Ol Bit Dine mn Close HelpiH 16Bit 32Bit Double Select the node name All entry node names have been register
315. nd All Screens 18 Automatically Send Changed 3 Send User Selected Screens Send To GP lid Screens p Transfer Mode 18 Preparation for a transfer and a transfer are made simultaneous 3 It is transfered after preparation for a transfer is finished Setup 42 Automatic Setup E Force System Setup E Do NOT Perform Setup Setup CFG file 18 English 3 Japanese Use Extended Program oa Simulation Selection CAPROGRAM FLESWPRO FACEWPROPEWIN Blows OK Cancel Help 8 2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs Ethernet can be used to transfer only the updated screen data to the GPs whose setup has been com pleted However set up via Ethernet is also possible with the GP2000 Series Reference gt GP PRO PBIII for Windows Help Files Transferring your screen data in on line mode temporarily causes the GP to display the transfer screen The initial screen will be restored as soon as data transfer is completed 3 Click Send in the Transfer menu or on the Send Screen button to transfer the information to
316. ndows program the timer event is frequently used If you are not careful enough in programming using the timer event the function double call may occur C Reads a device by calling a device read function once every second periodically and displays data Calls a device write function when a certain button is pressed and writes data to a device These programs cause errors at the following timing e When the timer event occurred for 1 and the button mentioned in 2 was pressed while reading and then the process 2 started e When the timer event occurred while writing and reading is executed 4 9 38 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Avoiding Function Double Call The following describes how to avoid the function double call Improve the algorithm of the application to stop the function double call For example 1 Be sure to cancel the timer in the beginning of timer and button processing routines 2 While process is executed due to a certain button pressed ignore the event even if that button or another button is pressed Use the multi handle function If Pro Server handle differs it does not cause the function double call Use the multi handle function and use separate handle to the program which includes the function double call possibility 8 Do not process messages within functions Call EasySetWaitType using the argument 2 however since messages other than those which cause the function
317. ne update 3 17 4 3 2 Registering Symbols If you click OK the contents of the imported C Package symbol will appear on the screen Nodes with x at the end of those names in the network entry node list mean that they use a Special Protocol If imported drawing definition symbol names start from numbers _ will be added in the beginning of those symbol names If drawing definition symbol names also include single wo eo es H byte characters other than characters numbers _ those characters will be oo converted to _ when imported Drawing definition symbol addresses of Special Protocol are Screen Creation Definition Symbols and other symbol addresses are corresponding device addresses MA PS Pro Studio JOE FilefE EditE Tools I Programming Support DataviewD Configure S View HelpiH Ble e Se Symbolitem Type Address counter AL Local GLC 1SS APS E WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer counter UP GLOH 54 Be Network Entry Node i LI MELSEC_ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Gn amp CPU i Er EF de CS 1A 10230230118 OMRON STSMACCSTETHERY I KE Ege oe Fo Information GLCH 58 i Br Action List Screen Creation Definition Symbols Screen Creation Definition Symbols
318. ng integer variables integer array variables can access data in individual bit units Adding a single space and a suffix descriptor Xm to a variable name allows this type of bit unit access Also adding the suffix lt n gt single space to a variable name allows you to designate individual array elements Therefore if you wish to access the Integer_Array s n 1 element s m 1 position bit you would write Integer_Array lt n gt _ Xm Ex To access the Integer_Variable s 7th position bit you would write Integer_Variables_ X6 Ex To access the Integer_Array s 2nd element s 30th position bit you would write Integer_Array lt 1 gt X29 Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi Thread Applications All Simple DLL functions are synchronous If a function is called once the process will not return from a function until it is completed Therefore even if you access to more than one entry node each access will be processed sequentially in the case of a single thread program In the case of a multi thread program you can access to another node using another thread even while you access to a certain node using one thread Simple DLL supports multi thread The following describes precautions when you build multi thread programs 1 Use multi handle functions basically to multi thread programs 2 You need to acquire Pro Server handle to use multi handle functions Acquire separate Pro Serve handle per thread Although you
319. ng Network Project Files 4 67 4 4 2 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Information Writable to the Report The following information can be written to the report You can create various types of report such as work site status or production information by placing the following data in the template Real time device value of for example PLC GP GLC Factory Gateway or Pro Server Data saved in SRAM or CF Card of GP GLC Logging data Trend data Sampling data Alarm data CSV data CSV display data GP screen data JPEG data e GP screen data of GP GLC captured real time e Clock data within GP GLC and Factory Gateway e Clock data of the PC where Pro Server is running Provider s node name In addition you can perform the following operations on the output book e Create a new Excel book begin on a new book e Create a new sheet begin on a new sheet Printing per book Printing per sheet e Perform a desired macro Display a book e Hide a book e Close a book 4 68 4 4 3 Creating the Report Prototype 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Create the report including blank cells where number data is previously written using Excel Create the report prototype while considering the contents of 4 4 2 Information Available in the Report Use it as the template by designating what kind of data e g device data GP screen data is written in
320. ng Suppor Dataview D Configure S View Help H Dem erre rioei Search Active Node Ra aPs Save SRAM Backup Data G Network co WIM Tg MELI on WIN 43 Provider 4B Action Li HOT Symboler Tue Address Date Type Pola Tr Local D40 16 Bilsigned 1000 I Computer B t WORD Local DA 16 BilSigned 1000 EC Qn CPU Computer Setup Factory Gateway Start monitoring of this symbols device in RUM A You can right click the symbol to select Device Monitor from the shortcut menu 6 2 3 You can be monitored via the device Device Monitor Signed 2 Unsigned CI HEX O BCD MELSEC QNA D40 WORD 00 01 D00040 ZEEE ZEE D00042 HH EEEH D00044 ZEEE ZEEE D00046 HH EEEH D00048 ZEEE ZEE D00050 HH TEHE D00052 ZEEE ZEEE D00054 HH TEHE D00056 ZERE ZEEE Polling Time Exit Help H Error Response Time Out 9506 6 1 Device Monitoring To change the polling time and the number of displayed decimal places click Polling Time You can type in the IP address or device address directly Reference On line Help When monitoring Special Protocol symbols the maximum number of symbols to be displayed on the device monitor is restricted to Maximum Number of Read
321. nnnnennnnnnnanenannenennnne 2 6 2 2 2 Exiting Pro Studlo icscccceinccsccsscccsencestccscntescacsecesstncsseceanscecdedectestecesuncrcccsadcesadcescsasencssecevens 2 10 2 2 3 Starting and Exiting Pro Server as assrasrnnvnnannnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnene 2 11 2 3 Screen Item Names and Functions ssssavennnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnne 2 13 Chapter 3 Operation 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes rnnunnnnanunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 3 2 3 1 1 Registering a Network Node rsasensnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnenennenenennenenenne 3 2 3 1 2 Searching a Network Node rasrasvennnnanennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnenennnnanennnnnnennnnenennnnnnnannennn 3 5 3 2 Registering Symbols c cnc ccececsceeosccnsccoeetcesescesenedienstscenecacenceanseacbeneccceneets 3 7 3 2 1 Importing Symbols erasvenenanrnnnnnnnnnennnnennennnennnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnennnnenennene 3 10 3 2 2 Symbol Export easrasnnnnnnnennannnnnnannnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnenennnnnnnannnnnnannenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnennennnnen 3 11 3 2 3 Importing C Package Symbol sserssvennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnennnvnnnennnnennnnennnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnen 3 12 3 2 4 Checking C Package Symbol nerannnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnen 3 16 3 3 Registering Provider Data nsnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
322. nnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennne 3 19 3 3 1 Checking for Provider Data Errors r asessnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennene 3 29 3 3 2 Action IIMS rasenannannnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnenennenenennenenennnnnnnannnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnenennene 3 31 3 4 Using the DDE Function srrassvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnunnnennnnnnennnnennnnennne 3 32 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function assnnrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnenene 3 37 3 6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM raenvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 3 44 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration nssnnasnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennne 3 46 3 7 1 Device Data Backup rrernnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennennnennennnnanennnnanennn 3 46 3 7 2 Restoring Device Data rasrsnnnnnrnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 3 50 3 8 GP Capture Data Saving Function asenraasvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennne 3 53 3 9 Security Function mm msrssssesesnseenennnnknsnann ndnsnnmsdkdnetndnennesnndkemnndnknnkddseen 3 55 3 9 1 User Level Password Settings sr asrnsnrnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennene 3 55 3 9 2 Remote Password Setup rasnernnnnnennnnnvnnnnnernnnnnennnnnennnnnernnnnnennnnnonnnnnennnnnnennnnnonnnnneonnnne 3 57 3 10 Configuring the System sssrrnnn
323. nnot use space in the name Names which start other than sharp are regarded as group names A command may have a parameter You cannot use comma in a parameter You cannot use comma in a template sheet group parameter name A command group template sheet name is not case sensitive Oe LO ON a You can enter up to 255 single byte characters in a command line 10 If a command line name includes the amp ampersand character it may not be displayed on the Command Panel If there is more than one command in a command line the Action will perform each in order one by one If however an error occurs when executing a command the process is terminated at that point For example If GROUP1 GROUP2 GROUP3 are defined in the command line it will be performd in the order of GROUP1 gt GROUP2 GROUP3 However if an error occurred in GROUP2 the process is terminated at that point and GROUP3 will not be performd Moreover if more than one Action area has been registered within one group when group names for those Action areas are same the Action will perform the Action area in turn however if an error occurred mid process the process is terminated at that point and remaining Actions will not be performd Command Description New Book Creation Command New Book Creates a new blank book However an Action report sheet is automatically attached Copy Book Copies a tem
324. nnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnvennnner 3 59 3 11 Configuring the Network ssssvsrrnnnnnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnevnnnnnnnnnnnne 3 61 3 11 1 Configuring Ethernet CardsS r asexasnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennennnnanennnnanennn 3 64 3 12 Printing the Setting Data ranenrnnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnn 3 65 3 13 Other Instructions 425 a keen cenntedes ecdtee sn cennecanseee 3 66 3 13 1 Special ProtoCol sasnasnanenannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnannnnennnnnnennenennnnenennene 3 66 3 13 2 Address for Windows Computer r ersrenarnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnensenennnnenennene 3 68 Chapter 4 Action Items AD QWGRVIOW EE SE 4 2 4 1 1 Action Item Registration rasranvnnannnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnonnenennnnenennenenennenenenne 4 3 4 1 2 Available Action Items asrasrnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnenennennnnannnnnnansenen 4 4 4 2 Registering Action Items srrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnevennnnevnnnnnnnnennnnnnevnnnnnnnenr 4 7 4 2 1 Registering Action Items asrasrnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnanenen 4 7 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters nrasvnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnannenennennnennenenennennnnannnnnnannenen 4 9 4 2 3 Registering Provider Informatio
325. ntents of the selected field are updated Data cannot be edited during Polling Editing Saved Data 1 Click Edit of the Data Edit dialog 2 The Edit button in the Data Edit dialog is dimmed and the Delete Record button appears Data Edit EIE Data Source 22 1 2 3 Append ltem name 2030 2031 2032 Delete Node name GP2300L GP2300L GP2300L Device name 2030 2031 2032 Value 0 000000 0 000000 16 000000 Data Type 16 Bit Si ned 16 BiKSigned 16 Bit Si ltem Status Error Code o Oo Do Data number 1 1 1 Upper Limit 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Alarm Upper Limit 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Alarm Lower Limit 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 112101 1 10 23 PM a a Search 112 01 1 10 24 PM a a Ey 112 01 1 10 25 PM a a 112 01 1 10 26 PM a a 112101 1 10 27 PM a a 112 01 1 10 28 PM a a Delete Record 112101 1 10 29 PM 0 a 112 01 1 10 30 PM a a 112 01 1 40 31 PM a a 112 01 1 10 32 PM a a 111201 1 10 33 PM a a 112 01 1 10 34 PM a a L 4 3 Select the data that you wish to delete and then click Delete Record The selected data will be deleted Click on OK to set the selections made in Edit and or Delete Record Click on Cancel to delete all current selections 7 20 7 2 Device View 7 2
326. ntering the node name IP address sub net mask gateway and PLC type information is described below The node name can be the same as the project file name with the PLC type automatically determined by selecting GP PRO PB III s project file prw To transfer provider data from a GP to the PC you must first register the PC as a network entry node The following description assumes that Pro Studio s main window is open 1 Select Register Node in the Edit E menu A PS Pro Studio EdilE TooktT1 Programming Support Dataview D Configurels View Helpit Project ID UDP Fort Number 1998 10 2015 8000 Register new entry node i NUM F You can right click on the network entry node and select Register Node from the shortcut menu that appears 3 2 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes 2 The Register Node window will appear Change Node Name The default value is GPx It is recommended to use the node name that you can easily understand what is connected When you change Node Name you must follow restrictions described below Select the equipment that you register here for PLC Type Designate IP Address so that it does not overlap with any other addresses Designate SubnetMask and Gateway only when required Enter the necessary data for all the items and cli
327. ntervals to check the device change and to sample data when the status changed Data sampling from start to finish of data reception Designate the intervals to save data before and after the device change occurred and the sampling condition was satisfied Intervals designated here should be longer than the sampling interval 7 2 Device View When You Selected Sampling data when PC was distributed in Sampling method Sampling is executed when PC where Pro Server to sample data runs is distributed The contents of the Condition field are as the following I Sampling method CX Sampling method F Regular Sampling Q Periodic Sampling g Sampling data after change in device Provide Sheet Fil Sampling using cache Data Sampling from start to finish of data reception Polling data record file Change ew Documents tst DB Saving Method fo maximum size Provide Sheet If pre defined Provider information setups exist select it from the pull down list Be sure to set the Provide Information interval to 1000ms or longer Sampling using cache Check this box to use the cache to sample device data Data Sampling from start to finish of data reception Designate the sampling method before and after r
328. nts 4 4 4 1 Overview Automatic Download of Access Data This writes data from the Access file to the designated device data Create the Access table in advance according to the designated format If you set this Action it compares Provider data with table data and writes device data according to the contents designated in a table Download Recipe data for Excel This writes data described in the Excel sheet to the designated device address Writes Data to E Mail You can send e mails without programming You can either use Provider data or choose a message created by Excel in advance as e mail contents to send Upload to the database This reads data at the device address designated by Excel or Access and writes to the designated relational database server When you use Excel data will be directly written to relational database When you use Access data will be written to the Access file once and then to relational database Even if you fail to connect to the relational database previously saved data will be written to relational database next time when the Action is started so no data is lost The table field for designated contents must exist in the designated relational database Download from the database This reads data saved in the relational database server designated by the Excel or Access file and writes to the designated device address When you use Excel data saved in relational database will be directly w
329. o PowerON A Status ON timing ON Time LT Status OFF Interval Rewrite Trigger ah Le b OK Description Please choose the provider s conditions and Upper Edge Trigger Lower Edge Trigger ddi 3 4 Using the DDE Function Cancel Help H Provider Node MELSEC_QNA symbol Length Constant Value Papp Consumer Node s WINDOWS NT Symbol Name MELSEC ONA Symbol Name Consumer Node s Designate the LS area name that the host PC will use You should designate the LS area name that you wish to use among LS LSA LSB LSY and LSZ For detailed Provider information refer to 3 3 Registering Provider Data Designate the LS area inside PC by the application which supports DDE 3 35 3 4 Using the DDE Function Workaround Example 2 for Mass Data Creating an LS Area inside your GP Creating an LS area inside your GP will allow your PC to easily read out data periodically from the GP The setting of this feature allows data to be read out faster This feature also speeds up data writing However you must consider validity to the system because it affects GP s refresh speed LS Area PC GP PLC For registering the read area refer to Device PLC Connection Manual Reference gt Device PLC Connection Manual The GP s LS area will vary depending on the GP sy
330. o create the folder and the folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled 2 When clicking Details the following setting window will appear A setup of details Automatic establishment I Node name O Time setup of a server Server connection time a Sec Retry number of times E Disconnect Time E Min Cancel Automatic establishment Select when Provider s name and or data time are required to be written and enter the target field name s A setup of a server Enter the communication time out time and the number of retries used when connecting to the database server If you have checked If connection request is not received within standard time period connection is terminated in the Upload from the database dialog designate the time allowed until connection is cut with the database server 4 48 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Setting up DSN This example uses Microsoft Access running on Windows 2000 when registering a DSN to the ODBC Data Source 1 Click on Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Data Sources ODBC and the following dialog box will appear ODBC Data Source Administrator GE User Data Sources Name Driver Configure
331. o the database The following table shows the data types that can be designated for the Provider Node symbol name 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Upload to Database Oo O O O O O O O O O O O Action Name Bit Character 4 46 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 1 If you select Upload to Database in the Edit Action dialog box and click Parameter the following dialog box will appear Database information Upload from the database Version 4 10 i OK Login name Password Cancel Server name Driver name SQL Server Help im Normally connected to server animen Enok easke utsende ne EJ i i Lions i 5 Min It accesses a database directly EXCEL CF Indirect accesses a database ACCESS File designation 9 Program Files g Proface Eg Pro Server with Studio NPIDataBase Database information Designate the information required to access the database server Select either SQL Server Oracle ODBC Driver or DSN When Oracle ODBC Driver is selected the server name cannot be set Only Oracle8 is supported For Oracle ODBC Driver use Version 8 0 5 5 0 or later If y
332. od i es Sampling method F C Regular Sampling Periodic Sampling Sampling data after change in device Sampling data when PC was distributed Condition Da Time Count Append Delete Edit ITT gt Polling data record file Change CiMy Documentstst DB Saving Method fo maximum size Delete After selecting unnecessary schedules click Delete to delete selected schedules Append Edit Click these buttons to append or to edit the sampling schedule If you click either the Append button the Designate the data sampling date dialog appears Desig nate each item in the Designate the data sampling date dialog and then click Next i Designate the data sampling date Designate the data sampling date Date Gi Week Of Otten OT Gl Wed OT Gl Pil D ig Ererydey Weekday Hulda Month HEN deg te end ofimantiy A ER 7 36 7 3 GP Viewer Date Designate the date to sample device data Device data are sampled on the day designated here Week Designate a day of a week to sample device data Check the day that you wish to sample device data You can also click Everyday Fri Weekday Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri or Wee
333. ode s SYSLOG Information Settings The correspondence of the Output Level and the output producing SYSLOG Priority level is shown below Output Level SYSLOG Output Priority Level 0 No correspondence 1 INFO 2 INFO NOTICE 3 INFO NOTICE WARNING 4 INFO NOTICE WARNING DEBUG SYSLOG Output Information SYSLOG Level ECOM Response SYSLOG Text INFO Starts ONLINE gp 17 start online INFO Starts OFFLINE gp 17 start offline WARNING Processing Failed gp 1 7 bel fail lt Processing Failed Text gt lt Argument1 gt DEBUG Device Read gp 1 7 rdev lt Argument2 gt DEBUG Device Write gp 17 wdev lt Argument2 gt DEBUG Command Received gp 1 7 bel lt Command Text1 gt recv from lt IP address gt lt port gt lt Argument3 gt DEBUG Command Sent gp 1 7 bel lt Command Text2 gt send to lt IP address gt lt port gt lt Argument3 gt DEBUG 5201 File Read gp 1 7 bel lt Command Text3 gt lt Argument4 gt send to lt IP address gt Failed Processing String Meaning read device Failed in reading from the device write device Failed in writing to the device sync provide response timeout No return data received from the receiver node after providing data sync provide fail to read device Failed in reading from the device when providing data lack memory Command ignored due to insufficient 2 Way driver memory fi
334. of functions available to a user via three different password levels Be sure to write down every password registered so as not to forget it You cannot log on to the system without the correct password 1 Select Password in the Configure S menu RBA PS Pro Studio 0 FilefF EdiE ToolstT Programming Support P Dataview D Configure View HelptHI D4 Elk BIE JERE PS ject ID UDF Fort Number E Network Entry Node Network RE TO 20 15 8000 Pb WINDOWS NT 210 160 181 172 windows Personal Ci GP view I p MELSEC ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC RAICPUI Fom Eb WINDOWS 95 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer I Bg GP230001 10 100 0 100 MEMORY LINK SIO Type et Provider Information g r Action List Setup password NUM A 3 55 3 9 Security Function 2 The Password window appears Specify whether you enable or disable the password check by turning on the corresponding option If you select Enable enter all the items and then click OK Password Disable i OK Enable rAdministrator Mode y Cancel Password Her Confirm pReadirite Wo de Password Confirm Read Only Mode Password Confirm Disconnect Mo d e Password
335. ollowing explanation uses the ProRcp mdb file from the C Program Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK folder as an example ProRcp mdb contains 4 tables the ProRcp table the Datal table the Data2 table and the Data3 table ProRcp Table Recipe DB Master Table If Provider data matches the KEYCODE device data is read to the TBL table in the location described by the MDB cell Example ProRcp Table KEYCODE MDB TBL 1 G YProgram Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb Datal 2 G YProgram Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb Data2 3 G YProgram Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb Data3 KEYCODE Field to be compared with Provider data MDB Field to designate the Access database file including the table designated by TBL If the table to designate is included in the same file where the recipe DB master table is set it can be left blank TBL Designates the table where the write destination node the symbol device address and write data is set For example if Provider data is 1 the contents set in the Data1 table in the C Program Files Pro face Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK ProRcp mdb file will be performed because the first line of KEYCODE matchesthe value Data1 Data2 and Data3 Tables Recipe Information Table Sets the write destination node the symbol device address and write dat
336. on describes the procedure to check the sampling status of device data 1 Select Data Sampling Status on Data View D of the menu bar AM mtom Pro Studio File F Edit E Tools I Programming Support P Dataview D Configure S View Help H CHeSsaset mtom 5 Symbollltem Type Address Data Type Polling Ti ES pil Network Entry Node Open Datavien D eee GP 23000 1010 a ee System time bar Option Toft SR Malde 2 The Data Sampling Status dialog appears The sampling status of each registered database is displayed so that you can check the contents Tip Data Sampling Status File E Option O Registered Database Database Na Access Co l Scan Time Overrun G Status I 20 2 428 a Polling Detail Property File F You can open a database not displayed here or close the Data Sampling Status dialog Option O You can set the Data Sampling Status dialog to be displayed on the front always 7 62 7 4 Checking the Data Sampling Status Registered Database Database Name Database name currently registered Access Count Number of data view e g Device View GP Viewer displaying database Scan Time Time for one samplin
337. on from Excel file to Binary file failed 9879 2697h Conversion from GSV file to Binary file failed 9880 2698h Provided data is outside range A 9 A 2 Error Messages Error Code Meaning Decimal Hex 9881 2699h Failed in GP log data upload 9882 269Ah There is no data to support 9883 269Bh This data requires more than one sheet 9884 269Ch Microsoft Excel is not installed on this machine 9885 269Dh Wrong parameter is designated 9886 269Eh Failed to write data 9887 269Fh Failed to read CSV file 9888 26A0h An error occurred in deleting an unnecessary file 9889 26A1h Action Failed 9891 26A3h No corresponding data in ACCESS file 9892 26A4h Command error 9893 26A5h Failed in automatic upload of ACCESS data 9894 26A6h Cannot open the specified table A 10 A 2 Error Messages A 2 2 2 Way Driver Error Messages and Syslog Features The ECOM task displays the following error information on the lower left of the screen Screen Display Meaning SYSTEM ERROR System call error 2Way ERROR 2 Way Driver error System Errors A system error is a fatal error 2 Way Errors A 2 Way error is an error that has occurred due to the 2 Way Driver When a 2 Way error occurs the 2 Way Transfer Error Code is saved to the GP unit s LS2075 address Syntax 2Way ERROR lt Cause No gt lt Err
338. ook file x xls or an Access database file mdb You can change the device address to read from or database to write to via the Provider data settings Using Excel the data will directly be written to the relational database Using Access data will be tempo rarily saved in a file and then be written to the relational database Even if the attempt to connect to the relational database fails the saved data is not deleted and can be written to the relational database when the Action is triggered again Be sure to create the table fields in the desired relational database Relational Database table1 field1 field2 Uploaded data is written here gt Example Excel Sheet NA EE VEE Je RA gr gre re F Qata Base Table Device _ Field Type DBA table1 D100 field1 2 DBA table1 D101 field2 2 DBB table2 D102 field1 2 Enter titles in cells on the first line Example Access Table EE ES a a ee ed i led a a DataBase Table Device _ Field Type DBA table1 D100 field1 2 DBA table1 D101 field2 2 DBB table2 D102 field1 2 Enter titles in field names 4 45 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters The following describes each Excel sheet and Access table item Data Base Designates the name of database to write to Table Designate the table name of database to write
339. oolbars Fe 3 0 17 320x200 Bend 12 Check Controls in the Toolbars tab and then click Close Customize Ga Commands Toolbars Tools Keyboard Add ins and Macro Files ortos Show Tool ips Wilh shortcut keys Large bultons a Reset All 13 Select ListBox and then paste it in the dialog ListBox u Sample Microsoft Visual C Sample rc IDD_SAMPLE_DIALOG Dialog ES Fie Edt View Insert Project Build Layout Tools Window Help ja s als teja 2r aala Fl D E Sample files Source Files iE Sampleopp E Sample te Lf Std f opp 2 3 Header Files f Resource Sample h SampleDig h Stith A 9 Resource Files JE Sampleico E Sampleac2 eadMetal Workspace Sample 1 project 2 SanpieDla cep Eeee ioc ust2 EjJ Len SELCHANGE FIA EE ea amp E Ready M 45 35 Jr 90x120 A 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 14 Right click the pasted ListBox and then select Property After the ListBox Properties window appears uncheck Sort List Box Properties a Ff General Styles Extended Styles
340. or No 1 gt lt Error No 2 gt lt Error No 3 gt Reason Error Error No kesin Workaround 2 Way Error Code Type Code 1 2 3 Internal problem Please call the support dial when 30 Fatal Unused Unused Unused Insufficient GP resources i P pp FF 30 it occurred 31 Fatal Unused Unused Unused Cannot release GP resources ine poblem Please eae support daLwhen FF31 it occurred 32 Unused Cannot release GP resources niema pobieme Flease call e supportdal when FF32 it occurred Either the GP s IP address or the port number has IP address amp Port number are not s 40 Unused not been set Resetitsuch as on the offline FF40 registered screen The GLC symbol differs from the symbol imported 4 Unised Unused The symbol state is different than to the netw ork projector rozse er Import the FF41 GLC control latest sy mbol to the network project and then transfer itto GLC This means that an error occurred with the GP s communication program TCP IP Indicates that an 51 Unused Unused R efer to protocol Protocol Stack Call up error error occurred with the GP communication FF51 stack error codes program TCP IP Check the contents of the Ethernet setting in the offline screen After tansmit command was sent Ho He Wai anne ia pe rovided Either lengthen the issuing interval of the Unused 2580 Device Read was ignored due to P 9 9 2580 i prov ider
341. or other two EditBox s However you should designate their member variables as m_Edit2 and m_Edit3 respectively Add Member Variable Member variable name Value Category F Variabl h rt le type Deseri 38 Click OK ption short with range validation MFC ClassWizard Message Maps Member Variables Automation Aclive lt Events Clase Info Project Eamee E Esame F Class name Control Ds CA Wo S amples S ampleDlg h C 4 4 chSamplesSampleDig cpp Type Member m Edie Add Class Add Variable Delete Variable le allyrnps Description Magimum Wah Minimum Value short with range validation lue 9 73 39 Select Button and paste it to Dialog 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function w rset Proje f ouda s on a CS ampleDlg El IDC BUTTON JEJ EN Cucren E H Source Files E Sample cpp i E Samplerc SampleD ig cap Std fs cpp leader Files Resource Files E FeadMe tet EE gult DEES ker Jer y 3 ies 397 JEG M g
342. orm the setting on GP PRO PB III for Windows and transfer it to GP GLC J Register entry nodes of data source and PCs where the action actually runs Open the Edit Action dialog select Create Report using Excel and then click Parameter p Designate the action area in the template book _ Adding Frequently used command lines have command lines been set by default You can add your Define the action for which part is created at what timing when action area AL Designating the data type of the action area D eH i 2 Command setup Own command lines eee eee 3 Using the Creating provider information La a n 2 i provider feature using the provider wizard D ee 3 gt Using the Command panel Y Transferring the network project file to GP GLC creating the report When executing the action using provider provider and the Creating the command panel layout When executing the action manually from PC System Operation Start Using the provider feature I Form the providing condition by touching the GP GLC screen j Using the command panel Click the command panel button J The action is executed You can use both command panel 4 66 4 4 1 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Registration Procedure of Create report using Excel Action The following d
343. ou should set the bit 4 of GP s LS2076 to ON 1 to switch screens in the Full Synchronous mode from upper level PCs Refresh Screen Data If you changed the GP screen contents click Refresh Screen Data GP Viewer re captures the setup contents of the GP system 7 47 7 3 5 Playback Feature 7 3 GP Viewer This feature allows you to playback sampled device data on GP Viewer 1 Select Open Data View Q on Data View D of the menu bar mtom ll Provider Information Si Action List EF Network Entry Node me E00 010 100 0 591 MEMORY LINK S S mtom Pro Studio File E EdtE Took I Programming SupportlE Dataviem D Configurets View HelplH Dj bl 86 Device View GP Viewer Symbolfltem Data Sampling Status System lime bar Option Type f Address Data Type Polling Ti THEO APIECE WMA Ot 2 The Open dialog appears Select the device data 4DV that you wish to playback and then click Open Open Look in I E My Documents a ES File name EJ Files of type l Cancel p You can also playback data in the saving process 7 48 7 3 GP Viewer 3 The contents of sampled data are displayed on
344. ou use an older version the A reverse set does not support a reverse scroll message will appear and the Action will quit exit DSN supports only Microsoft Access For setting information refer to the following Setting up DSN section When DSN is selected do not enter any data for the server name Do not use the search feature while the Microsoft Access Design view is open Normally connected to server If you wish to connect to the server all the time check Normally connected to server If connection request is not received within standard time period connection is terminated If you wish to disconnect from database when there is no communication with the server for a certain period of time check this item This can be set only if Normally connected to server is checked Designate the time period in Min box 4 47 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Database Access Method Select whether to write to the database at once Excel or to write to the database after saving data Access File designation Designate a file location and a sheet table name If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents exactly as you designated is displayed If the folder does not exist the following window appears Book Location Folder does not exist C AMy DocumentstD ata Do you create new folder Click Yes t
345. ous modes available Full Synchronous GP Synchronous and Asynchronous The following de scribes the detail of each style Asynchronous Screens can be switched on GP Viewer Switching a screen on GP Async Viewer does not synchronize with a screen on the GP system GP Synchronous Screens cannot be switched on GP Viewer Switching a screen on the GP GP Sync system synchronizes with a screen on GP Viewer This is the default setting Full Synchronous Screens can be switched on GP Viewer Switching a screen on GP Full Sync Viewer synchronizes with a screen on the GP system and vice versa Screen No This feature allows you to change the displayed screen of GP Viewer according to screen numbers pre defined on the GP system If you click Previous the previous screen from the currently displayed screen is displayed and the value in the Screen No field is deceased by one If you click Next the next screen from the currently displayed screen is displayed and the value in the Screen No field is increased by one If you enter the screen number that you wish to display in the Screen No field and click Set the corresponding screen to the number entered is displayed e The screen switching feature of GP Viewer is effective only when the synchronous mode is either Asynchronous or Full Synchronous You cannot normally switch screens by GP Viewer from upper level PCs Y
346. p Excel display No Excel display G Attaches a Time Stamp in front of data Attaches a Time Stamp behind data Time stamp is not used Select a Data Write Pattern Designate the sheet write pattern Data is written on cells within a sheet according to the designated write pattern Write Data Range If you wish to limit the write range to a single sheet check Use designated range If you click Use Excel sheet the following dialog box will appear and Excel will start Please push O K after choosing the range by Microsoft Excel Please do nat close a sheet After designating the write range in Excel shown below click OK in the above dialog box This sets the designated range as the data write range E E i dere en alese 2 l When the designated data write range is filled with data a new sheet is automatically created and the write process is continued on a newly created sheet 4 2 Registering Action Items High Speed Data Write After you check Append data to Book as the data saving method in the Setting Parameters dialog box and designate the write cell range Utilizes high speed data write is enabled High speed data write uses the designated data write cell location to start writing which speeds up the writing process
347. pa Dim uDatald s Restart Shig A El oa whatalQ Clot Textl Text ubataiij CInt Text2 Text wets OTe Tee Tar 33 After entering three data to write in TextBox click Command1 to write three data form the symbol _D40_WORD Formi ial eg Command1 When using VB NET if you insert the declaration according to this proce dure an error will occur when executing it You cannot use VBA Declaration directly because data sizes of Integer or Long are different between VB NET and Visual Basic VBA Declaration is for Visual Basic or Basic for Application 9 57 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 9 2 2 VC Function Help This section describes how to create the dialog based application example using MFC Microsoft Foundation Class VC Declaration 1 Start Microsoft Visual C and then click New on File Microsoft Visual C File Edit View Insert Project Build Tools Window Help Open Workspace Save Workspace Close workspace Save Ceres Save as Save All Page Setup amp Dirt Chee Recent Files r Recent Workspaces gt Exit 2 Select MFCAppWizard exe in the Projects tab enter Project name and Location and then click OK This example uses Sample for Project name and C Program Files Pro Server with Studio Pro SDK VC for Location New HB Files Projects Wo
348. plate book newly and creates an output book This command functions equally as New Book Copy Sheets When you create a new book an error will occur and exit the process if there are no template books existing New Sheet Creation Command Copy Sheets Creates copies of all template sheets within a template book in an output book Copy Sheet Template Sheet Name Creates a copy of the template sheet designated by Template Sheet Name within a template book in an output book There must be more than one blank space between Copy Sheet and Template Sheet Name 4 81 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action For example if Template Sheet Name is Sheet1 the command should be Copy Sheet Sheet1 If the designated Template Sheet Name does not exist in a template book an error will occur and the setup will quit exit Print Command Print Book Prints all sheets other than an Action template sheet in an output book Print Sheet Template Sheet Name Seid Prints the last created sheet based on the template sheet designated by Template Sheet Name in an output book There must be more than one blank space between Print Sheet and Template Sheet Name Executing a Macro Run Macro Name Performs the macro designated by Macro Name There mu
349. pleDlg OnQueryDragIcont ag HCURSOR m_hIcon CSampleDlg OnButtonli WORD vDatal 31 ReadDevicei6 GP2 DO0040 WORD wData F y rect Height cylcon 1 7 2 ve The systen calls this to obtain the cursor to display while the user drags 3 RE 28 Convert read data to CString type characters once to display three read data wData 0 wData 1 wData 2 in the ListBox SampleDlg cpp 19 CDialog OnPaint 3 77 the nininized window HCURSOR CSampleDlg OnQueryDragIcont t HCURSOR n_hIcon H CSampleDlg OnButton1 WORD wDatel3l ReadDewicel GP2 _DO0040_ WORD wData CString str 3 za str 0 Formati sd wData 0 stx 1 Format d wData 1 str 2 Format d wData 2 va The system calls this to obtain the cursor to display while the user drags 3 ES gi 9 69 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 29 Set three data read wData 0 wData 1 wData 2 in the ListBox one after another SampleDIg cp v7 The systen calls this to obtain the cursor to display while the user drags vf the ninimiged window HCURSOR CSampleDlg OnQueryDragIcon t HCURSOR m_hIcon CSanpleDig OnButtoni ORD wDatal3 ReadDevicel GP2 _DO0040__WORD wData 3 CString str 3 str O Format xd wData 0 str l Format d
350. r a specific period of time elapses click on the Specified Time checkbox If you checked Specified Time you should also designate the end time to export Device Condition This is the reserved data You should not change the designated value Export Header If you wish to include the header information in exported data check Yes If not check No Export Executes the data export Cancel The process is stopped and goes back to Device View Although you can start multiple Device View programs you cannot export data simultaneously Data can be exported during Polling However if the Designate maximum size Save over oldest data selection is used data export cannot be performed Saving Data 1 If you wish to save displayed data on Device View click Save S on the File F menu Data are overwritten If you wish to save displayed data on Device View as a separate file name click Save As A on the File F menu The Save As dialog appears Enter the file name and then click Save Print 1 Click Print on the File F menu The printing process is executed 7 29 7 2 Device View Page Setup 1 Click Page setup P on the File F menu 2 The Print Setup dialog appears Designate each item and then click OK Print Setup Printer Name Properties
351. r condition becomes effective only during that period After providing this device check ON After Providing to turn it ON automatically Also enter the interval ms to check device values Provider Completion Settings Tab This tab s settings are enabled only when the 2 Way Driver is Ver 4 10 or later Providing Condition Provider Completion Settings Receive Alert Settings Detailed 4 J1 Provider Completion Device QO sell peime Denie Resat O Seto afer Peseta Pioider Satinge Provider Result Storage Bit Device Prowider Error Code Storage Device Consumer IP Address Storage Device Provider Completion Device Sets 0 or 1 to the designated device at provider completion If you wish to reset the provider completion device automatically by the 2 Way system when providing conditions are reset check Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings Provider Completion Device supports all data types If Provider Completion Device is not designated nothing will be set If provider completion device write failed 3 times continuously an error occurs When one of condition a through c is satisfied provider is regarded as being completed a If the Reply Check option in the Detailed Settings tab is checked this feature indicates that a response was received from all providers or indicates that polling termination was performed after the Provider Timeo
352. r differs from the previous amount 9735 2607h Reserved 9739 260Bh 9740 260Ch The GP is busy sending screen data or saving SRAM backup data to another PC 9741 260Dh An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data The item ID differs from the previous ID 9742 260Eh An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data The data type differs from the previous type 9743 260Fh An error occurred in reading the SRAM backup data The block No differs from the previous No 9744 2610h SRAM backup data read error The requested data amount is 0 or differs from the previous amount 9745 2611h i Reserved 9749 2615h 9750 2616h CF command error 9751 2617h CF Access error 9752 2618h No CF card unit 9753 2619h Reserved 9779 2633h 9780 2634h Transmission error occurred with PLC during data write Code 02x 04x 9781 2635h The designated SRAM backup data is not in the GP 9782 2636h The GP s SRAM backup data is incorrect Code 04x 9783 2637h Reserved 9789 263Dh 9790 263Eh No remote access right not connected remotely 9800 2648h Parameter error 9801 2649h Data count is over 9802 264Ah File create error 9803 264Bh EXCEL sheet create error 9804 264Ch Write file error 9805 264Dh File open error 9806 264Eh Read only file 9807 264Fh Print out error 9808 2650h Save folder access error 9809 2651h Reserved 9810 2652h Unable to find message table file 9811 2653h Unable to open
353. r for Pro Server the feature access path is not supported by OPC Server and no setting is required Enter VARIANT for the Data Type Since certain OPC Servers do not support VARIANT be sure to confirm this setting before entering This data for example can be used for the 1 byte signed data type After entering and registering the above items teh OPC Client will connect to the OPC Server and begin collecting data 10 6 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 Appendices DDE Function Details Error Messages Scale Conversion using Excel GP Ethernet Settings Optimizing Communication Speed Changing Windows XP Security Level A 1 DDE Function Details A 1 DDE Function Details The Pro Server software contains the DDE server function and can therefore exchange data with applications that support the DDE client function A 1 1 DDE Address Sending receiving data to from the DDE server is accomplished by specifying an address that consists of three components the application name the topic name and the item name Address components required for connecting to a DDE server Application Name The name of the DDE server application To have access to Pro Server data use the name PROSERVR Topic Name ceeeeee The name of the data group in the DDE server In Pro Server specify the node name of the GP on the network Item Name cee The actual data name used in the data group on t
354. ramming Support P are Function Data View D Configuels View HelplH YC Declare Function YE tiles unea YE lead funeri hege Action List Project ID UDP Fort Number 2001 10 27 16 8000 Pra Gerver API Declaration statement for use by VBA is copied to clip board 2 The declaration is copied to the Clipboard Option Explicit ProEasy TXT Pro Server API Declarations for Visual Basic Copyright C 1998 2001 Digital Electronics Corporation FraEasy DLL etc This string was copied to the clip board Please paste and use in your application 9 45 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 3 Start up Microsoft Visual Basic and then click New Project on File from the menu Microsoft isual Basic Edit Vier Project Format lla Open Project Ctrl O Add Project Remprebjsjest Fame Pjajest Sare Pi ujett s mu ae kand pe SHS T Sane Selection Fane Fange Zip EG Bk se EY Frit Seto Mela Pigiact Sjorpuu Exit Alk O 4 Select Standard EXE and then click OK New Project Actives EXE Activex DLL Active Contral x SH 3 VB Application vB Wizard Data Project 115 Application Wizard Manager MM Hm H ActiveX Activex DHTML Document Dil Document Exe Application Ele Edt Wew Project Format Debug Run Query Di
355. ration Application Interfaces Provider Information Outline Overview of Data View Configuring the System 1 1 Outline E E E E gt gt E gt E gt gt E gt gt E_ i gt i gt SSSSSSaaaaS 1 1 Outline The Pro Server software reads writes collects data to and from PLC and GP s data via a network Ethernet Pro Server on your PC lets you use commercially available application software or programs you have created to read write collect data on the GPs and PLCs connected to the network It can also save and playback Playback Feature the saved data 1 2 1 2 What is the 2 Way Driver 1 2 What is the 2 Way Driver The 2 Way Driver is software that allows the host PC to access data on GPs or PLCs connected to a network Ethernet One advantage of this software is that you can transfer data to the host PC regardless of type of PLC being used To use the 2 Way function Pro Server software and an Ethernet compatible GP unit are required PC I Ethernet U D GP PLC for PLC for Manufacturer A Manufacturer B The GP reads and writes data via the 2 Way driver only when it is not serving as a display and operation panel which is its first priority Also reading or writing a large volume of data may cause the GP to temporarily stop refreshing its display 1 3 1 3 System Configuration 1 3 System Configuration 1 3 1 External Configuration p e Pro Studio allows you to ea
356. re screer like display on a special browser using data collection from a GP unit via an Ethernet connection Select which language you wish to use in the Setup program English or Japanese and click OK Choose Setup Language Select the language for this installation from the choices below InstalledShield Wizard dialog will start InstallShield Wizard ReGen nih Fe Glucls far wikis Setup bb presenting the eLp pees Fess i P Wien a oil gutta geu leugh fines coat af ha Pro Server with Pro Server for Windows V4 5 Setup dialog appears Click on the Next button Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows 4 5 Setup Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows The InstallShield Wizard will install Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows on your computer To continue Click Next Cancel 8 2 1 Installing the Software Software License Agreement appears Click Yes when you agree with all contents de scribed here Software License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement Please be sure to fully read and understand all the following terms and conditions tor this E software product IF you do not agree to the terms of this license please return the package product e g I medium recording the softw
357. rea designated by the template book When Pro Server finds the write area it writes values in cells of the output book according to the settings If there is more than one write area in the template book it writes to all write areas you cannot designate the write order If an output book contains more than one sheet created from the same template sheet the latest sheet will be written For example if there are template sheets Sheet1 and Sheet 2 including Group1 in the template book and that Sheet1 1 Sheet1 2 and Sheet1 3 were created from Sheet1 and Sheet2 1 was created from Sheet 2 in the output book If you perform Group1 in this situation data will be written in Sheet1 3 and Sheet2 1 in the output book Group Name String If the Data ID of the Action area is character strings character strings are written in the cell Character strings are designated next to a group name as String parameter Insert a space between a group name and character strings You cannot use commas in String 4 83 4 4 6 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Creating Command Panel Manual Start To create write data to the output book according to the contents designated in the template you must perform the command to start the Action The Command Panel is the toolbar like dialog box used to issue the Perform the command on PCs You can perform Actions ea
358. registered databases are read As a result if a large number of databases are registered Pro Server s startup will be slowed and can result in the use of a large amount of system resources As a result please be sure to delete any temporary databases that are no longer used from the Network Project s registry To do this open Pro Studio s DataView D menu s Data Sampling Status dialog box Click on the unneeded database names and press your PC keyboard s Delete key Even though this deletes the database from the Network Project the data base itself is not deleted If needed the database file can reopened by simply re registering it in the Network Project 7 3 7 2 Device View 7 2 Device View Device View allows you to sample data from devices connected to Ethernet to monitor the status or to playback saved device data on Device View You can also view non sequential devices or devices of multiple entry nodes at one time 7 2 1 Setting Sampling Target Device This section describes how to designate the device that you wish to sample data After you completed the setup you can monitor data of the target device 1 After selecting the entry node that you wish to sample data click Device View on the Data View D menu of the Menu Bar 4 mtom Pro Studio FilelE EdtE Toob Programming SupportP DataviewtD Contiguel viewty Helplt mace Ea mom GF Network Entry Node Open DataView O
359. ritten to the designated device address When you use Access data saved in relational database will be written to the Access file once and then to the designated device address Upload of JPEG Data This takes in capture data of a GP screen online to your PC If a VM unit is mounted on a GP you can also take in video capture data You must set the filing feature on GP PRO PB III for Windows in advance and transfer it to GP of the Provider node Writes Data to CSV file This writes designated Provider data to a CSV format file 4 5 4 1 Overview Writes Data from CSV file Writes data from the designated CSV file to the designated device address Create Report using Excel You can create a Excel book that includes a variety of information that is based on PLC device data GP screen data or backup data within GP You can also create various reports such as a work report or an error report Available data types will differ depending on the Action Item to be used The following table shows data types that can be designated as a Provider node symbol name EET 16 Bits 32 Bits Single Double Charac enon Name Bit Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Signed Unsigned HEX BCD Precision Precision Start Application O O O O O O O O O O O O Writes Data to Excel Book O O O O O O O O O O O O Alarm Log with Sound Alert Feature Upload of GP Log Data O O O O O O O O O O O x O O O O O O O O O O O x A
360. rkspaces Other Documents l win3 Static Library Project name Sample Location e PROGRAM FILESSPRO FAC Create new workspace C dalh ta auent vendes Dspsndenay afk Platfors pe 9 58 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 3 Select Dialog based in the What type of application would you like to create field and then click Finish MFC AppWizard Step 1 Application ZI What type of application would you like to create O Single document Multiple documents Dialog based Documenten sites supp What language would you like your resources in Engish United States APPWZENLIDLL lt Back Next Finish Cancel 4 Click OK to complete the project Application type of Sample wing Classes to be created Features About box on sprtem menu 30 Controls Localizable text iri English United States Dialog Based Application targeting New Project Information x Appwizard will create a new skeleton project with the following specifications Application CSampledpp in Sample h and Sample cpp Dialog CSampleD lg in Sample Dlg h and Sample Dla cpp Uses shared DLL implementation HFE42 DLL Active Control support enabled Project Directory STUDIO PRO SDKWICSS ample cAPROGRAM FILESSPRO FACESPRO SERVER WITH ae em 5 Pro S
361. rm block 3 8 Alarm block 4 9 Alarm block 5 10 Alarm block 6 11 Alarm block 7 12 Alarm block 8 13 or above Reserved SaveMode Saving Method No Mode Note 0 St dat fil If the file exists deletes the existing ores data as a new Me contents and overwrites data Appends data to an If the file does not exist creates a new 1 existing file file 9 18 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Backup Data s Write Function Single INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataWrite LPCTSTR sSourceFileName LPCTSTR sNodeName INT BackupDataType Multi INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataWriteM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR sSourceFileName LPCTSTR sNodeName INT BackupDataType lt Function gt Writes the designated binary file to SRAM within GP lt Argument gt HProServerPro Server handle sSourceFileName File path for the value to be written to the GP s SRAM sNodeName Node name of GP to be written to Node must be previously registered as a Pro Server Network Project BackupDataType Designates the type of write file Must be the EasyBackupDataType_FILING type filing data supported by Ver 2 0 lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Write Error Error Code Entry Node Status Read Function Single INT WINAPI GetNodeProperty LPCTSTR sNodeName DWORD dwTimeLimit LPCTSTR GPType LPCTSTR SystemVersion LPCTSTR ComVersion LPCTSTR ECOM Version Multi INT WINAPI Ge
362. roject file k npj The following description assumes that Pro Studio s main window is open 1 Click Search Active Node in the Tools T menu SLA PS Pro Studio HOT FilE Edt Tools T Programming Support DataviemtD Configure S Viem Help H Dizi En APS Spmballltem Type Address Data Type Poling Ti EE Network Transfer Network Project 2040 Wo Local D40 T6Bi Signed 1000 Bw inporsyntel D WORD Local D t 16 Bilsined 1000 Geil Export Symbol flg WIN Cam gpi npot CPackage Symbol Check C Package Symbol 4 Provider Action Li Status Monitor Dere Remote Logon Remote Logott Device Backup Dewice Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway z F Search active node s via network D NUM A Use this function to automatically search for the nodes connected to the network It allows you to register network nodes easily since information such as the PLC type is retrieved and entered automatically by Pro Studio 2 The following dialog box will appear To register any of the detected nodes click first the Node Status Non Entry text then the Entry button Search Nodes Node Status IP Address PLC Type Non Entry 10 100 0 99 GP HITACHI Nor Entry 10 100 0 24 _ Windows
363. rorCode LPTSTR osErrorMessage lt Function gt Converts error codes returned by Pro Server s various functions to error messages lt Return value gt Other than 0 Executed successfully 0 Failed in character string conversion e g unused error code lt Arguments gt iErrorCode Error code returned by Pro Server s functions osErrorMessage Pointer to the storage area for converted character strings Secure the area more than 512 bytes Reference gt Appendix Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Error Messages 9 17 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function Reading SRAM Backup Data Single INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataRead LPCTSTR sSaveFileName LPCTSTR sNodeName INT BackupDataType INT SaveMode Multi INT WINAPI EasyBackupDataReadM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR sSaveFileName LPCTSTR sNodeName INT BackupDataType INT SaveMode lt Function gt Reads SRAM data of GP GLC and stores in files on PCs lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code lt Arguments gt sSaveFileName Pointer to the path name and file name string of the estination storage file sNodeName Pointer to the node name string BackupDataType Types of Readout Data No Type 0 Reserved 1 Filing Data 2 Logging data 3 Line data 4 Sampling data 5 Alarm block 1 6 Alarm history data Alarm block 2 7 Alarm log data Ala
364. rring Data to GPS nnrnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnner 5 2 Chapter 6 Tools 6 1 Device Monitoring s rxannnnvennnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvennnnnvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnen 6 2 6 2 GP Status Monitoring ersassanannnannananannnnnnnnnannnnanannnnnnnnnannnnanennnanennnnnnnnannannan 6 5 6 3 Read Performance Measuring Tool rxassvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 6 7 64 Log VIGWer Lasagne id mmes 6 10 6 4 1 2Way Log Viewer ernannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannenennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennennnennennnennennnnanennnnanennn 6 10 6 4 2 Pull Down Menu of Each Log Viewer Menu srrasvrnnnvnnnvennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnvnnnnvnnnennnnennnnene 6 12 6 4 3 Switching Between Online and Offline Modes nrrasenannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnannenennnee 6 14 Chapter 7 Data View 7 1 Data View Overview srrrrrannnnrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvennnnnvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnevnnnnnevnnnnnnnnenn 7 2 72 Device VIEW nina bad aada ia dakan da paaa anada iaa aeaii aaa need 7 4 7 2 1 Setting Sampling Target Device nrranrnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnene 7 4 7 2 2 Setting the Data Sampling Condition rseasenannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnennnnnnennennnnannnnnnaneenen 7 9 7 2 3 Editing Sampled Data rasnvrnnnnnernnnnnovnnnevnnnnnernnnnnnnnenevnnnnnennnnnonnnnnnevnnnonennnnennnnnennnnnenennnne 7 18 72 4 gt QDMOM E E T T A E TS 7 21 7 2
365. rst trigger on The command to enable the first trigger failed second trigger on The command to enable the second trigger failed backup data read Failed in reading the backup data Command String 1 Contents response Receives the response sync provide Provides the data read device Reads from the device write device Writes to the device get node property Reads the node property first trigger on Enables the first trigger second trigger on Enables the second trigger backup data read Reads the backup data A 13 A 2 Error Messages Command String 2 Contents sync provide broadcast Provides the data Broadcast no response sync provide send each Provides the data Peer to Peer no response sync provide broadcast and wait for response Provides the data Broadcast with response sync provide send each and wait for response Provides the data Peer to Peer with response sync provide response Provide data response read device response Device read response write device response Device write response write device response retry Write to device Retry response get node property response Read node property response first trigger on response First trigger enable response second trigger on response Second trigger enable response backup data read response Read backup data response Command String 3 Contents
366. rt 2002710701 19 48 28 Excel Report ACTIONT Show Action End 2002710701 19 48 51 Excel Report ACTIONT Show Action Start 2002 10 01 19 48 51 Excel Report ACTIONT Show Action End 2002 10 01 19 52 40 Excel Report ACTION 1 Show Action Start 20024 0701 19 52 40 Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action End 20024 0701 19 52 52 Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action Start 20024 0701 19 52 52 Excel Report ACTION1 Show Action End Displays dates and times when logs occurred Status Bar Displays the log level Displays log messages Action There are 8 kinds of the log level names designated on Pro Studio are also displayed e SysMsg System message e SysErr System error message e Error Error messages of user defined programs e Start Starting messages of user defined programs End Ending messages of user defined programs e Warning Warning messages of user defined programs Message1 Detailed messages 1 of user defined programs Message2 Detailed messages 2 of user defined programs Title Bar Displays the name of the opened log file 21g Menu Bar Displays menus to operate Log Viewer If you click those using a mouse pull down menus will be dis played Tool Bar Displays icons of frequently used commands If you click those icons commands will be executed Status Bar Displays messages for operations 6 4 Log Viewer 6 4 2 Pull Down Menu of Each Log
367. rt this software you must use the Setup program step 2 below 1 Insert the CD ROM into your PC s CD ROM drive 2 Click the Start button and when the Start menu appears select Run Fea Programs L Documents k Ea Settings k AI Eind Ooo D amp Hel Help T Shut Down 3 Type D 2WSetup exe and then click OK D represents the drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive Z Type the name of program folder or document and Windows will open it for you Oper D ASetup exe Fr DK Cancel i Browse The master CD ROM supports the AutoPlay feature which means inserting it into your CD ROM drive will automatically start the Setup program 2 2 2 1 Installing the Software 4 The installation menu appears Click the Pro Server with Pro Studio Setup bar 5 6 7 ES GP Viewer Trial Edition FGWConfIg Setup GP PROIPB Ill 2 Way Driver Update i j 5 OPGPRO Setup Tutorial ProServer ag eg End Setup GP Viewer Trial Version contains Playback feature of recorded data This software can only be used on a PC with the Pro Server software It is designed to create a GP and the Pro Studio software Also collected data can be viewed again via the GP Viewer s Playback featu
368. s 9396 24B4h CF Card is not inserted 9397 24B5h CF Card is not initialized 9398 24B6h CF Card is damaged 9399 24B7h Unable to access the designated file 9400 24B8h The function of Pro Easy DLL was doubly called up 9401 24B9h The specified access handle for Pro Server is not effective 9402 24BAh Pro Server has stopped and can not perform processing 9403 24BBh The error occurred in the function of OLE Data cannot be converted 9404 24BCh The effective data for the specified data type variant does not exist in the original data or is not enough 9405 24BDh Original data and destination data types cannot be converted by data type variant 9406 24BEh The specified argument is not enabled 9407 24BFh Can not create the time bar 9408 24C0h The symbol name is not registered 9409 24C1h Public memory of provide sheet could not open 9410 24C2h The specified time bar has already been locked 9411 24C3h The specified handle has already been linked 9412 24C4h The specified handle is not linked 9413 24C5h The specified handle is not linked to the database 9414 24C6h Specified handle is locked or played Please excute after clearing to its status 9415 24C7h Designate the internal format of the argument s Variant as either date type or comatible with date 9416 24C8h The specified time is out of the valid range 9417 24C9h The invalid argument has been set 9418 24CAh Databas
369. s data will once be written once as Access file and then be written into the specified device address es Example Excel Sheet mm ee ee Data Base Table Device _ Field Type DBA table1 D100 field1 2 DBA table1 D101 field2 2 DBB table2 D102 field1 2 Enter titles in cells on the first line Example Access Table Gata Base Table Device I Field I Te DBA tablet D100 field1 2 DBA tablet D101 field2 2 DBB table2 D102 field1 2 Enter titles in field names Table Example in Database Contents of table1 in DBA database name seqNo F1 F2 F3 1 y 100 110 130 This value will be acquired read if you designate C gt Ti 1011 T4414 4 31 field1 as the field name 3 102 112 132 4 103 113 133 If 2 is designated as the seqNo to read by the Provider data this row of data will be read 4 51 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters The following describes each item in the Excel sheet and the Access table Data Base Designate the name of database to be read Table Designate the table name of database to be read Device Designate the name of device to be read Field Designate the field of device to be read Type Designate the data type of data to be read Data types are designated by the following values
370. s Monitor GP2300L1 Node 5P2300L1 IP Address GP Type System Version PLO Type 2 Way Version Project ID UDP Port Tag Scan Time Communication Token MAX Current Token ms ms ms ms Way Error Clear Setting Exit Help H If you click Clear the following communication error codes will be cleared e PLC communication error code PLC communication error code for an extension 2 Way communication error code LS2039 LS2070 LS2075 Reference gt A 2 2 2 Way Driver Error Messages and Syslog Features Set the polling time and then click OK Polling Timeims 5000 The polling time set for collecting or writing data for each symbol distrib uting data and monitoring devices may not be able to be performed under certain conditions These conditions include the number of currently reg istered GPs number of Tags used on each screen sent type of PLC con nection and number of other currently open Windows software Entering 0 will allow the system to operate at its maximum speed Please use this value as a benchmark when entering other values to fine tune your system 6 6 6 3 Read Performance Measuring Tool 6 3 Read Performa
371. s registered on Pro Server Select the heading symbol to read from 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function amp Project Pro Studio fm Fie Edit E Tools I Programming Support P Datawiew D GConfigue 5 Yiew V Helplt DB Ei ler S 7 Project pe Addes Datatype Poling A Network Entry Node Local D00040 16 Bit Signed 1000 gla GPT 10 100 0 10 OMRON SYSMACE SERIES 4 Local D00041 16 BillSigned 1000 OG GP2 10 100 0 11 MITSUBISHI MELSECAnA LINK P00042 WORD Local DO0082 16 Bi Signedj 1000 amp WINDOWS 10 100 0 20 Windows Personal Computer fe Provider Information gi Action List 4 b Help is Fi key i NUMI F 21 Click VC Read Function on Programming Support of the menu amp ProjectA Pro Studio fm Fief Edit E Took Programming Support IP Dataview D Configures View VI HelplH Ola T WBA Declare Function WBAcWrite function Projects WBAcRead function Type Addes Data Type Polling Be 1 Network Entry Nod Local D00040 TB Bit Signed 1000 Ila GPA 10 1000 WC Declare Function 000041 WORD Local D0004 16 BillSigned 1000 mdr GPZM0 100 00 WE write functions INK 000042 WORD Local DO00 2 16 Bit Signed 1000 fi Provider Informatics a hege Action List DDE Shing Copy 4 b The read command sentence for Visual C by the data type
372. sic NET design Formi vb Design File Edit View Project Build Debug Data Tools Window Help H eo lk Selo o B B gt bog E el fleas alma e E o e sl e bt a e aT znl Form1 b Design wi Data Components ml EE m Ivindows Forms I a Clipboard Ring ceneral Pointer 9 82 10 11 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function Place two Buttons and two TextBoxes on Form1 SG EasySample Microsoft Yisual Basic NET design Formi vb Design File Edit wiew Project Build Window Help e Saglio 0 8 0 mm H re amp ajm ot 2 th Sl fy one te we S at at er Debug Data Format Tools t t t Toolbox 2 2 Formi vb Design l Formiwb Data Components Windows Forms hk Pointer A Label LinkLabel E abl mi iy Button TextBox MainMenu CheckBox RadioButton faroupBox Right click on the Buttons and TextBoxes and select Properties Enter Write for Button1 s Text property and Read for Button2 s Text property Delete TextBox1 and TextBox2 s default Text property values Set TextBox2 s ReadOnly property to True Buttoni System Windows Forms Bu Fl Cursor Els El BackgroundImage Default FlatStyle
373. signated output book 6 2 in the figure below For details of operations you can use refer to 4 4 2 Information Available in the Report Register the action area in the report template created by Excel to create the template book Template book Template book created by Excel Action area Create Report using Excel Action N 1 Creates If the action receives the command for the first time the action reads information from the template book copies the output book J Sends the command The action analyzes the command and execute it Output book from GP GLC and writes to the output book _ GP data 4 65 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Flow from System Design to Operation Using Create Report using Excel Action verall System Designing Stage O Pro Server Designing Stage Operation Stage Creating the prototype by Excel while considering the report format Planning the data sampling method Registering entry nodes in the network project Selecting the Create Report using Excel action Designating the template and output books i Y Editing the template book Inserting the This becomes the template book If you save data in GP GLC you must perf
374. sily designate a PLC device as a symbol Pro Studio e Designate a symbol using Excel e Pro Server SCADA software and VB applications and Pro Server can Ethernet easily read that data out ap gp 2 Way Gp Driver 2 Way function The 2 Way Driver translates PLC protocols allowing data exchange y between many types of PLCs PLC for PLC for PLC for Manufacturer A Manufacturer B Manufacturer C Pro Studio Performs Network project file editing setting This software is used to set and register symbols for the GPs and PLCs designated as data providers Physical IP addresses PLC device addresses etc can all be converted into symbols Pro Server Performs Data exchange between applications and GPs This software that communicates with GPs according to the requests made by Excel VB SCADA or other applications 2 Way Driver Protocol conversion driver built into GPs This driver selects the applicable PLC protocol based on the Pro Server read write command GP77R series units requires setup and then transfer to the GP unit via the screen editor software GP2000 and GLC2000 series unit 2 Way Driver software is factory installed 1 4 1 3 System Configuration 1 3 2 Internal Configuration Off line Inside your PC information such as node names of the connected GPs symbol names for accessing the PLC devices and information read from the GPs is all set up and controlled via
375. sily by simply assigning the command line registered in the Settings dialog to the button on the Command Panel and clicking the button You can perform commands also by using Provider information in addition to using the Command Panel described here For how to use Provider information refer to 4 4 7 Registering Provider Information Auto Start When you perform commands with the Command Panel the PC that performs the Command Panel becomes the provider Node and the action is performed The contents described here correspond to the procedures described in 4 4 1 Registration Procedure of Create Report using Excel Action 1 If you click Settings in the Edit Template dialog the Settings dialog will appear I Settings Auto Stari Manual Start Command Start Timin Settings 9 Use Command Panel PC Screen g te Register ta Panel when adding Command i Panel Layout Fokker LAGENE Provider Infor l Comment Add command Copy Book Change current shest being used byl Close Quit Excel being used by Action Print Book Print aut all Excel books being used Eat comman Display Book Show Display Excel Book being used by Hide Book Hide Hide Excel Book being used by Acti Delete Command Print Sheet HPrint Sheet 5 Print out select Excel sheet being us Empty Book New Book Create new empty Excel Book bein Open Sheet HCopy Sheet Change current she
376. splay color Yes blinking a display color Yes specifying display rotation Yes specifying a tiling pattern Yes specifying a background color Yes character size full half Yes specifying a background color at tiling Yes E Tag specifying data absolute relative Yes specifying a sign Yes rounding off numbers Yes specifying a display data form Yes specifying display address indirect No bit length when relative is selected Yes input sign when relative is selected Yes input display when relative is selected Yes input range when relative is selected Yes display range when relative is selected Yes character size Yes the number of digits to be displayed Yes the number of decimals Yes display style Yes 7 57 7 3 GP Viewer E Tag specifying a range Yes the number of ranges Yes setting a range Yes specifying a number color Yes blinking a number color Yes specifying a background pattern Yes specifying a background color Yes blinking a background color Yes operation Yes specifying display rotation Yes F Tag specifying a display direct indirect Yes type of screen base screen image screen Yes type of screen CF card image screen No screen number Yes specifying a word address Yes specifying a display data form when relative is selected Yes operation mode area move move between 2 points Yes displaying
377. st be more than one blank space between Run and Macro Name Run Macro Name Parameter RENSA Performs the macro designated by Macro Namd with Parameter as the first argument character type There must be more than one blank space among Run Macro Name and Parameter If you set the same name to Macro Name as cell names used by Excel such as A1 or B1 an error will occur Do not set these names to Macro Name If the designated macro does not exist or a macro call failed an error will occur and the setup will exit Even if a macro has a return value it will be ignored Displaying an Output Book HSDOW ose Opens and displays an output book Hiding an Output Book Hide oe eee If an output book has been opened by Pro Server an output book will not be displayed on the screen At this time an output book remains open If an output book is not opened by Pro Server nothing happens 4 82 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Closing an Output Book Close If an output book has been opened by Pro Server an output book will be closed after saving it automatically Excel will also exit at this time Performing the Contents Designated by Group Name Group Name Pro Server searches the write area equal to the group name designated by Group Name within the write a
378. starts the next operation based on the record in the Action Report sheet If you rewrite the contents of the Action Report sheet it can cause unexpected conditions such as that the Action does not run correctly As a result do not change rewrite these contents if it is not necessary Record File of the Last Output Book When creating the output book in the output folder for the first time this Action creates the file to record the output book name This filename will be the name of the created output book with the INI extension added INI For example if the output book name is Report_ Y M D the Report Y M D INT file will be created The name of the latest output book which performd output and the number of output book creation are recorded in this file When switching the output destination to other output book this Action refers to the contents of this file If you change the contents of the file or delete the file it can cause unexpected conditions such as that the Action does not run correctly 4 93 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action Important Matters When Using Create Report using Excel Action Be sure to understand these items prior to actually using this Action Timing of Opening Closing Output Book This Action opens the output book using the following timing When running the Action from Provider the Command Panel or user defined applications however Close and
379. stem used The following table shows LS area sizes according to GP system versions LS Area Size GP 4096 GP77R SERIES 9999 GP 2000 SERIES GLC2000 SERIES IT SERIES For the GP s LS area size the 2 Way Driver will automatically decide its acces sible range GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 7 0 or later should be installed on the GP system to use the LS area up to 9999 3 36 3 5 VBA Declare statement Using the VBA Support Function nated symbol via a programming support function 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function Selecting VBA Declare Function from Programming Support oe DaaVemDI Confguels Viet Helt Syrbotltem Type fiin Jest fram RET ut DH WIFD Loca DM Dig T6Bi Sired 1030 15Bi Sised 1000 Fro Sene API Decloiation slatenent for use by VBA is caped to clip board RUM 2 The declaration is copied to the Clip board ProEasy DLL ete This string was copied to the clip board Please paste and use in your application Option Explicit ProEasy TXT Pro Server API Declarations for Visual Basic Copyright Cy 1998 2001 Digital Electronics Corporation Pro Server can read and write data both to and from applications supporting Visual Basic and Visual C using
380. successfully the following window appears Click OK to exit the process Fro Studio GI Save Complete 3 48 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration e The following shows the data contents for CSV device data Node name Node name for backup CR Device name Device address to start backup CR Number Number of backup data CR Device length Bit length of the backup device CR Data type unsigned decimal CR Date Backup date CR CR Data comment CR Value of the first device address Name of the first device address CR Value of the second device address Name of the second device address CR The backup date should be written in a format of year month day space hour minute If minute if it is one digit use 0 zero in the second digit 3 49 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration 3 7 2 Restoring Device Data 1 Click Device Restore on the Tools 1 menu of the Menu Bar AA PS Pro Studio EIE Fie Edt Tools T Programming Support Datetview D Configure S Viem Help H Bel E Search Active Node Ea APS Save SRAM Backup Data Symbol item I Type Address Data Type Polling Ti EE Network Transter Network Project 1040 WORD Local D40 16 Bilsigned 1000 BN moim I Computer Tdi WORD Local DA 16 BiSigned 1000 C Q i TIN Eronsa Import C Package Symbol Provide E aed Check C Package Symbol Check Provider Informatio
381. t Peeve problems with the communication setup 5 The communication connection with GP All connections are currently in ee 1010 is at maximum Exit one application and use then reconnect it i The TCP connection is aborted by the partner Receiver has 1013 SED node Check if there are any problems with aborted communication Don the communication setup Expansion Ethernet unit is required 101D No Ethernet controller when using GP 2401 GP 2501 GP 2601 Series units 1030 No response from the protocol Internal problem Please call the support stack dial when it occurred A problem occurred on communication 1032 No response from the Receiver with the partner node Check the connection state including cables When the error type is fatal the 2 Way Driver cannot be restored When the error type is Warning the 2 Way Driver continues to operate Once the cause of the error is removed the error display will disappear when the GP s screen changes When the Reason Code is FO the Alarm Issued Time and Receiver IP Address will also be displayed A 12 A 2 Error Messages SYSLOG If the SYSLOG file S YSLOG EXE located inside the Pro Server s system folder is started the following data can be checked The 2 Way Driver downloaded to the GP can perform a variety of tasks among them being the output of SYSLOG data You can select the type of SYSLOG data output via the GP OFFLINE m
382. t can reduce a burden on the system A 18 A 5 Optimizing Communication Speed Optimizing Device Access When you access to more than one device of more than one node on Pro Server you should put data together in the internal LS area of Pro Server using provider processing than accessing to device directly per node For an application including an action you can ease the communication burden by establishing the system to access to the internal LS area where data are put together lt Slow Case gt GP GLC Factory Gateway GP GLC Factory Gateway Application one Including an ro Server gt Action GP GLC Factory Gateway p To check data of 3 nodes time is required lt Improved Case gt GP GLC Factory Gateway 2 GP GLC Factory Gateway Application Pro Server s an Including an LS Area Action GP GLC Factory Gateway O Because 1 and are done simultaneously data of 3 nodes can be check during plus time A 19 A 6 Changing Windows XP Security Level A 6 Changing Windows XP Security Level When using the OPC interface feature the security level must be set to the same level as Windows 2000 The following explanation describes how to set this level When changing the Windows XP security level to the level of Windows 2000 the security level will be reduced Security Level Change Procedure 1 Select Administrative Tools from the Con
383. tA Pro Studio Bm Ei FilefF EdifE ToolstT Programming Suppor ConfiguretS Viewty Help H Editing Delkte Nede Regkter Symbol Edit Symbol windows Delete Sp piTsuBsH Freaistey Posie Infomation Edi Provide lntamation Delete Praia Infor ation Rreabterdietion Ediecvetion Delete dation Type Address Data Typ Local D40 16 BiSi Local D41 16 BiSi HOT Boen P Register new ently node DTM 14 To Register a Node refer to 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes 2 Designate the IP address for host PC Node MINDOWS oe PLC Type Windows Personal Computer fF IP Address 10 230 290 120 PC Node Data PLC Type Select Windows PC Sub Net Mask 255 0 0 0 IP Address Input the same address of PC s Control Panel Sub Net Mask Unused Used the Control Panel s data Gateway 10 230 230 232 Gateway Unused Used the Control Panel s data Project File Bi PROIPB3 Browse a rens Ji f OK Cancel Hep PLC Type Designate the Windows Personal Computer 3 34 Enter the settings for the PC s internal LS area Provider Information Title Sheet Providing Condition Provider Completion Settings Receive Alert Settings Detailed 4 gt E EGE ee sa i
384. tNodePropertyM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR sNodeName DWORD dwTimeLimit LPCTSTR GPType LPCTSTR SystemVersion LPCTSTR ComVersion LPCTSTR ECOM Version lt Function gt The connected GP status can be acquired This can also be used to check a connection since the response timeout value can be a variable 9 19 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function lt Argument gt hProServer Pro Server handle sNodeName Node name of GP to be read from Node name must be previously registered as a Pro Server network project dwTimeLimit Response timeout setup value If you designate 0 this will be defaulted to 3000 msec The setup range is from 1 through 2 147 483 647 unit msec Secure the area more than 32 bytes for each of followings GpType GP model code SystemVersion GP system version ComVersion PLC protocol driver version ECOM Version 2 Way Driver version lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error codes refer to the separate table CF Card Status Read Function Single INT WINAPI EasyIsCFCard LPCTSTR sNodeName Multi INT WINAPI EasyIsCFCardM HANDLE hProServer LPCTSTR sNodeName lt Function gt The CF Card connection status of the connect GP can be acquired lt Argument gt hProServer Pro Server handle sNodeName Node name of GP to be read from Node name must be previously registered as a Pro Server network project
385. ta Window Help npegjernv iaasjorm aEe AH arial Fj j ru s 8 VA H4 Fi IFD4 D2 F2 lt 1 1 QUOTIENT D4 D2 F2 1 a Bp f c 0 PE TF eos H 1 EN Ea 1 1000 1l 100 EN d 500 50 EF F m E 7 C2 Minimum input value J 2 Maximum input value m N Minimum conversion value F2 Maximum conversion value D4 Input value H4 Conversion value The formula for H4 is as follows IF D4 D2 F2 lt 1 1 QUOTIENT D4 D2 F2 1 To use the abovementioned formula you must first install Excel s Analysis ToolPack To do this us Excel s Tools gt Add Ins dialog to add the Analy sis ToolPack A 15 A 4 GP Ethernet Settings A 4 GP Ethernet Settings Prior to sending data to the GP the proper settings must be entered After data transfer or setup are finished the GP s OFFLINE menu will appear Select INITIALIZE SETUP OPERATION SURROUNDINGS and then EXTENDED SETTINGS Jand the following screen will appear When using the 2 Way driver perform self diagnosis of the Ethernet unit from the following Extended Settings screen not from the OFFLINE mode s Main Menu screen Extended Settings The screens shown here are setup examples 1 Emene SEP 2 svsLos sene OTHERS SETE q SELFOIAGNOSIS
386. tart This method quits Pro Server Then the next time Pro Server is started This method quits all data saving and then quits Pro Server Data saving is not automatically restarted Quit Cancel e Ifthe OS is shutdown while a Pro Server Action feature See Chapter 4 Action Items is running the dialog This program is not responding may appear The dialog shown below is from Windows 2000 Professional If it does appear the OS will not shut down until the dialog box is closed Please pay careful attention to this point when performing a remote OS shutdown End Program ProSeryr xl Peat This program is not responding To return to Windows and check the status of the program click Cancel Ifyou choose to end the program immediately you will lose any unsaved data To end the program now click End Now 2 3 Screen Item Names and Functions 2 3 Screen item Names and Functions The names and functions of Pro Studio s main screen items are as follows Title Bar SAPS Pio Studio Menu Bar re EdifE Tools T Programming Support P Dataview D Configure S Viewty Help H ee Seil Tool Bar 4 Project ID UDP Port Number f Network Entry Node 1938 10720 15 8000 ee WINDOWS_NT 210 180 181 172 Windows Personal Computer Wa MELSEC_GNA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Gn CPU fe WINDOWS 85 10 230 230 118 windows Personal Computer PAGE Provider In
387. tc The OPC I F functions like a DLL to the OPC Client In Process Server EXE format is used for OPC I F for an OPC Client existing in the same PC Local Server EXE format is used for the OPC I F for an OPC Client existing in a remote PC Remote Server Read Write Functions The Read Write functions can be used either sychronously or asynchronously The Read function can use either CACHE or DEVICE and the Write function can use only DEVICE Synchronous This method will require other processing to wait while the OPC Client is either reading or writing data to from the OPC Server Asynchronous This method utilizes a CALLBACK to ackowlege to the Client the reception and completion of a Client s read write requests This allows the OPC Client to perform other processing while waiting for the CALLBACK notice CACHE CACHE means the storage and handling method used for processing requests collected periodically from the Clients in the OPC Server With Pro Server this means the polling tool s internal data This method while it allows the returning of data at high speed to a Client does not allow Real Time processing DEVICE Device data refers to handling of data from the final target PLC Current target data can be provided in real time however the response to that data is usually slower than the CACHE method OPC Server s Operating Environment OS Requirement Windows XP Japanese or English Windows NT Windows 20
388. te Book 9846 2676h Failed to append sheet 9847 2677h Unable to interpret command s and cannot execute 9848 2678h Failed to print 9849 2679h Designated data type is not supported 9850 267Ah Pro Server version is old and cannot be started 9851 267Bh Action Report sheet is corrupted 9852 267Ch Designated group does not exist 9853 267Dh Unable to paste image 9854 267Eh File header is corrupted unable to read 9855 267Fh Unable to open designated CSV file s 9856 2680h Action Area Size is too small 9857 2681h Unable to create or read temporary file 9858 2682h No usable files exist in GP GLC 9859 2683h Designated data type is not supported 9860 2684h A file name is too long and Output Book can t be make 9861 2685h An error occurred while macro run Refer to Log Viewer for the details 9862 2686h Unable to save GP Screen Capture data 9863 2687h Check if the Permission Flag has turned ON 9864 2688h The file name is error 9865 2689h The specified file does not exist in the CF card 9866 268Ah Not the browser application s designated folder Browser cannot be displayed 9870 268Eh Error downloading Binary file 9871 268Fh Binary file Read failed 9872 2690h Binary file Open error 9873 2691h Binary file Analysis failed 9874 2692h Error writing to Excel file 9875 2693h Error writing to CSV file 9876 2694h Error creating Binary file 9877 2695h Designated file does not exist 9878 2696h Conversi
389. te file Sr after data were written Eg Protace qd Printing Moves E Pro Server with Studio Fo Piihting benenpline Pint one seg the seat Oil al Book Location Designate the folder to save Book Name Designate the book name Books can be designated indirectly For details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions Zero Suppress If you check this option no zeros are used in the file name even though the folder name includes M D h m s month day hour minute second data If you do not check this option 0 zeroes are retained in the file name if the folder name includes M D h m s month day hour minute second 0 data i e 07 or 02 The default is checked 4 2 Registering Action Items Writing in the Excel sheet is performed while searching blank line A large amount of data in a sheet can slow down the writing process If a sheet is allocated using a book name like Y M D Nh m s the writing process will be faster File Save Method When you always wish to create a new book check Create new Book If you wish to add append new data to old data etc check Append data to Book If you check Append data to Book you can use the high speed data write feature For details refer to the next page Template Fil
390. te which SRAM and CF Card data will be processed 0 Current data Data in SRAM is processed 1 Latest data data in CF Card The latest file in the CF Card is processed 2 Indirect designation by device address data in CF Card Among data in CF Card the file with the same number as the device value designated by Device Name is processed 3 File number designation data in CF Card The file with the number designated by File Number in CF Card is processed If Write Method is set to Overwrite Type data that cannot be written within a cell range of an Action area will be truncated Adjust a cell range so that data can be written within an Action area GP Screen Data JPEG Data Writes captured data of the GP GLC screen in GP GLC s CF Card or captured data from current GP GLC screens into cells Node Name Normally designate the name of the entry node which reads screen data If you omit designating the node name data is read from the Provider source node when the Action is started by Provider information You cannot omit designating the node name when starting the Action using the Command Panel 4 76 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action File Number Set Designate which data in the GP GLC will be processed 0 Current data capture The GP GLC screen is captured when the Action is started and captured data is processed 1 Latest data data in the CF Card The latest captured data
391. teadsnawsscedseteustuccaceesstesntcescedsoat eceesecateceasoeosseeads A 2 A 1 2 Device Address Options rasenannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnne A 3 A 2 gt Error Mossagos muismseimmseadensnesinaidkneniadnnnnsnninkdnn dann dead dnb adkn ned edel A 4 A 2 1 Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Error Messages rsenannanennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne A 4 A 2 2 2 Way Driver Error Messages and Syslog Features rr ersanvrasvrnnnvnnnnennnvnnnnvnnnnnnnennnn A 11 A 3 Scale Conversion using Excel nsrranannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne A 15 A 4 GP Ethernet Settings r asanrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnenene A 16 A 5 Optimizing Communication Speed r aasvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennne A 18 A 6 Changing Windows XP Security Level rrasnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne A 20 MANUAL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY This manual uses the following symbols and terminology If you have any questions about the contents of this manual please contact your local GP distributor Also If you have any question about your personal computer or Windows please contact your local distributor or manufacturer Safety Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and terms for important information related to the correct and safe operation of this product Symbol Description Incorrect operation result
392. ted Application program recognizes provider completion when provider Set providing condition device via application program condition device is reset Provider Node Device Providing Condition Data O Reset by the system CA after provider w S completion amp Consumer Node Writes provided data Executes an action e When OFF After Providing is unchecked while Upper Edge Trigger in the Providing Condition tab is selected e When ON After Providing is unchecked while Lower Edge Trigger in the Providing Condition tab is selected Set providing condition Reset providing condition device via application device via application program program Provider Node Device Providing Condition Data I 2 i amp gt ox 1 G ug i i Wait for more than 2 Consumer Node pies acto check interval until action executing next provider 3 23 3 3 Registering Provider Data e When Provider Completion Device is designated and Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings is unchecked while Upper Edge Trigger is selected in the Providing Condition tab e When Provider Completion Device is designated and Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings is unchecked while Lower Edge Trigger is selected in the Providing Condition tab Set providing condition device via application program Reset both of providing con
393. ted by commas per Key_Code as shown in the previous page s sheet example to send to more than one destination If the Address column does not exist in the sheet an email is sent to the mail address designated here Message type Set when sending a fixed message Table information Designates when a Excel message sheet is used If the Provider s data matches the Key_code the title and message in the specific line will be sent If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents you designated are displayed If the folder does not exist the following window appears Book Location Folder does not exist C AMy DocumentstD ata Do you create new folder No Cancel Click Yes to create the folder The folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled 1 Pro Server Ver 4 5 uses the User Name and Password settings for POP confirmation 4 44 4 3 10 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Upload to the database Reads data from device address es specified by Excel or Access and writes the data to a designated rela tional database This inserts a new record into the database and saves data to that record Enter the device address to read from or the database to write data to using an Excel b
394. teps will differ For an example of entering other types of parameters refer to 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters The Create Report using Excel Action has its own unique setup procedures and these are summarized in 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 4 2 1 Registering Action Items Here you can register the name used for an Action Item 1 Inthe Pro Studio main screen click to select theNetwork Project tree s Action List feature 2 Select Edit E Register Action from the menu bar p PS Pro Studio File E Edit E Tooe Tj Programming Support F Datsview D Configure S View HelpiH Register Node Edhi Hede Delete Wade Fiegjeter Symball Edk Symball Delete Symbal Fieajeren Pranigen hfomahen Eddi Praniden Inamafen Delite Paris nfameham jon Ed Aei Delte dehan I indows Personal Computer ITSUBISHI MELSEC QnA CPU indows Personal Computer SIO Type Action Action Contents Register new action data 4 7 4 2 Registering Action Items 3 In the Edit Action dialog box select the desired Action Item from the pull down menu and designate the Action name This example uses Writes Data to Excel Book Edit Action To register an action please select the desired contents Note An Action is an operation which specifies the send
395. ter 9 Simple DLL Function 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function rnnasavvnrnnnnnnvennnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnr 9 2 9 1 1 Simple DLL Structure rasrassnannnnannnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnvnnennnnannnen 9 2 9 1 2 Device Read Write Function r aseasnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannennnnnnnnennnnanennnnnnennnnnnnnne 9 5 9 1 3 System and Other Control Functions rrxasrnssvanennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennene 9 16 9 1 4 Precautions When Using Function ss assnennnnnnannnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnovnnnnennnnnonennnnennnnnnennnne 9 34 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function sreansvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennne 9 45 9 2 1 VB Feature Help errnnrannnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnennnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnne 9 45 9 2 2 VC Function Help rasnasnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnen 9 58 9 2 3 Using simple DLL functions with Visual Basic NET resesnvnnneanonnnnnnnnnnnanennennnnnnennenenense 9 79 Chapter 10 OPC Server 101 OPG Server usnaddassdssseaesnue seen 10 2 10 2 Connecting from an OPC Client srensvvnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnner 10 6 Appendices A 1 DDE Function Details rrananannnvvnrvrnnnnnnnnnnnvvnnrnnnnnnnnnvvnennnnnnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnven A 2 A11 DDE Address ie scsccsictccscessscescacsecsceswesennssncnsenca
396. th the processing speed of the system related to Pro Server optimize the processing speed according to the following contents Optimizing Provider Data Count If there are many number of provider data the processing speed of 2Way Driver Pro Server becomes slow For provider data the address of device which executes provider processing should be put together in a sequential way as much as possible so that it can be provided at one time Bit device should be put together in word data rather than setting provider record provider data per bit so that it can be provided at one time Optimizing Providing Condition When you have set Interval in Providing Condition of provider information if you set interval short e g Oms 2Way Driver Pro Server will be dedicated to it and the overall system speed will become slow If it is not necessary for the provider sheet to check provider trigger frequently designate check interval as long as possible according to the system specification Optimizing Action Item Count If you register one action on Pro Server one thread will be created If more than one thread is created overall application processing will become slow in a PC You should design the same action contents to be covered by one action registration as much as possible Streamlining Check Interval Setting When providing more than one device if you set check interval separately check interval does not overlap so that i
397. the Ethernet unit is normally set i A Internal problem Please call the support 1006 Transmit Halt processing failed dial whenitoccured innate een 1S pening again Internal problem Please call the support 1007 without previous initialization i dial when it occurred being completely terminated The port number of the self node is out 1008 Provider Node Port number error the designated range Reset it such as on the offline screen The port number of the partner node is 1009 Receiver Node port number error out the designated range Reset it such as on the offline screen The IP address setup of the partner 100A Receiver Node IP Address error node is incorrect Reset it such as on the offline screen The port number of PLC communication 100B UDP was used to register this overlaps with that for 2Way Check the port number setup of the self node port TCP Was sedtoconiectan The TCP port is used for the same 100C adjacent port with a port havin parner Noe same por J p P 9 number Check if the port number of the the same number partner node is duplicated Protocol Stack establishment Internal problem Please call the support 100D refused dial when it occurred 100E Protocol Stack Open Internal problem Please call the support Failure value was returned dial when it occurred P The TCP connection is closed by the The communication connection 100F partner node Check if there are any has been cu
398. the system time bar it may cause an error or work incorrectly in user defined applications Example1 For the temperature monitoring system of a fireplace suppose that the system always checks temperature going up when a fire place is powered on and creates an error when temperature goes down When storing data of this system and setting back from the present to the past using the system time bar an application recognizes that fireplace temperature went down and creates an error Example2 For the data upper lower edge trigger detecting system when setting back from the present to the past using the system time bar an application recognizes that upper lower edge trigger actually exists and work incorrectly 7 66 Maintenance via Ethernet This chapter explains the maintenance procedures you can perform via the Ethernet network 8 1 Transferring Network Project Files 8 2 Transferring Only Updated Screen Data to GPs 8 1 Transferring Network Project Files 8 1 Transferring Network Project Files The following procedures explain how to transfer a modified network project file npj via the Ethernet network to a previously set up GP i e that has had its system data file sent to it 1 Onthe Network Entry Node list click the destination GP SAPS Pro Studio Fill EdilE Tool Programming Support P DataViewD Configue S View Help H manez APS Sumbotttem pe Address Data Type Poling Ti
399. time you can designate any desired values In this case designate time as part of character strings in the device designation part of Simple DLL or DDE The format is as the following L lt Life Time gt lt Life Time gt Life time value in ms Example When designating 20 seconds as life time IErr ReadDevice Variant GP1 D100 L20000 Data 1 EASY AppKind SignedWord Separate this with blank space after a device or a symbol and designated it in ms after L When using a Visual Studio NET environment This example uses a Visual Basic NET sample For details refer to 9 2 3 Using simple DLL functions with Visual Basic NET When using Visual C NET the VCC sample can be compiled and run However when creating a new project the method of designating an LIB file is different For details 9 2 2 VC Function Help 9 44 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function 9 2 Examples of Simple DLL Function Using read write functions provided by Pro Server allows you to read write data from VB or VC applications This section describes the procedure to read write designated symbols using the programming help feature Procedures are different between VP and VC applications They re described separately 9 2 1 VB Feature Help VBA Declaration 1 Click VBA Declare Function on Programming Support 17 Network Entry Nod l GP 0100 0 faa GP2 10 190 0 EE WINDOWS 10 We Provider Informatics Prog
400. ting is used for 1 3 System Configuration Setting PLC Transfer Settings 2 Way Driver Settings Remarks IP Address O O The PLC communication settings used are allocated to the Expansion Subnet Mask O O Ethernet I F Unit and the 2 Way a Driver settings are allocated to the ateway GP s internal Ethernet I F IP Route Address O O Port No O O O Setting enabled Reference gt 2 Way Driver X Setting disabled 1 4 Application Interfaces 1 4 Application Interfaces 1 4 1 DDE function Outline The DDE Dynamic Data Exchange function can be used with your PC s commercial applications SCADA or MMI software and Excel which supports the DDE client function that provides for program less data exchange Once a DDE link is established Pro Server monitors the internal data and if a stored value changes notifies the client of the change Pro Server provides the client with the data being monitored when a read out request is received and writes the data when a write request is received DDE function Windows appl ication DDE client Excel s client feature does not support data write so the DDE s write feature cannot be used When you write data by Excel use the VBA Support Function Reference gt 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function 1 4 Application Interfaces 1 4 2 Simple DLL Function The applications you create with Visual Basic or Visual C will request
401. tion DWORD WINAPI EasyGetGPTimeString Variant LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR pFormat LPVARIANT povTime for VB lt Function gt Acquires the current time of the designated node as character string Variant Type However this function is effective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name to acquire data from You cannot designate Windows computer nodes pFormat s s s Format setup character string of time to be acquired as character string The format designation code after the percentage sign is converted as shown in the following supplement Other characters will remain and be displayed as they are For details refer to lt Supplement gt of GP TIME STRING Type Read Function povTime ossee Acquired time acquired time is in VARIANT type internal process format is Date lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table Simple DLL Initialization INT WINAPI EasyInit lt Function gt Initializes Simple DLL and declares the usage internally lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code Refer to the attached table For details refer to Precautions When Using Simple DLL in Multi Thread Applications If you execute Easylnit without starting Pro Server Pro Server is automatically started 9 31 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function
402. tion box If unselected the error dialog will appear Device Address Enter the device address to start the restoration When you enter the file name the header address saved in the file is entered If not entered or entered incorrectly the error dialog will appear Restore Number Enter the number of restoration data By default the number of data saved in the file is displayed when entering the filename The minimum number to data to restore is one The maximum number of data differs depending on a backup data file however you cannot restore the number of data exceeding the restriction in the table below Device Type Maximum Number of Maximum Number of to Access Format Restore Data from Special Restore Data from Other Protocol Symbols Device Bit Device Bit 255 16 Bits Bit 255 Device 16 Bits 255 Depends on a backup 32 Bits 127 data file 32 Bits Bit 255 Device 32 Bits 255 If the contents set in the Device Restore dialog are incorrect following dialogs will appear 3 51 3 7 Device Data Backup and Restoration 3 The restoration processing status is displayed in the now dialog File data is now being restored to the device Of 255 0 If the contents set in the Device Restore dialog are incorrect following dialogs will appear Dialog Contents Workaround Cannot designate a bit type symbol to data restore other than in the BIT format
403. tion window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled File Name Designate the file name to save JPEG files read The extension is jpg This is defaulted to NODESY YM D h M s node name year month day hour minute second The exact file name in the CF Card is used if Video Screen Saving Data has been selected at Select Data to Read File names can be designated indirectly For details see 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Creating a Macro to Use Same Save File for Actions Zero Suppress If you check this option no zeros are supplied to the file name even if the file name includes zeros M D h m s month day hour minute second Ex 04 or 07 If you do not check this option 0 zero is added to the file name if the file name includes M D h M s month day hour minute second data and that number is a single digit Default is checked 4 57 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters This file name already exists If you wish to overwrite existing files check Save Rewrite If you do not want to overwrite existing files check Number End of File Name This is defaulted to Number End of File Name Show Browser When this item is checked the data uploaded is displayed using a special JPEG file browser This browser can be used to print copy
404. tion with the server for a certain period of time check this item This can be set only if Normally connected to server is checked Designate the time period in Min box Database Access Method Selected data is written from the database at once Excel or written after being saved Access File designation Designate a file location and a sheet table name If you check the Save To Folder location in the Action parameter display and if the folder exists the contents exactly as you designated is displayed If the folder does not exist the following window appears Book Location Folder does not exist CAMyp DocumentsDate Do you create new folder No Cancel Click Yes to create the folder The folder creation window will appear If you click No the folder designation window will appear to designate the Save To Folder location If you click Cancel the process is canceled 4 54 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 2 When clicking Details the following setting window will appear setup of details setup of a server Server connection time See Retry number of times Disconnect Time Min Cancel A setup of a server Enter the communication time to the database server and the number of retries performed If you have checked If connection request is not received within standard time period connection is terminated in the Upload from th
405. to check device rewrites Status ON Provides when a device value designated by a symbol is other than zero Select the symbol to desig nate from the pull down list If you wish to limit the period check Limit Period and enter the period Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period Enter also the interval ms to check device ON OFF Status OFF Provides when a device value designated by a symbol is equal to zero Select the symbol to designate from the pull down list If you wish to limit the period check Limit Period and enter the period Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period Enter also the interval ms to check device ON OFF Upper Edge Trigger Provides when a device value designated by a symbol changes from zero to values other than zero Select the symbol to designate from the pull down list If you wish to limit the providing period check Limit Period and enter the period Trigger condition becomes effective only during that period After providing this device check OFF After Providing to turn it OFF automatically Also enter the interval ms to check device values 3 21 3 3 Registering Provider Data Lower Edge Trigger Provides when a device value designated by a symbol changes from values other than zero to zero Select the symbol to designate from the pull down list If you wish to limit the providing period check Limit Period and enter the period Trigge
406. tring NULL is reached 4 14 4 2 3 Registering Provider Information 4 2 Registering Action Items The following describes how to register Provider information using an Action Item 1 2 Select the Provider information list from the main screen s network project tree Select Edit E Register Provider Information from the menu bar Provider Node poelect Provider Node WINDOWS_NT 210 160 181 172 Windows Personal Computer MELSEC_QMA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC QnaA CP WINDOWS 95 10 230 230 119 Windows Personal Computer GP1 10 100 0 12 MEMORY LINK 810 Type Please register all node names and symbols Symbols are start addresses for provider and consumer data areas Note After editing this data please save it before sending to the GP Ifyou set PC nodae s for consumer you must restart Pro Server E Cancel HelpiH Select the Provider source node to use and click OK The Provider Information dialog box appears Enter the desired Provider information name in the Title entry box Here Sheet2 is entered as an example Select the Providing Condition item and enter the device address to be written to as the Provider Node symbol name I Provider Information Title Sheet Providing Condition Provider Completion Settings I Receive Alert Settings Detailed 4 I
407. trol Panel ontrol Pane flog File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Q Back v v amp L Search est Folders E Address Control Panel Eco a vag Control Panel a Accessibility Options E Switch to Category View iis Add or Remove Programs k See Also 2 sg Windows Update Date and Time Display Help and Support 2 47 Folder Options cA Fonts A s T Game Controllers 1 Internet Options amp Java Plug in Sp Keyboard Network Connections 2 Select Local Security Policy Ad ative Too olx File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Back amp L Search ie Folders Address g Administrative Tools Be Name a Size Type Date Modified File and Folder Tasks Component Services 2KB Shortcut 4 1 2003 9 38 PM i Computer Management 2KB Shortcut 12 19 2003 11 55 AM Other Places A EBbata Sources ODBC 2KB Shortcut 4 1 2003 9 42 PM 3 desktop ini 1KB Configuration Settings 4 1 2003 9 42 PM E Control Panel Glevent viewer 2KB Shortcut 4 1 2003 9 42 PM My Documents Local Security Policy 2KB Shortcut 4 1 2003 9 42 PM Shared Documents emicrosoft NET Framework 1 1KB Shortcut 11 7 2003 3 04 PM R My Computer sn NET Framework 1 2KB Shortcut 11 7 2003 3 04 PM hr 4 i My Network Places Performance 2KB Shortcut 1 2003 9 42 PM BRsservices 2KB Shortcut 4 1 2003 9 42 PM Details M A 20 A 6 Changing
408. ts 11 Double precision floating point 6 Signed 32 bits decimal 12 Character string When an Action receives data from Provider Node When an Action receives data of signed 16 bits decimal unsigned 16 bits 7 Designate the Action Name used for the Consumer Node s Symbol Name decimal 16 bits hexadecimal all data is processed as signed 16 bits decimal When an Action receives data of signed 32 bits decimal unsigned 32 bits decimal 32 bits hexadecimal all data is processed as signed 32 bits decimal When entering Provider settings only Consumer Nodes that are Windows PCs can be assigned an Action Name For Provider registration setting details refer to 3 3 Registering Provider Data 4 16 4 2 Registering Action Items 8 After all desired Provider Information settings are entered click OK and that Provider Information will be registered SA PS Pro Studio File F Edit E Tool I Programming Suppor P Dataview D Configure View Help H ala Es Entry Node E WINDOWS MT 210 Information i m r Action List Registered Provider information name Action name used by registered Provider information 9 Save the network project file and then transfer the data to the GP 60 181 172 Windows Personal Computer Wg MELSEC ONA 10 230 254 254 MITSUBISHI MELSEC Qn4 CPU WINDOWS 95 10 230 230
409. tudio main window Opening a Network Project File 1 Inthe program s main window click Open O in the File F menu 4 Untitled Pro Studio FilelF EHE Took T Programming Suppo P Dataview D Configure S View HelplH Project ID UDP Port Number 2001 11 0213 8000 Save asi Piece Cale Artem Exit Pro Studio Open Network Project File 2 Select the file you wish to open and click Open Q Files of type Network Project File npi z sd 3 The file opens 2 8 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software Saving a Network Project File 1 Inthe program s main window click Save S or Save as A in the File F menu Untitled Pro Studio S Untitled Pro Studio File Fl EditlE Tools T Programming SupporilE File al EdiE Tools T Programming Suppori P New N Cte New N CtrkN Open O Creo Open Q Ctil Q Save 5 Cuil 5 Save asl Print Cela Perinat 2 Cl 1 mtom 1 mtom Exit Pro Studio z Exit Pro Studio s 2 If you have selected Save S the file is saved by overwriting the existing contents If you have selected Save as A in the following dialog box save the file with
410. tup Data Source Name DSN OK Description Cancel PD atabase Database Help Create Repar Compact j Advanced Heel p System Database None 3 Database System Database Ts Options gt gt l 6 Check that the Data Source Name entered in step 3 is correct and click OK 71 User DSN System DSN File DSN ODBC Drivers Tracing About User Data Sources X Add DSN Microsoft Access Driver mdb Configure An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on the current machine OK Cancel Apply Help 4 50 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters 4 3 11 Download from the database Reads data from the relational database specified by Excel or Access and writes to the specific device address es Device address to write to or database where write data is located is entered in the Excel book file xls or the Access database file mdb You can change the designation of the device address to write to or the database where where write data is located using the Provider data settings Using Excel the data will directly be written into the specified device address es Using Acces
411. tup Factory Gateway z D Read C Package Local Symbols in MUM A 3 13 3 2 Registering Symbols If the setting contents are incorrect following dialogs will appear Dialog Contents Solution XXX number undefined Screen Editor Symbols have been used on the screen If they are not defined symbols they cannot be imported used by Pro Server To import use the Screen Editor Symbols in Pro Server you must use drawing software data only the Screen Editor Symbols used on the screen can be imported Cannot perform processing because the PLC type set on Pro Server does not match to that defined in the PRO PB III project file Set the correct PLC type in the PLC Type field of the Edit Node dialog box in procedure 2 Cannot find the project file to be imported Designate the project file using the Edit E Edit Node PRO PB III Project File fearture Designate the project file prw using the PRO PB III Project File field of the Edit Node dialog box in the procedure 2 If the designated project file prw does not exit re designate the correct project file Cannot execute not in administrator mode Please login again Login again in administrator mode and re import the data The following dialog box will appear and the GLC symbols will be imported Pro Studio QD Error 0 symbols Registered 20 symbols
412. tup contents differ depending on each selected Action Register and set Actions U Register Provider information Register Provider conditions or Provider and consumer nodes Set an Action to perform as a symbol name of a consumer node z ransfer the designated contents to entry nodes Transfer the network project file Ti Reference gt GP PRO PB III for Windows Operation Manual Reference gt 3 1 Registering Network Entry Nodes Reference gt 3 2 Registering Symbols Reference gt 4 2 1 Registering Action Items 5 Reference gt 4 2 2 Setting Action Parameters Reference 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters Reference 4 2 3 Registering Pro vider Information Reference 3 3 Registering Provider Data Reference gt 8 1 Transferring Network Project Files Registering the Create Report using Excel Action Item is different from others For procedures 4 and 6 refer to 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action 4 3 4 1 2 4 1 Overview Available Action Items The following Action Items are available These Action Items are installed during the Pro Server standard installation Start Application This starts desired applications installed in Windows computers on the network Writes Data to Excel Book This writes designated Provider data to an Excel book Alarm Log with Sound
413. tware 2 2 Starting and Exiting the Software This section describes how to start and exit this software 2 2 1 Using Pro Studio Starting Pro Studio The following explanation assumes that the Windows desktop is already displayed 1 Click Start button and when the Start menu appears point to Programs Pro face and Pro Server with Studio and select Pro Studio Windows Update F programs Accessories r icine i Online Services a Favorites YE Pro Server with Studio P p Pro Server Gone ene lt Be Settings H MS DOS Prompt 6 Outlook Express T End HIE Windows Explorer amp Help Fa 3 Bun 2 e Log Off Administrator amp Shut Down Double clicking on the desired network project file npj in Windows Explorer automatically starts Pro Studio 2 The program s main window will appear The left side window shows a list of network entry node GPs the right side window shows the symbols registered for each GP Use this screen to enter a variety of settings to configure your system p Untitled Pro Studio FileE Edit E Tools I Programming Support P Dataview Configurels View v Ga a Tes g Untitled po FE Network Enty Node ped Provider Information ig Action List lim Help H Project ID UDP Port Number 2001 11402 13 8000 H
414. u Selected Sampling data when PC was distributed in Sampling method The contents of the Condition field are as the following You should enter the Provider information setup name in Provider Sheet of the Condition field and then click Provider Data Registration to designate the new Provider information setup If you have already designated Provider information setups you can select it from the pull down list I Sampling method CX Sampling method F Regular Sampling Periodic Sampling Sampling data after change in device condition Provide Sheet Sampling using cache Data Sampling from start to finish of data reception Polling data record file Change CiMy Documentsttat DB Saving Method fo maximum size Provide Sheet If pre defined Provider information setups exist select it from the pull down list If it does not exist you should enter the name Be sure to set the Provide Information interval to 1000ms or longer Sampling using cache Check this box to use the cache to sample device data Data sampling from start to finish of data reception Designate the sampling method before and after receiving the Provider information You should designate sampling times before and
415. uble 6 Signed 32 Bit 12 Character string The Read WriteDevice function allows the data type to be changed dynamically because it is specified as a parameter lt Supplement gt When Using Read WriteDeviceBit Function The function stores data as many as wCount from the DO bit in pwData Example When wCount is 20 FJEJ DICG B A I918171 61 5 3 2 0 PwData 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 413 12 1 PwData 1 K KN RYN EN KN 20 19 18 17 When handling sequential plural bit data it is more effective to read write in 16 32 bits using Read WriteDevice16 or Read WriteDevice32 than Read WriteDeviceBit Irregular values are stored in the bits shown as x Mask those using an application program 9 14 When Using Read WriteDeviceBCD 16 32 Function Use these functions when handling data as BCD within PLC However data contents of pxxData to 9 1 Simple DLL ProEasy DLL Function receive from and to give to these functions are not BCD but binary data BCD conversion is performed within Pro Server You cannot handle negative numbers Function Name Decimal Expression Hexadecimal Expression Read WriteDeviceBCD16 0 9999 0000 270F Read WriteDeviceBCD32 0 99999999 00000000 05F5EOFF When Using Character String Data Function For variables to receive character
416. uit the Design Mode Design Icon si H r H 0 R o MA eE 3 42 3 5 Using the VBA Support Function 3 Thus when you enter 100 in Excel s worksheet cell A1 and press the Command Button 100 is written to the GP or PLC symbol s device icrosoft Excel Book1 34 File Edit wiew Insert Format Tool De amp la y i SE Arial Mllo Ell B The Device Monitor feature allows you to easily check that the data has been written successfully Reference gt Chapter 6 Tools Device Monitor x MELSEC QNAI D40 WORD Signed O Unsigned O HEX BCD GPIIVALVJ 00 01 02 E DMAIC Hoo o 11 4 DMUTO3 P 113 114 DMOO 15 118 117 DMNOS afe 119 A20 DMONZ 1P1 122 12 DWO115 12 12 E 100 has been written to the device When using VB NET if you insert the declaration according to this procedure an error will occur when executing it You cannot use VBA Declaration directly because data sizes of Integer or Long are different between VB NET and Visual Basic VBA Declaration is for Visual Basic or Basic for Application 3 43 3 6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM 3 6 Saving Backup Data in SRAM Pro Studio allows you to upload backup data stored in a GP s SRAM to the host PC as a comma delimited CSV Comma Separated Value file You can open CSV files using Excel Access or any application that supports the CSV
417. umber starts from the last Number of Rows row 7 Designates the data read startcolumn Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the Start Position enna Number of Readouts Designates the readoutdata column The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file Data readout order is from 1 to 6 Start Posi osmon Humber of Rows Humber of Readouts m All the Column R eadout Detail er Description Designates the startcolumn Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last StartColumn column Designates the number of columns Entering 0 or a negative number starts fom the Number of Columns st column The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file Data readout order is from 1 to 10 Start Column Humber of Columns 4 62 4 3 Registering Action Item Parameters m From the Middle to the Last of a Column Description Designates the startcolumn Entering 0 or a negative number starts from the last column Designates the number of columns Entering 0 or a negative number starts fom the last column Designates the data read startrow Entering 0 or a negative number starts fom the lastrow The shaded area in the following table indicates what data will be read out from a CSV file Data readout order is from 1 to 8 Start Column Humber of Columns m Number of Readouts from the Middle of a Row R
418. use both the 2 Way Driver and Ethernet protocols at the same time on GP77R GP 2501 GP 2601 series units 3 You can use the 2 Way Driver together with listed protocols however there are device restrictions for Pro Server access Screens only need to be created for the devices that can be accessed Protocol Name Can access only the link device LS Area MITSUBISHI MELSECNET 10 and symbols designated in a GP PRO PB Ill project file prw AB SIc500 DH485 Siemens 57 200 via MPI Can access only the LS Area and symbols OMRON SYSMAC CS1 ETHER designated in a GP PRO PB III project file HITACHI HIDIC H ETHER prw Can access only the LS Area 4 This protocol cannot be used with the 2 Way Driver 5 When accessing a device connected one to one with a PLC it is not necessary to register Symbols with GP PRO PBIII for Windows However when connecting to multiple PLC units or accessing an Expansion device Symbols must be registered with GP PRO PBIII for Windows 6 Simultaneous use of the 2 Way Driver is possible however only the LS area and symbols set via the C Package03 project file can be accessed The Factory Gateway cannot be used to enter protocol settings 19 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Introduction This chapter describes how to use this software to configure a system in which you can gather data from devices PLCs connected to networked GPs Outline What is the 2 Way Driver System Configu
419. use in vour application 4 Here the copied string is pasted into an Excel worksheet to create a DDE link 25 Microsoft Excel File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help n ReRTJi teso v e e 4 3 id ral elle uj gt A 4 gt ve sm dJFlxw PROSERYRIMELSEC ONA DAD WORD B c A PROSERVRIMELSEC QNAI D40 WORD When a symbol s data is text and is copied to an Excel cell only the first character of the text will be displayed In this case edit that Excel cell na and add the required characters Ex PROSERVER GP1 SYMBOL 20 s yp Be sure to put quotation marks around Reference gt A 1 DDE Function Details 3 33 3 4 Using the DDE Function Workaround Example 1 for Mass Data Creating an LS Area inside your PC When using the data distribution feature the creation of an internal LS Pro Server area inside your PC will allow you to read out data periodically via GP from one or more PLCs The setting of the DDE feature to read out collected data from the LS area will allow the data in the LS area to be refreshed faster DDE Application Pro Server LS Area E a Personal Computer GP PLC 1 Call up the Register Node feature to register the host PC Projec
420. using the Browse button to designate the project file prw the following project filename change confirmation dialog box will appear D Change Node Name to the Project File Name GP PRO PB 3 No Cancel Yes Change Node name to Project file name No Do not change Node name Cancel Returns to the Edit Node dialog box without changing the project file If the designated project file prw name is incorrect an alarm message dialog box will appear e When the designated GP PRO PBIII project file has been changed all of that node s previously registered symbol s address display section GLC Symbols Screen Creation Definition Symbols that have become symbols are automatically deleted 3 Select the Tools T Import C Package Symbol command SLA PS Pro Studio OT FilE Edt Toast Programming Support DataviemiD Configure S Viem Help H Check Provider Information Fy Dizi Search Active Node Ea APS Save SRAM Backup Data Symbolfltem Type Address Data Type Paling Tir G Network Transfer Network Project 152030 WORD Local L52030 16 Bit Signed 1000 MN meer Symbol Ear all pt Export Symbol bes os rea BBP Action li Check C Package Symbol Status Monitor Remote Logon Remote Logalt Device Backup Device Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Se
421. ut No bar code input No alarm direct indirect color change Yes specifying an alarm display color Yes blinking an alarm display color Yes specifying an alarm background color Yes blinking an alarm background color Yes operation Yes specifying display rotation Yes L Tag screen number direct indirect state Yes starting method Yes calling the base screen and the image screen Yes delete action enable unable Yes display a data form when indirect is selected BIN BCD Yes calling image screens in the CF Card No 7 59 7 3 GP Viewer M Tag screen number direct indirect Yes starting method Yes display data format when indirect is selected BIN BCD Yes offset value Yes specifying a display size Yes display color 0 foreground color Yes display color 0 blinking foreground color Yes display color 0 background color Yes display color 0 blinking background color Yes display color 1 foreground color Yes display color 1 blinking foreground color Yes display color 1 background color Yes display color 1 blinking background color Yes N Tag specifying data absolute relative Yes specifying if to show a negative number Yes specifying a display data form Yes access a data length Yes input range when relative is selected Yes text size Yes text font No number of digits to be displayed Yes specifying a display co
422. ut Time elapsed and no response was received b If provider is executed with Reply Check unchecked in the Detailed Settings tab provider is regarded as being completed when having received replies from all provider destinations c When condition a is satisfied and a Retry value has been entered in the Detailed Settings tab this condition indicates polling termination was performed after the Retry was performed the specified number of times and no response was received Entering the following settings in the Providing Condition tab will disable the Provider Completion Device feature e Checking OFF After Providing of Upper Edge Trigger or ON After Providing of Lower Edge Trigger in the Providing Condition tab 3 22 3 3 Registering Provider Data You can set the Automatic Device Reset after Reset of Provider Settings checkbox only under the following condition e When OFF After Providing of Upper Edge Trigger or ON After Providing of Lower Edge Trigger in the Providing Condition tab are not checked The following timing charts describe 4 kinds of provider completion conditions using Upper Edge Trigger and Lower Edge Trigger in the Providing Condition tab e When OFF After Providing is checked while Upper Edge Trigger in the Providing Condition tab is selected e When ON After Providing is checked while Lower Edge Trigger in the Providing Condi tion tab is selec
423. utomatic Download of GP Filing Data Automatic Upload of O o O O o O O O O O O x GP Filing Data Automatic Upload of O o O O O O O O O O O x Access Data Automatic Download O o O O O O O O O O O x of Access Data Download Recipe O o O O O O O O O O O x data for Excel Writes Data to E Mail o g go o o lol lo ololo oO O Title name Writes Data to E Mail o O o y k t y Table Writes Data to E Mail o x x x x x x x x x x x no designations Upload to the database O O O O O O O O O O O O Download from the database x O O O x x x x x x x O Upload of JPEG Data O O O O O O O O O O O O Writes Data to CSV file O O O O O O O O O O O O Writes Datafrom CSV fel O O O O O 0101 OO 0 0 O O Create report using Excel O O O O O O O 0 04 O olo 4 2 Registering Action Items 4 2 Registering Action Items The information given here corresponds to registration procedures 4 and 4 1 1 Action Item Registra tion See references for registration procedures through and This section describes a series of Action registration procedures from Action registration to parameter setup and Provider information registration The example Action used here is Writes Data to Excel Book Action and Provider information registration are common to each Action Item however parameter registration s
424. viewed using a variety of tools such as Device View and GP Viewer 1 7 Configuring the System 1 7 Configuring the System The following explanation describes the steps you must follow to start Pro Server and assumes that GP PRO PBIII is already installed on your PC Installing Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows Install Pro Server with Pro Studio for Windows on your PC s hard disk lt 7 Starting GP PRO PBIII Start the GP PRO PBIII for Windows software we Creating Saving the screens with GP PRO PBIII Open the GP PRO PBIII project file create as many project files as the number of the connected GPs and save 7 N Starting Pro Studio Start Pro Studio d the project files d Ub Setting Saving the network project file with Pro Studio Open the network project file in Pro Studio make the necessary settings and save the file Us Transferring project files to your GPs Transfer the project files the network project file and the ETR GP system setting to each connected GPs one by one T Performance Measurement Measure the performance with the read performance GER measuring tool ps 7 Operation Connect the GPs and the PC using a network cable Start Pro Server on your PC aaa vr RA S C Reference 2 1 Installing the Software Reference GP PRO PBIII Operation Manual Reference
425. w I Device View ial File E Option DataEdit Sampling ott en jenny mr Item name Node name Device name Yalul 2030 GP2300L 2030 o 2031 GP2300L 2031 a 2032 GP2300L 2032 16 2033 GP2300L 2033 1 2034 GP2300L 2034 o 2035 GP2300L 2035 2036 GP2300L 2036 10 2037 GP2300L 2037 a 2038 GP2300L 2038 727 2039 GP2300L 2033 D 14 o Jer 200411002 u 204 B 20011002 131023 131315 E 13 13 18 EE He i Y En 7 2 Device View 2 The Data Edit dialog appears You can edit data in various methods The following part describes the major operation method after the Data Edit dialog appeared Data Source 77 1 2 3 item name 2030 2031 2032 Append Mode name GP2300L Device name 2030 GP2300L 2031 GP2300L 2032 Value 0 000000 0 000000 16 000000 Data Type 16 BittSigned 16 Bit Signed 16 Bit Sig ltem Status Error Code i 0 M Data number 1 1 1 Upper Limit 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Alarm Upper Limit 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Alarm Lower Limit 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Delete 1412701 1 10 23 PM r 1412 01 1 10 24 PM A201 1 10 25 PM 14201 1 10 26 PM
426. will not be changed automatically For example when the file that the output book name is Report_ Y_ M_ D is used if this Action uses the output book on October 29th 2002 the Action result will be output to the output book of Report_2002_10_29 xls If this Action uses the output book on the next day October 30th 2002 the Action result will be output to the Report 2002 10 30 x1s output book however Report_2002_10_29 xls and Report_2002_10_30 xls are the same output book of Report Y M D and it means that a new output book will not be created every time the day changes Version Compatibility When a version of Pro Server that is lower than 4 5 is used with a template set for either Write method Scroll Type or Loop Type the action area s OCX is copied as it is to the output file In this case delete the action area When a version of Pro Server that is lower than 4 5 is used with a template that has the data type of alarm blocks 4 to 8 the action area s OCX is copied as it is to the output file In this case delete the action area 4 95 GP Setup This chapter explains how to transfer a Pro Studio network project file npj and a GP PRO PB III project file x PRW to a connected GP 5 1 Transferring Data to GPs 5 1 Transferring Data to GPs 5 1 Transferring Data to GPs In the GP PRO PBIII screen editor software select the network project file and node name and transfer the desire
427. with Send All Screens Setting Transfer with Automatically S end C hanged S creens Transfer with Force System S etup 5 1 Transferring Data to GPs 4 Select the network project file and the network node to which you wish to transfer the informa tion and then cl ick OK Select Network Project File and Node Network Project File Program Files DIGITALIPro Server with Pre Node GP1 160 187 3 7 Already Selected Fl Note Ifyou are editing this Network Project File please save befor select E Ok i Cancel 5 Click Send on the Transfer menu or the Send Screen button to transfer the information to the GP Send Screen button J2 Transfer el Help Transfer Setup View Options Prepare BREE f Receive ransfer Method amp utamatic Create system boot data of CF Card System Setup Automatic Send system boot data to CF Card Send Ta Ethernet Create backup data Create PRW file Prepare Status Send backup data Receive backup data Create Dictionary Send Dictionary Receive Dictionary Send JPG Files Receive JPG Files J Start GP web Compiler Abort Tranter Exit MUM Transfer Setup View Options
428. x EtherNet IP Allen Bradley SLC5 05 ETHER Schneider TSX via UNI TELWAY Schneider Modbus TCP ETHER Schneider Modbus RTU 1 n comm The symbol of special protocol cannot display the device address Therefore these symbols are described as Screen Creation Definition Symbol on Pro Studio All symbols for screens created by GP PRO PB III for Windows are normally screen creation definition symbols however only Special Protocol Symbol is described as Screen Creation Definition Symbol on Pro Studio In dialogs if it is described as Screen Creation Definition Symbol it means the symbol of special protocol The following figure shows the operation flow for the symbol of Special Protocol If all of symbols and aren t the same Pro Server can t access Special Protcol Symbol Ethernet The Inside of PC GP PRO PB III de Creates screens for GO Import created symbols to Pro Server CA Importing C Package Symbol GP GLC on GP PRO PB Ill Checks if symbols imported to Pro Server are ee same as those in GP GLC Checking C pd set Package Symbol i ER Symbol Transfers created screens GP GLC symbols to GP GLC PLC 3 66 3 13 Other Instructions Restriction When Using Drawing Definition Symbols with Pro Server s Various Features When you use Special Protocol symbols d
429. yGetGPTime LPCTSTR sNodeName DWORD podwTime for VC lt Function gt Acquires the current time of the designated node as number DWORD type However this function is effective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name to acquire data from You cannot designate Windows computer nodes podwTime eee Acquired time time in DWORD type actually acquired in time_t type defined by ANSD lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table GP Time VARIANT Type Read Function DWORD WINAPI EasyGetGPTime Variant LPCTSTR sNodeName LPVARIANT povTime for VB lt Function gt Acquires the current time of the designated node as number Variant type However this function is effective from LS2048 which saves time in 6 words lt Arguments gt sNodeName Node name to acquire data from You cannot designate Windows computer nodes POVTime osses Acquired time acquired time is in VARIANT type internal process format is Date lt Return value gt Executed successfully 0 Not executed successfully Error code refer to the separate table GP Time STRING Type Read Function DWORD WINAPI EasyGetGPTimeString LPCTSTR sNodeName LPCTSTR pFormat LPTSTR posTime for VC lt Function gt Acquires the current time of the designated node as character string LPTSTR type However this function is ef
430. ymbolfltem Type D40 WORD Local DH WORD Local Address Data Type Polling Ti D40 16 Bit Signed 1000 DA 16 Bit Signed 1000 Help is Fl key You can right click the symbol to select Status Monitor from the shortcut menu 2 Click Status Monitor in the Tools T menu FielE EdiE Tools T Programming Supper Dataview D Configure S View Help H Check Provider Information Search Active Node Symbolftem Tree Save SRAM Backup Data Address Data type Foling Tr 040 WORD D81 WORD Local Local D40 Transfer Network Project ransfer Network Project Ba Import Symbol Export Symbol Import C Package Symbol Check C Package Symbol l Computer Computer Dene Hanlar Remote Logon Remote Logott Device Backup Device Restore Save GP Capture Data Data Read Performance Measurement Setup Factory Gateway 16 BitSigned 16 Bit Signed 1000 1000 Start monitor of this node s status aE NUMI 3 6 2 GP Status Monitoring Monitor the status of the GP To change the polling time click Setting Click Clear to clear communication error codes of the selected node Communication Error Communication Errorextend Statu
431. you click it group names sepa Buttons to add each command rated by commas will be added in separated by a comma in the the command field command field 4 When you setup or edit commands use the buttons in the dialog above to add commands or group names to the process name field If you click BS commands are deleted one by one CLR deletes all commands 5 If you complete setting or editing commands click OK Next click OK in the Process dialog box You can create new commands by clicking Add Command however the contents of the dialog displayed are same as those of Edit Command When deleting a process name select the process name using your and then click Delete Command About Commands A command is a specific operation that you wish the designated Action to perform and you can perform one operation using one command A command line consists of more than one command including a group so that it can perform a series of operations The following restrictions apply when naming a command command line group template sheet 1 A command line consists of more than one command or group and each command group name is separated by comma 2 Inthe case of a command name sharp is added in front of the name 4 80 4 4 Using Create Report using Excel Action In the case of a group name you cannot use sharp in from of the name BR In the case of a group name you ca

Pro-Server with Pro-Studio for Windows Operation - Pro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents